BT3000 PLUS Technology Advanced Random Generation Analyzer System SERVICE MANUAL P/N: MS04444-05ING Software Version 10.0 Rev. 2, October, 2006 This product conforms to the safety requirements of the Council Directives 98/79/EEC of 27 October 1998 (European Parliament) regarding the In-Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices. This directive is in accordance with the Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Directive 89/336/EEC, which ceases to apply to the products complying with the present directive. Refer to Paragraph 7, Article No.1 of the IEC Official Gazette No. L331 of Dec. 1998. It also conforms to Italian Regulations CEI EN 61010-01 and CEI EN 61326-1 (EMC). The conformity is attested when the equipment is installed in accordance with the conditions outlined in the manual MANUAL REVISION RECORD This record page is for recording revisions to your BT3000 PLUS manual that has been published by Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. We recommend that only the management or facility representative authorized to process changes and revisions to publications observe as follows: Make the pen changes or insert the revised pages. Ensure that obsolete pages are withdrawn and either disposed of immediately, or marked as superseded and placed in a superseded document file. Enter the information below reflecting that the revisions have been entered. Rev. No. Date Ver.10.0 06/10/2006 Rev.2 Description Approved By The following sections have been revised: Index, Section A, Section 002, Section 003, Section 005, Section 006, Section 010, Section 012, Section 013, Section 014, Section 015 Revisions are recorded separately and are available upon request. INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 15 Menchinelli This Page is intentionally left blank INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 15 BT 3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION A • • • • • • • • • • WARRANTY CONDITIONS INSTRUMENTS RETURN AUTHORIZATION MOD.05-35a POTENTIAL RISKS DURING OPERATION & MAINTENANCE WARNINGS USE OF THE BT3000 PLUS & BYPRODUCTS INTERNAL COMPUTER RETURNING THE ANALYZER TO THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES DISPOSAL CONFORMANCE THE COMPANY PROFILE PACKING AND UNPACKING THE ANALYZER SECTION I INTRODUCTION - BT3000 PLUS SYSTEM PARA. 1-1. 1-2. 1-3. 1-4. 1-5. 1-6. 1-7. 1-8. TITLE SECT. EXAMPLES OF THE BASIC OPERATIONS OF CLIN. CHEM..... PHASE 1: CREATION OF THE WORKLIST……………...........…. PHASE 2: PLACEMENT OF SAMPLES AND REAGENTS……... PHASE 3: START-UP.................................................................... PHASE 4: PROCESS INITIATION................................................ PHASE 5: READING CYCLE………………................................... EXAMPLE OF BASIC ELECTROLYTES OPERATION……......... ISE SAMPLING............................................................................. I I I I I I I I SECTION II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PARA. TITLE 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-4.1. 2-4.2. 2-4.3. 2-4.4. PHYSICAL DIMENSION OF BT 3000 PLUS......................…....... POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS............................................. EMC AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY..............…………………......... PERFORMANCE & TECHNICAL SPECS..................................... OPERATING AMBIENT CONDITIONS......................................... VOLUMES..................................................................................... ISE MODULE................................................................................. "UTILITY" EXECUTION TIMES..................................................... INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service SECT. Page 4 of 15 II II II II II II II II BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14. TITLE SECT. FUNCTIONAL LIMITS................................................................... CUVETTE TEMPERATURECONTROL........................................ REAGENTS REFRIGERATION.......……………………................. DILUTER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY........………………….... PHOTOMETER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY............................ PHOTOMETER TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP……..….............. DATA MANAGEMENT………....................................................... FLUID DYNAMICS............………………...................................... WASHING SOLUTION SUPPLY................................................... LIQUID SENSOR........................................................................... II II II II II II II II II II SECTION III ELECTRONICS PARA. TITLE SECT. 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-3.1. 3-3.2. 3-3.3. 3-3.4. 3-3.5. 3-3.6. 3-3.7. 3-4. 3-5. TOP VIEW OF THE BT 3000 PLUS.............................................. ANALYZER STRUCTURE………………….................................... DESCRIPTION OF ANALYZER MODULES................................ COMPUTER MODULE.................................................................. READING STATION...................................................................... POWER SUPPLY MODULE.......................................................... REAGENTS SYSTEM................................................................... SAMPLING MODULE.................................................................... ISE MODULE................................................................................. DUAL SAMPLING ARMS MODULE ............................................. SYSTEM ELECTRONICS….…….................................................. EXAMPLE OF THE I2C-BUS CONFIGURAZIONE....................... III III III III III III III III III III III III SECTION IV SOFTWARE PARA. 4-1. 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. 4-4.1. 4-5. 4-6. TITLE GENERAL...................................................................................... PATIENT TRANSMISSION........................................................... RESULTS RECEPTION................................................................ CALCULATION OF CHECK-SUM................................................. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE SERIAL PROTOCOL.................. WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERFACE CABLE................................ VARIABLE SERIAL PROTOCOL................................................... INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 15 SECT. IV IV IV IV IV IV IV BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. 4-7. 4-8. 4-9. TITLE SERIAL COMMUNICATION TEST PROGRAMS.......................... PROGRAM COMUNICA.EXE........................................................ PROGRAM BTPLUS.EXE............................................................. SECT. IV IV IV SECTION V REPAIR OR REPLACEMENTOF VARIOUS PARTS PARA. 5-1. 5-2. 5-2.1. 5-2.2. 5-2.3. 5-3. 5-3.1. 5-3.2. 5-3.3. 5-3.4. 5-4. 5-4.1. 5-4.2. 5-4.3. 5-4.3.1 5-4.4. 5-4.5. 5-4.6. 5-4.7. 5-5. 5-5A. 5-5.1. 5-5.1.1. 5-5.2. Fig.5-1 Fig.5-2 Fig.5-3 Fig.5-4 Fig.5-5 Fig.5-6 Fig.5-7 TITLE ACCESS TO VERIOUS MODULES……………………….............. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SAMPLING ARM............. ARM HEAD RETROFIT KIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.... SAMPLING TUBE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE...................... ARM CONTROLLER BOARD KIT P/N 11-05248-01 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENTS MODULE.... REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PELTIER MODULES................. REPLACEMENT OF REAG. PLATE TRANSMISSION BELT…... REPLACEMENT OF REAG. PLATE DRIVE MOTOR................... REPLACEMENT OF REAG. TEMP/HALL SENSORS.................. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE READING STATION….... REPLACEMENT OF CUVETTES PELTIER.................................. REPLACEMENT OF THE HALOGEN LAMP................................ REPLACEMENT OF HYDRAULIC TUBES................................... PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING INSTALLATION........................... REPLACEMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF DILUTER.................... REPLACEMENT OF THE WASHING PISTON............................. REPLACEMENT OF READING CUVETTE................................... PHOTOMETER REPLACEMENT................................................. INTRODUCTION TO THE COMPUTER BOX…........................... COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD.................. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF COMPUTER BOX................. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE....................................................... 8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTIVE TOUCH-SCREEN................... BT3000 PLUS - EXPLODED VIEW………………………………… SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)............................................................ SAMPLING ARM (REAR).............................................................. ARM HEAD PLACEMENT............................................................. METALLIC FIN INSERTION INTO THE ARM HEAD.................... ARM HEAD COVER REPLACEMENT/REMOVAL........................ SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................ INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 15 SECT. V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. Fig.5-8 Fig.5-9 Fig.5-10 Fig.5-11 Fig.5-12 Fig.5-13 Fig.5-14 Fig.5-15 Fig.5-16 Fig.5-17 Fig.5-18 Fig.5-19 Fig.5-20 Fig.5-21 Fig.5-22 Fig.5-23 Fig.5-24 Fig.5-25 Fig.5-26 Fig.5-27 Fig.5-28 Fig.5-29 Fig.5-30 Fig.5-30A Fig.5-31 Fig.5-32 Fig.5-33 Fig.5-34 Fig.5-35 Fig.5-36 Fig.5-37 TITLE ARM HEAD (TOP VIEW)............................................................... ARM HEAD (BOTTOM VIEW)....................................................... ARM HEAD (SIDE VIEW).............................................................. SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................ SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................ ARM HEAD COVER REMOVAL.................................................... SAMPLING TUBE DISCONNECTION........................................... NEEDLE HOLDER CLAMP LOOSENING..................................... SAMPLING TUBE REMOVAL....................................................... SAMPLING TUBE REMOVAL....................................................... ISE I/O TUBE REMOVAL............................................................... ISE SOLUTION CCONTAINERS................................................... ISE COVER SCREWS................................................................... REAGENT COVER SCREWS....................................................... CYLINDRICAL CONTAINER REMOVAL....................................... BASE COVER REMOVAL............................................................. ARM REMOVAL............................................................................. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD REMOVAL..................................... MICROCONTROLLER VERIFICATION......................................... REPLACING THE HALOGEN LAMP............................................. LAMP REMOVAL (REAR COVER)................................................ LAMP REMOVAL (FRONT SHUTTER))........................................ HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORIES.................................. HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORIES.................................. WASHER MODULE....................................................................... READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW (REF. CHANNEL)............ FUNNEL CAP OPENER................................................................ WASHING PISTON REMOVAL & CLEANING.............................. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT................................................................... COMPUTER BOX.......................................................................... COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD................... SECT. V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V SECTION VI READING STATION SYSTEM PARA. 6-1. 6-2. 6-2.1. 6-2.2. 6-3. 6-4. 6-4.1. 6-4.2. 6-5. 6-6. 6-7. 6-8. 6-9. TITLE GENERAL...................................................................................... PHOTOMETER MODULE............................................................. REACTION CUVETTES OPERATING PRINCIPLE..........…..…... LIGHT SOURCE............................................................................ READING CUVETTES SYSTEM................................................... DILUTER AND WASHER MODULE.............................................. DILUTER OPERATING PRINCIPLE.....................…..................... NEW NO-PINCH VALVE................................................................ ELECTRONICS FOR THE READING STATION SYSTEM............ MAIN LOGIC BOARD (15-04211-01)............................................. MAIN POWER BOARD (15-04209-01)........................................... INTERFACE BOARD (15-04270-01).............................................. THE 10 - CHANNEL PHOTOMETER............................................. INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 15 SECT. VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. 6-9.1. 6-10. Fig.6-1 Fig.6-2 Fig.6-3 Fig.6-4 Fig.6-5 Fig.6-5A Fig.6-6 Fig.6-7 TITLE SECT. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PHOTOMETER........... FCC PROCEDURE........................................…............................ PHOTOMETER MODULE.............................................................. READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW.......................................... CUVETTES SYSTEM.................................................................... DILUTER/WASHER MODULE AND WATER RESERVOIR....….. DILUTER PUMP............................................................................ NO-PINCH VALVE......................................................................... READING STATION - REAR VIEW............................................... PHOTODIODE ARRAY...............................…............................... VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI SECTION VII REAGENTS MODULE PARA. TITLE SECT. 7-1. GENERAL................................................................................…... VII 7-2. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER 15-05211-01........................... VII 7-3. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER 15-04313-03 - OBSOLETE... VII 7-4. REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM........................…..…...... VII 7-5. REAGENT & SERUM BARCODES............................................... VII Fig.7-1 REAGENT REFRIGERATOR MODULE...........................…......... VII Fig.7-2 REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW...... VII Fig.7-3 REAGENT DRIVE MOTOR...................................................…..... VII Fig.7-4 REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE....................................….... VII SECTION VIII SAMPLING STATION PARA. TITLE SECT. 8-1. GENERAL…………………………….............................................. VIII 8-2. SAMPLING ARM MODULE........................................................... VIII 8-2.1. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04765-01)............................... VIII 8-2.2. ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER BOARD (15-05023-01)........ VIII 8-2.3. ISE SAMPLING ARM MODULE.................................................... VIII 8-3. THE SERUM MODULE................................................................. VIII INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 15 BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. TITLE SECT. 8-3.1. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLERS.................................................. VIII 8-3.2. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04422-01).............. VIII 8-3.3. LEFT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04280-01)... VIII 8-3.4. RIGHT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04278-01)... VIII 8-4. BARCODE SCANNER................................................................... VIII 8-5. SERUM & REAGENT BARCODES............................................... VIII Fig.8-1 SAMPLING ARM WITH HEATER................................................. VIII Fig.8-2 SAMPLING ARM MODULE........................................................... VIII Fig.8-3 SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)............................................................ VIII Fig.8-4 SAMPLING ARM (REAR)............................................................ VIII Fig.8-5 SERUM MODULE......................................................................... VIII Fig.8-6 SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER MODULE................................... VIII Fig.8-7 SERUM MODULE - EXPLODED VIEW........................................ VIII SECTION IX ISE MODULE PARA. TITLE SECT. 9-1. GENERAL……………………......................................................... IX 9-2. SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE ISE MODULE.................................... IX 9-2.1. ISE PREAMPLIFIER BOARD (15-04440-01)................................ IX 9-2.2. ISE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04320-01)................................. IX 9-3. COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS…………………………… IX 9-4. ISE TROUBLE-SHOOTING BT3000 PLUS................................... IX Fig.9-1. ISE MODULE ARRANGEMENT - FRONT VIEW.......................... Fig.9-2. ISE MODULE - VIEW "A"............................................................... IX Fig.9-3. ISE MODULE - VIEW "B"............................................................... IX Fig.9-4. ISE MODULE - ELECTRODES LOCATION.................................. Fig.9-5. ISE MODULE WITH NO-PINCH VALVE…………………………… IX IX IX SECTION X COMPUTER MODULE PARA. TITLE SECT. 10-1. ELECTRONICS MODULE………………….................................... 10-1.1. COMPUTER BOX.......................................................................... X 10-1.2. MAINBOARD CONNECTORS.....................……........................... X 10-1.2.1. COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD................... X INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 15 X BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. 10-1.3. 10-1.3.1. 10-1.3.2. 10-1.4. 10-1.5. 10-1.6. 10-1.7. Fig.10-1. Fig.10-2. Fig.10-3. Fig.10-4. TITLE SECT. LCD MODULE 8-WIRE ANAL.RESIS.TOUCH-SCREEN.............. TOUCH-SCREEN DRIVER INSTALLATION COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL.................................. POWER SUPPLY MODULE.......................................................... MAINBOARD LAYOUT CONTENTS............................................. INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD........................................................... NEW COMPUTER BOX, VARIATIONS & OPTIONS.................... COMPUTER BOX……................................................................... COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD.…….......... LAYOUT......................................................................................... MAINBOARD ASSEMBLY............................................................. X X X X X X X X X X X SECTION XI POWER SUPPLY PARA. TITLE SECT. 11-1. 11-1.1. 11-1.2. 11-1.3. POWER SUPPLY…………………................................................. EMC DIRECTIVE APPLICATION TO THE PWR SUP.................. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION (PFC)………...………............. INHIBIT OPTION (INH)........................................…………............ XI XI XI XI SECTION XII VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01 PARA 12-1. 12-1.1. 12-1.2. 12-1.3. 12-1.4. 12-1.5. 12-1.6. 12-1.7. Fig.12-1 Fig.12-2 Fig.12-3 TITLE SECT. FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................. SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTIONS................................................ DESCRIPTION OF THE BOARD 15-05085-01............................. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM COMPONENTS.................................. INSTALLATION & OPERATION.................................................... MAINTENANCE AND CARE.......................................................... TROUBLE-SHOOTING.................................................................. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE................... VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01................................ FLUIDIC PATHWAY....................................................................... WASTE PROBE............................................................................. XII XII XII XII XII XII XII XII XII XII XII VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM, P/N 662.0788 & BY-PRODUCTS PREVIOUS VERSION (OBSOLETE) PARA TITLE 12-2. 12-2.1. INTRODUCTION........................................................................... VACUUM GAUGE......................................................................... INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service SECT. Page 10 of 15 XII XII BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. TITLE SECT. 12-2.2. VACUUM LEVEL REGULATOR.................................................... XII 12-2.3. HYDROPHOBIC FILTER............................................................... XII 12-2.4. CAUTION! SHIPPING RETAINER - VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM.. XII 12-2.5. INSTALLATION............................................................................. XII 12-2.6. QUICK START-UP......................................................................... XII 12-2.7. CARE AND MAINTENANCE......................................................... 12-2.8. FUSE REPLACEMENT FOR MAIN POWER INLET MODULE..... XII 12-2.9. FILTER REPLACEMENT............................................................... XII 12-2.10. PERISATLTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT.................. XII 12-2.11. VACUUM REGULATION PROCEDURE....................................... XII 12-2.12. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION..................................................... XII 12-2.13. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF BOARD (15-04541-01)............. XII 12-2.14. TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE..................................................... XII 12-2.15. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE................... XII 12-2.15.1. ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT P/N 11-05339-01.......................... XII 12-2.16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 12-2.17. CLEANING OF THE HYDROPHOBIC FILTER............................. XII XII Fig.12-4 Fig.12-5 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM INSTALLATION................................. XII SPARE PARTS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR................... XII Fig.12-6 WASTE CHAMBER LEFT AND RIGHT......................................... XII DETAILS OF SOME SPARE PARTS............................................ XII Fig.12-7 Fig.12-8 Fig.12-9 XII WASTE PROBE............................................................................. XII SPARE CABLES FOR VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM....................... XII Fig.12-10 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WARNINGS....................................... XII SECTION XIII MEASUREMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS PARA. TITLE SECT. 13-1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................... XIII 13-1.1. PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS.............. XIII 13-1.2. PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION PROCEDURE............................. XIII 13-1.3. VERIFICATION OF ANY PROBLEMS DURING THE READING.. XIII 13-2. CUVETTES CALIBRATION AND TEMP. CONTROL SPECS....... XIII 13-2.1. CUVETTE TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 13-3. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SPECS........... INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 11 of 15 . XIII XIII BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. TITLE SECT. 13-3.1. REAGENT CONTROLLER P/N 15-04313-03 (OBSOLETE)......... XIII 13-3.2. REAGENT CONTROLLER BOARD P/N 15-05211-01.................. XIII 13-4. BARCODE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS.................... XIII 13-4.1. PROGRAMMING OF SERUM/REAGENT BARCODE.................. XIII 13-4.2. BARCODE - MECHANICAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE......... XIII 13-5. ISE MODULE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS................ XIII 13-5.1. ISE BUBBLE SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE................. XIII 13-5.2. ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION.................................. XIII 13-5.3. ISE ELECTRODES POTENTIAL VERIFICATION......................... XIII 13-6. PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR CALIBRATION AND SPECS............. 13-7. STRESS ANALYZER..................................................................... XIII XIII SECTION XIV TROUBLE-SHOOTING PARA. TITLE SECT. 14-1. INTRODUCTION……………………………................................... XIV 14-1.1. CUVETTES TEMPERATURE...........................………….............. XIV 14-1.2. REAGENT CHAMBER TEMPERATURE..........………............... XIV 14-1.3. POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS...........................………............... XIV 14-1.4. POWER UP PROBLEMS.....................................……….............. XIV 14-1.5. THE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD..........................………............... XIV 14-1.6. RESET ERRORS: SERUM PLATE / REAGENT TRAY DILUTER / SAMPLING ARM.................................………............. XIV 14-2. INTRODUCTION - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLEXIV SHOOTING.................................................................................... 14-2.1 COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE-SHOOTING.....…………........ XIV 14-2.1.1. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL.................................. XIV 14-2.2 BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLESHOOTING.... XIV UNRELIABLE RESULTS OF ANALYSES - GENERAL XIV CONSIDERATIONS....................................................................... VERIFICATION OF PHOTOMETRIC INSTABILITY XIV 14-3. 14-4. INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 12 of 15 BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PARA. TITLE SECT. 14-5. VERIFICATION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION............ XIV 14-6. ISE TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................ XIV a) b) c) d) e) CALIBRATION ERRORS OBSTRUCTIONS CAUSED BY PROTEINS IN ELECTRODES CL & CO2 BAD RESULTS OF SAMPLES ERROR MESSAGES, AIR BUBBLES, FLAGS RESULTS WITH FLAG "D" Fig. 14-1 CHLORIDE ELECTRODE CLEANING PROCEDURE.................. XIV Fig. 14-2 ISE ELECTRODES CLEANING PROCEDURE............................. XIV SECTION XV SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE PARA. TITLE SECT. 15-1. READING STATION MODULE SPARE PARTS........................... XV 15-2. REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS............. XV 15-3. SERUM MODULE SPARE PARTS............................................... XV 15-4. SAMPLER ARM SPARE PARTS.................................................. XV 15-5. ISE MODULE SPARE PARTS...................................................... XV 15-6. COMPUTER BOX......................................................................... XV 15-7. CONSUMABLES........................................................................... XV 15-8. ELECTRONICS HARDWARE....................................................... XV 15-9. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM SPARE PARTS................................. XV 15-10. ORDERING INFORMATION......................................................... XV INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 13 of 15 BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTE: SCHEMATICS, COMPONENT LAYOUTS, AND OTHER HELPFUL INFORMATION ARE ON THE LAST PAGES OF THIS MANUAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ELECTRONICS SYSTEM LAYOUT TITLE 15-04209-01 15-04211-01 15-04270-01 15-04278-01 15-04280-01 15-04282-01 15-04313-03 15-04320-01 15-04422-01 15-04431-01 15-04440-01 15-04503-01 15-04541-01 15-04649-01 15-04651-01 15-04661-01 15-04680-01 15-04765-01 15-04765-02 15-04767-01 15-04902-01 15-05021-01 15-05023-01 15-05085-01 15-05211-01 15-05234-01 MASTER POWER MASTER LOGIC READING PLATE INTERFACE SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "R" SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "L" SERUM HALL SENSOR REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER ISE CONTROLLER SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER PERIPHERALS DISABLE ISE PREAMPLIFIER ISE INTERFACE VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER PHOTOMETER PREAMPLIFIER PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE LEFT ARM CONTROLLER RIGHT ARM CONTROLLER ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER LIQUID SENSOR DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS ELECTRONICS SYSTEM SCHEMATIC TITLE SE-04209-01 SE-04211-01 SE-04270-01 SE-04278-01 SE-04280-01 SE-04282-01 SE-04313-03 MASTER POWER MASTER LOGIC READING PLATE INTERFACE SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "R" SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "L" SERUM HALL SENSOR REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 14 of 15 BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS SCHEMATIC TITLE SE-04320-01 SE-04334-02 SE-04334-03 SE-04348-02 SE-04379-02 SE-04379-03 SE-04422-01 SE-04431-01 SE-04436-03 SE-04437-03 SE-04438-02 SE-04439-01 SE-04440-01 SE-04442-04 SE-04442-05 SE-04443-02 SE-04444-04 SE-04444-05 SE-04445-04 SE-04446-01 SE-04446-03 SE-04503-01 SE-04541-01 SE-04649-01 SE-04651-01 SE-04661-01 SE-04680-01 SE-04765-01 SE-04765-02 SE-04767-01 SE-04872-01 SE-04873-01 SE-04902-01 SE-05021-01 SE-05023-01 SE-05050-01 SE-05085-01 SE-05161-01 SE-05165-01 SE-05211-01 SE-05234-01 SE-662.0788 SE-662.0788A SE-662.0788B SE-662.0788E ISE CONTROLLER READING PLATE ASSY READING PLATE ASSY SERUM PLATE ASSY BOX COMPUTER ASSY BOX COMPUTER ASSY SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER PERIPHERALS DISABLE LEFT ARM ASSY RIGHT ARM ASSY ARM WITH HEATER WIRED CASE ISE PREAMPLIFIER READING STATION READING STATION REAGENTS PLATE ASSY BT3000 PLUS BT3000 PLUS SERUM MODULE ISE UNIT ISE UNIT WITHOUT ISE MODULE ISE INTERFACE VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER PHOTOMETER PREAMPLIFIER PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE LEFT ARM CONTROLLER RIGHT ARM CONTROLLER ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER LEFT ARM RIGHT ARM LIQUID SENSOR DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER BT3000 PLUS (WITHOUT ISE) VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER VACUUM SYSTEM WASTE PROBE REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WASTE PROBE - 1 WASTE PROBE - 2 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 15 of 15 SECTION A WARRANTY CONDITIONS • Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A., after having accurately tested this analyzer, guarantees the instrument for 1 (one) year starting from invoice. • The warranty includes the repairing and the replacement for free of the faulty parts due to wrong manufacturing. Warranty is not extended to the normally consumable parts of the system. • The warranty is not valid in case of improper use, negligence, improper or lack of maintenance and cleaning, tampering or repairing by third parties not authorized by Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. and in any case when the cause cannot be stated as original manufacturing fault. • The costs of shipment and transport to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for repair or substitution, and the risks deriving from this is the responsibility of the buyer, including all the costs of onsite technical service at client's location (transport, board and lodging) as well. • If the stated defects will result to be out of warranty limits, the buyer will pay repair or replacement costs. • Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is not responsible for any unforeseen technical problem that might occur. If the requested technical assistance is outside the terms of warranty a charge will me made to the customer as per current rates in force. • Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is an internationally known for its high quality standards in production. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is thus responsible for providing to the customer clear and effective information for use of it's products, including all the precautions and warnings for a secure and risk-free use. • Service personnel must also refer to the warnings and cautions notices in this manual. It is the duty of the service engineer of Biotecnica to instruct his service personnel to take all necessary precautions during repair and handling of products. • Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is not responsible for any damage that may be caused directly or indirectly to persons or things due to a lack of observance of all the warnings and cautions outlined in the user's manual, and concerning the warnings and cautions during the different working phases of the instrument (see chap. M). Direct, indirect, incidental, special, moral damages as well as other damages of any type (including, with no limitation, those deriving from profit’s loss, business interruption or information loss) cannot be ascribed to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. even in the case in which the possibility of the event had been explicitly stated. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. Via Licenza, 18 00156 Rome (ITALY) Tel. +39-06-4112316 Fax +39-06-4103079 E-mail: bt@biotecnica.it Web: www.biotecnica.it © 2004 BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A., ROME, ITALY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS PROPRIETARY WITH BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.. REPRODUCTION OF ANY PART OR WHOLE MAY ONLY BE PERFORMED WITH WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 13 Page 1 of 1 Mod.05-35a-ing Rev. 1 Parts / Instruments Return Authorization DATE: ______/______/____ From: To: Technical Assistance – Export Manager Client information Instrument model: Serial number: Defective part Part description: Code: Bar-code number: Under warranty: Yes No Serial number: Quantity: Invoice number: Date: Description of the problem: Request for: Repair Exchange Quotation Name: Urgent Signature: Biotecnica Instruments response Return authorization number: Approved: Yes No Exchange Repair Note: / 2004 Destroy Date: Quotation: Approved by: Technical Assistance Dept. Signature: Checked by: Quality Assurance Manager Signature: Note: No parts or instruments will be accepted for repair or replacement without a Return Authorization number, which can be obtained from Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. Fax this Return Authorization form to +39 06 410 3079 to the attention of Technical Assistance/Export Manager, who will then evaluate and issue a Return Authorization number. WARRANTY EXCTRACT: Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. warrants its instruments to be free from defective parts and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase. Liability under this warranty is expressly limited to repair or replacement of defective parts at the option of Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. This warranty does not cover the results of misuse, accident or abuse of any parts of its instruments which have been repaired, tampered with or altered by anyone other than personnel authorized by Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. This warranty does not apply to fluid handling devices, consumables or reagents. Products returned to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for repair or replacement shall be sent with transportation prepaid. If found not to be defective under the terms of warranty, a charge will be made for repair or replacement and freight costs will be at customer’s expense. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 13 POTENTIAL RISKS DURING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE USE Although the BT3000 PLUS analyzer system uses high performance components, which provide a high degree of safety, it is essential that the user takes the usual precautions to safeguard himself and to ensure a safe working environment. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. only guarantees the workmanship and materials of its products. It is the duty of the user to take care of safe operation and no amount of warnings can take place of such care. As regards the moving parts in the analyzer, these have been appropriately protected to avoid any potential risks to the user, and for proper instrument operation and safety. However, it is highly recommended to exercise extreme care during analyzer operation and especially when working close to the devices. To avoid accidental contamination, use suitable guards and/or personal protection, such as overall and gloves. When handling reagents, it is advisable to observe good laboratory practice (GLP) rules. Chemicals, serum samples and reagents must be handled with extreme caution. Patient samples may be biologically hazardous. The reagents or any other substances that may enter in contact with samples should be treated in the same way as samples themselves. The materials of human origin, such as control sera, are tested for the detection of HbsAg, anti-HCV anti-HIV-1 anti-HIV–2 antibodies. Even if the result is negative, as no known analytical method can exclude any infection’s risk with certainty therefore these materials must be considered as potentially infective and thus must be handled with extreme caution. The reagents and any other substance entering in contact with samples must be treated in the same way. The reagents must be manipulated (before, during and after the use) by qualified personnel familiar with their characteristics in order to safeguard the user as well as the quality of the reagent itself. MAINTENANCE • It is of extreme importance that the instrument is fully turned off and the power cord unplugged from the wall outlet to safely perform any maintenance or service procedure. • During maintenance procedures, the safety and warning precautions must be observed as outlined in this section. • The exterior of the analyzer casing may be cleaned periodically to remove dust grease and other contamination. It is not necessary to clean the inside. Use soft cloth dampened with a mild solution of detergent with water. • The owner shall be responsible for maintenance of the analyzer. Wear or damage caused by lack of normal maintenance or by misuse of the analyzer shall not be considered as defective workmanship and material. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 13 WARNINGS ALTHOUGH THE BT3000 PLUS ANALYZER SYSTEM USES HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPONENTS WHICH PROVIDE A HIGH DEGREE OF SAFETY, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE SERVICE ENGINEER TAKES THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS TO SAFEGUARD HIS SERVICE PERSONNEL. WE ONLY GUARANTEE THE WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS OF OUR PRODUCTS. IT IS THE DUTY OF THE SERVICE ENGINEER TO TAKE CARE FOR SAFE OPERATION AND NO AMOUNT OF WARNINGS CAN TAKE THIS PLACE OF SUCH CARE. THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS WILL AID THE SERVICE PERSONNEL TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE SAFEGUARDS TO ASSURE SAFE TROUBLE-FREE PERFORMANCE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. BEFORE SERVICING THIS SYSTEM, BE SURE TO READ THE SERVICE MANUAL THOURALLY AND CAREFULLY. AFTERWARDS, KEEP IT HANDY FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. TAKE SPECIAL CARE TO FOLLOW THE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS INDICATED ON THE SYSTEM REAR PANEL AS WELL AS IN THE SERVICE MANUAL. SERVICING OF THIS SYSTEM SHOULD BE RESTRICTED TO QUALIFIED/APPROVED SERVICE PERSONNEL. SLOTS AND OPENINGS IN THE CASE, BACK PANEL, AND BOTTOM ARE PROVIDED FOR VENTILATION. THIS ENSURE RELIABLE OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM AND TO PROTECT IT FROM OVERHEATING. DO NOT BLOCK OR COVER THESE OPENINGS. BEFORE SERVICING, CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ON THE REAR PANEL LABEL MATCHES THE LOCAL LINE VOLTAGE. TO GUARANTEE SAFETY THE SYSTEM MUST BE GROUNDED. THE WIRES IN THE MAINS POWER CORDSET ARE COLORED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODES: GREEN AND YELLOW: EARTH BLUE: NEUTRAL BROWN: LIVE THE WIRE COLORED BLUE IS INTERCHANGEABLE WITH WIRE COLORED BROWN. REPLACE FUSE AS MARKED. PRIOR TO THE REMOVAL OF ANY FUSE, TURN POWER OFF AND UNPLUG THE CORDSET FROM THE WALL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE ANY PANEL OR COVER UNDER POWER "ON" CONDITION. BEFORE REMOVING ANY PANEL OR COVER, TURN POWER "OFF" AND UNPLUG THE POWER CORDSET FROM THE WALL FOR OPERATING SAFETY, DO NOT INSTALL THE SYSTEM IN A LOCATION WHERE IT WILL BE EXPOSED TO HEATING EQUIPMENT OR RADIATORS, DIRECT SUN LIGHT, OR ANY OTHER SOURCE OF EXTREMELY HIGH TEMPERATURES. DO NOT OPERATE THE SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE FLUIDS OR GASEOUS ATMOSPHERE, DISINFECTING AGENTS, CLEANING AGENTS, ETC., DUE TO POSSIBLE FIRE OR EXPLOSION. DO NOT KINK, BEND, LAY OBJECT ON, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGE OR RESTRICT CABLES. BE SURE THAT THE POWER SWITCH ON THE BACK PANEL OF SYSTEM IS OFF WHEN PLUGGING IN, OR REMOVING THE POWER CORDSET FROM A WALL OUTLET. TURN OFF THE MAINS POWER SWITCH WHENEVER THE SYSTEM IS NOT IN USE; THE SYSTEM IS SWITCHED OFF BUT NOT ENTIRELY. TO TURN OFF POWER TO WHOLE SYSTEM, UNPLUG POWER CORD FROM WALL OUTLET. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ALTER THE SHAPE OF ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM. IF THE SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY AND THE TROUBLE-SHOOTING SECTION DOES NOT PROVIDE A SATISFACTORY SOLUTION TO THE PROBLEM, THEN DO NOT USE THE SYSTEM UNTIL THE DEFECTS ARE REMEDIED. INSPECT ALL ACCESSORIES AND SYSTEM CORDS. DO NOT USE IF DAMAGE CAN BE SEEN SUCH AS CUT INSULATION OR OUTER COVERING, FRAYED OR BROKEN WIRES, CORRODED OR BROKEN CONNECTORS ETC. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT ALLOW FLUIDS OR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT TO ENTER THE SYSTEM. WIPE OFF SPILLS IMMEDIATELY. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of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ection A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 13 40. DO NOT USE SOFTWARE DISKS OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN IN THE ANALYZER COMPUTER AS THEY MAY INTRODUCE VIRUSES. DO NOT USE THE COMPUTER OF THE ANALYZER FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE THAN THE ONE FOR WHICH IT IS DESIGNED FOR. AFTER OPERATION/SERVICING, COVER THE SYSTEM WITH A PROTECTIVE PLASTIC OR CLOTH SHEET. BE PARTICULARLY CAUTIOUS THAT NO PARTS OF YOUR BODY (e.g. FINGERS HAIR, ETC.) OR LOOSE OBJECTS (e.g. CABLES, TUBING, ETC.) CAN BE TRAPPED BY ANY MOVING OR ROTATING PARTS (e.g. SAMPLING ARM, PLATES, WASHER MODULE, PUMP ROLLERS ETC.) OF THE ANALYZER SYSTEM. 41. 42. 43. NOTE: a) THE CAREFUL OBSERVATION OF THE PROCEEDING WARNINGS SHOULD RESULT IN A LONG AND SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE. THIS INFORMATION IS BELIEVED TO BE CURRENT AT THE TIME OF PUBLICATION, BUT IT IS PROVIDED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND AND WE ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY WITH RESPECT THERETO. b) CAUTION: (USE OF THE BT3000 PLUS & BYPRODUCTS INTERNAL COMPUTER) The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for the computer's hard-drive. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. will not be responsible for any damage to the analyzer, its software and data in the hard-disk in case of improper use of the PC box. This includes also: installation of external programs, not properly secure net connections (intranet and internet) and the use of disks without the necessary verification for viruses presence. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. will not be responsible for any damage caused by non authorized third parties who may open and alter the PC box configuration. WASTE DISPOSAL • To ensure environment health and safety, it is recommended not to discard the used consumables, waste liquids or disposable maintenance kits into the environment. • Insure that the disposal of waste material is done according to all applicable laws and regulations. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 13 RETURNING THE ANALYZER TO THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE The Technical Service Assistance (S.A.T.) may intervene locally, at the Lab, or at Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for analyzers returned for repair. In both cases it is necessary to decontaminate the analyzer and its parts to protect the health of technical assistance employees. To decontaminate the analyzer follow the procedure below, bearing in mind that any part of the analyzer may come into contact, even accidentally, with potentially infected samples: therefore set up adequate protection using the necessary individual protection devices. Be very careful of any splashing of residual decontaminant when disconnecting the various tubes or touching the various parts of the hydraulic system, after decontamination. The procedure described below is not considered to be complete and any other action taken by the Lab to ensure the safety of Biotecnica’s technicians is appreciated. • OPERATING ANALYZER 1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test tubes, reagent bottles etc.). 2. Put a suitable decontaminant (e.g. HCl 1N hydrochloric acid diluted at 3%) in a reagent bottle and place it in position no. 40. 3. Prepare a bottle of enzymatic solution for washing the I.S.E. and place it together with the other I.S.E. solutions in the specific housing. 4. Start a cuvette (Analyzer Utilities menu – Wash cuvettes) and I.S.E. (Analyzer Utilities menu – Wash I.S.E.) wash cycle. 5. Wait five minutes after the washes have finished and then remove the decontaminant bottle from the reagent tray and put the I.S.E. enzymatic solution back in the refrigerator. Remove all the other bottles of I.S.E. solutions. 6. Run a normal wash cycle with water (Analyzer Utilities – Wash with water). 7. Empty the hydraulic circuit (from the Analyzer Utilities menu - Empty fluidics). 8. Shut down the analyzer. 9. Clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant and a clean cloth, as well as its housing and all the accessible surfaces of the analyzer. For assistance at the Lab: in addition to the above, disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument and clean an area with decontaminant which is large enough for the Technician to work. For shipping the analyzer to Biotecnica: In addition to the instructions in points 1 to 9 above, carry out the following: 1. Disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument. 2. Disconnect the water tube from the instrument, wind it up and put it in a bag. 3. Push the sampling needles all the way into their wash wells. 4. Put the cuvette and serum cover trays back in their places. 5. Make sure that all moveable parts are secured tightly. 6. Decontaminate the vacuum system and make sure there is no residual fluid. 7. Decontaminate the vacuum system discharge probe by soaking it for five minutes in HCl 1N diluted at 3%. 8. Wind up the waste tubes and put them in a tightly shut bag. 9. Pack up the peripheral devices and analyzer in their original packing. • NOT OPERATING ANALYZER 1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test tubes, reagent bottles etc.). 2. Clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant (hydrochloric acid HCl 1N diluted at 3%) and a clean cloth, as well as its housing and all the accessible surfaces of the analyzer. 3. Unscrew the sampling needles from their arms and soak them for five minutes in decontaminant and then rinse them with water and put them aside or screw them back into place. 4. Decontaminate the vacuum system and make sure there is no residual fluid. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 13 5. Decontaminate the vacuum system discharge probe by soaking it for five minutes in HCl 1N diluted at 3%. 6. Make sure the cuvettes are empty and then fill them manually with the decontaminant solution. After five minutes remove the solution and replace it with bidistilled water. For assistance at the Lab: in addition to the above, disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument and clean the technician's workspace with appropriate decontaminant. For shipping the analyzer to Biotecnica: In addition to the instructions in points 1 to 6 above, carry out the following: 1. Disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument. 2. Disconnect the water tube from the instrument, wind it up and put it in a bag. 3. Push the decontaminated sampling needles all the way into their wash wells. 4. Put the cuvette and serum cover trays back in their places. 5. Make sure that all moveable parts are secured tightly. 6. Wind up the decontaminated waste tubes and put them in a tightly shut bag. 7. Make sure the cuvettes are empty. 8. Make sure there is no residual liquid in the hydraulic circuit or any other part of the instrument. 9. Pack up the peripheral devices and analyzer in their original packing. • ANALYZER SAFE DISPOSAL When the instrument is no longer useable or needs to be decommissioned, follow the procedure below, bearing in mind that any part of the analyzer may come into contact, even accidentally, with potentially infected samples: therefore set up adequate protection using the necessary individual protection devices. Be very careful of any splashing of residual decontaminant when disconnecting the various tubes or touching the various parts of the hydraulic system, after decontamination. 1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test tubes, reagent bottles etc.). 2. Empty the hydraulic circuit (from the Analyzer Utilities menu: empty fluidics). 3. Remove the water tube from the external container and put it in a container with at least one liter of suitable disinfectant or decontaminant (e.g. hydrochloric acid HCl 1N diluted at 3%). Put disinfectant in the four empty bottles in place of I.S.E. solutions and in a bottle in position 40 of the reagent tray. 4. Fill the hydraulic circuit again by running a reset and a series of prime of the clinical chemical diluter and the diluter of the I.S.E. 5. Run a wash of the cuvettes and I.S.E. (from the Analyzer Utilities menu - Wash with water and Wash I.S.E.) 6. Wait five minutes. Remove the disinfectant from the container and from the I.S.E. bottles and replace it with water. Put the water tube back in the container which has just been filled. 7. Run a wash of the cuvettes and I.S.E. again, and then empty the hydraulic circuit again. 8. Shut down the analyzer. 9. Remove all the cords connecting the UPS to the mains and peripheral devices from the analyzer. 10. Remove all the cables connecting the peripheral devices (keyboard, mouse, wireless connector, printer and UPS). 11. Carefully clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant (hydrochloric acid HCl 1N diluted at 3%) and a clean cloth, as well as its housing and all the accessible surfaces of the analyzer. 12. Carefully clean the peripheral devices using a clean cloth and a disinfectant. 13. Remove the waste tubes from the analyzer and the vacuum system. 14. Remove the vacuum system discharge probe and soak it for five minutes in disinfectant (HCl 1N diluted at 3%). Then rinse it in water. 15. Remove all the tubes which are part of the washing, distribution and sampling hydraulic circuit and the I.S.E. circuit. Remove the I.S.E. electrodes as well. 16. Sort the material from decommissioning the instrument so that they can be recycled or disposed of as special waste in accordance with local laws. If the analyzer is going to be returned to the Distributor, make sure all the removal parts of the system are bagged and separated after decontamination so that they can be disposed of as special waste. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 13 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES DISPOSAL CAUTION: Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, called WEEE must be disposed of in accordance with Italian Legislative Decree no. 151 of 25 July 2005: “Implementation of EC directives 95/2002, 96/2002 and 108/2003, related to the reduction of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment as well as waste disposal” published in the Italian Official Gazette no. 175 of 29-7-2005- Ordinary Supplement no. 135. The points below provide some instructions related to disposal of WEEE, however we recommend consulting the aforesaid Legislative Decree for additional information. 1. WEEE must not be disposed of as urban waste, it must be recycled. 2. Municipalities guarantee operation, access and suitability for recycling systems for WEEE, so that end users and distributors can return to collection centers all waste produced within their territories, at no cost. 3. WEEE can be returned to the distributor when new equipment is purchased, without prejudice the provisions of Legislative Decree 151/05. 4. The distributor has the obligation to take the WEEE, however pick up may be refused when there is a risk of contamination of personnel assigned to this job. 5. The presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment requires separate disposal due to the potential effects on the environment and humans. Improper use of the same equipment or its parts may be potentially hazardous. 6. The symbol that indicate separate disposal of electrical and electronic equipment is a trash container on wheels with a cross over it as indicated below: the symbol is printed in a visible, readable and indelible manner Editor’s note: The picture is only for the purposes of example: see the printed version in the Italian Official Gazette no. 175 of 29-7-2005 7. Legislative Decree 151/05 includes a list of fines for illegal disposal of WEEE. NOTE: The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any failure to comply with regulations regarded to delivery of the instrument to third parties. Check the pertinent lists at specialized waster disposal centers. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 13 CONFORMANCE IMPORTANT NOTICE - EMC CERTIFICATE The analyzer BT3000 PLUS has passed all the tests relevant to Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and electrical safety. This product received the certificate of compliance with international standards EN 66110-1 and EN 61326-1 from OCE (Organismo di Certificazione Europea) of Rome (Italy), accredited and certified (certificate number 051 of 21 Oct.1998) by Ministero delle Comunicazione of Italy. The test reports 46/E and 47/E are available upon request. This product conforms to the safety requirements of the Council Directives 98/79/EEC of 27 October 1998 (European Parliament) regarding the In-Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices. This directive is in accordance with the Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Directive 89/336/EEC, which ceases to apply to the products complying with the present directive. Refer to Paragraph 7, Article No.1 of the IEC Official Gazette No. L331 of Dec. 1998. It also conforms to Italian Regulations CEI EN 61010-01 and CEI EN 613261 (EMC). The conformity is attested when the equipment is installed in accordance with the conditions outlined in the manual Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 13 THE COMPANY PROFILE Biotecnica was founded in 1972, with years of technical expertise and manufacturing knowledge in the field of design, production, sales and technical support behind its staff. The Company develops and manufactures clinical chemistry equipment and relevant reagent products, to be sold directly and through OEM agreements. The market consists of private and state clinical laboratories, hospitals, clinics, day hospitals, and universities, etc. Since that time the company has developed and produced instruments of uncompromising performance characteristics, which has enabled Biotecnica to become one of Europe’s leading manufacturers of clinical chemistry instruments. Biotecnica is headquartered in Rome (Italy) and markets products both domestically and internationally through a network of distributors. Our actual range of instruments is composed of: • • • Photometers for clinical chemistry Automatic analyzers for clinical chemistry Electrophoresis densitometers & accessories • Flame photometers & associated reagents • Ion selective analyzer • Clinical chemistry reagents Biotecnica has over 3,000 square meters of manufacturing facility, which houses the latest in engineering, manufacturing, testing, and quality control equipment. It is staffed with highly experienced personnel with a dedication to quality. The company supplies more than just products, it provides highly efficient technical and manufacturing support based on the requirements of its customers with ongoing training programs to keep them current on advancements in technology. A global network of distributors and sales engineers, assure the most comprehensive customer support across the world. For more information about Biotecnica, visit the Biotecnica web site at www.biotecnica.it Please do not hesitate to contact us. We will be pleased to assist with any inquiries you may have. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 11 of 13 PACKING / UNPACKING THE ANALYZER ♦ UNPACKING THE ANALYZER & ACCESSORIES Two wooden crates contain the analyzer and the accessories. The crates can be easily opened by applying a lever action, with a large screwdriver, to remove all the spring clips on the base of the crate as shown in the figure below. Carefully remove the upper covering from the base. Remove the analyzer and place it on a stable, vibration-free-surface, level table or cart. Carefully unpack all the accessories and place them in a protected place. Store the empty wooden crate assy in a safe place for future use. CAUTION The analyzer is provided with four integral push-pull handgrips located on the left and right sides of the base frame. To lift or move the instrument from one location to another, always use the handgrips. Arrow Pointing Upwards Base Spring Clip Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 12 of 13 ♦ VERIFICATION OF THE CONTENTS OF THE WOODEN CRATES Verify upon receipt of the BT3000 PLUS analyzer system (with accompanying mod.05-28spr - packing check list) that all parts are present and intact when opening the wooden crates and packaging. ♦ VERIFYING EVENTUAL DAMAGES OCCURRED DURING SHIPMENT It is highly recommended to accurately verify the instrument and its accessories for any damages that could have occurred during shipment. In case there is a damaged or missing item then please fill out all the sections of the Form 05-35a in this section. Send it to your nearest sales/service office or directly to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. Rome, Italy. After appropriate evaluation, Biotecnica or its branch office will provide the best solution to the problem. NOTES FROM THE MANUFACTURER The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. reserves the right to revise this manual without notice, for any reason. This includes but is not limited to, utilization of advance in the state-of-the-art and changes thereof. Product enhancement resulting from our continuing quality improvement effort may necessitate changes in specifications without notice. This fact doesn’t oblige the company to inform its actual customers because the information included in the present manual refers to state of the product when shipped, thus no warranty about notification of future changes is given. The information contained in this manual is proprietary with "Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.". Reproduction of any part or whole may only be performed with written permission from "Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.". TRADEMARKS NOTE: Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owner's benefit, without intent to infringe. ® Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ® IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines. ® Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. ® Lambda is an "Invensys Company." ® Pharmed is a registered trademark of Norton Performance Plastics Corporation. ® Baydur is a registered trademark of Bayer Polymers, LLC. Section A Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 13 of 13 SECTION - I INTRODUCTION - BT3000 PLUS The BT3000 PLUS is an automated analyzer for the determination of clinical chemistry and electrolyte results. The combined performance of this analyzer is from 300 to 500 tests per hour. The technical material in this manual is for approved technical personnel with reasonable familiarity with similar instruments only. A diligent effort has been made to provide engineering illustrations, schematics, and other helpful information regarding the analyzer on the following pages to facilitate the task of service personnel. The BT3000 PLUS is a fully automatic analyzer that can perform high volume of analysis on serum or urine samples. The test sample is followed continuously, upon insertion, so the analysis can be performed quickly and with maximum reliability. The automated instrument consists of the following three distinct subsystems: a) The Mechanical System: Utilized for the transfer of the solutions, samples, and reagents b) The Electronic System: Based on microprocessors for activating drive motors, alarm devices, and temperature control, etc. c) The Information Management System: IBM® compatible for patient inputs, processing of the results, and communication with the host computer etc. 1-1. Examples of The Basic Operations of Clinical Chemistry 1-2. PHASE 1: Creation of the Worklist. 1-3. PHASE 2: Placement of Samples and Reagents 1-4. PHASE 3: Start-up 1-5. PHASE 4: Process Initiation The mechanical arm is equipped with a sampling needle that can perform both swiveling and up/down motions to accomplish complete mixing during the sampling cycle along with the diluter pump. The cycle sequence starts with the aspiration of the reagent and the serum, followed by the dispensing and mixing in the reading cuvette. The sampling cycle is performed using the following devices: a sampling arm, a diluter pump, and a peristaltic pump. The sequence of the sampling cycle is as follows: a) Washing and drying of cuvettes b) Reagent aspiration c) Needle washing d) Sample aspiration e) Dispensing and mixing the solution in the pre-washed and dried cuvette f) Washing the needle and the hydraulic circuit The diluter provides the aspiration of the solution. A built-in liquid sensor, attached directly to the needle mechanism, controls the descent of the needle into the reagent or sample. This controlled immersion of the needle avoids any excessive contamination. The first part of the hydraulic circuit (located inside the sampling arm) is pre-heated to about 40°C in order to compensate for the low temperature of the reagent. The peristaltic pump provides approximately 2.0ml of H2O into the waste bowl to wash the needle and the attached hydraulic circuit. Section - I Introduction BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 2 1-6. PHASE 5 - Reading Cycle In this phase, the sample remains in its cuvette for the necessary incubation time, after which, the reading phase will begin. The reading cycle takes place every 10 seconds and lasts about 2 seconds. The photometer, located under the reading station, converts the luminous intensity of the cuvettes into digital signals and transfers them to the microcontroller. After the initial reading, the acquired data is stored as concentration and absorbance values for generating the test results. 1-7. PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BT3000 PLUS The process described above regards the complete dynamics for the testing of clinical chemistry samples. The operation for running electrolytes is similar and can be performed simultaneously with the preceding clinical chemistry samples. The final solution to be analyzed is not dispensed into a cuvette, but into the ISE (Ion Selective Electrode) funnel located on top of the ISE module. Obviously the phases 1, 2, and 3 are basically the same. 1-8. ISE Sampling The right sampling arm aspirates the reagents positioned near the ISE Module on the right of the analyzer. The sampling is performed in two phases. The first phase is dedicated to the aspiration and dispensation of the reference solution into the ISE funnel. The second phase is assigned to the sampling of serum aspirated together with diluent reagent and buffer. The solutions are dispensed and mixed in the ISE funnel followed by the use of a peristaltic pump to draw the solution into the ISE electrodes for measurements. The signal produced by the electrodes is then processed, as per the NERNST formula, and is translated into values of concentration. The ISE module has its own diluter pump that is similar to that of the sampling (located on the reading station) for clinical chemistry. Section - I Introduction BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 2 SECTION - II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. 2-1. PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BT3000 PLUS Packed analyzer without accessories:..... Packed analyzer with accessories:.......... Packed accessories:................................ Analyzer dimensions:............................... Crate dimensions:.................................... Accessories package dimensions:........... Approximately 135 Kg. (298 lb) Approximately 225 Kg. (496 lb) Approximately 90 Kg. (199 lb) W = 100cm (40"), D = 58cm (23"), H = 68cm (27") W = 120cm (48"), D = 80cm (32"), H = 80cm (32") W = 120cm (48"), D = 72cm (29"), H = 70cm (28") NOTE: Weight and dimensions shown are approximate. 2-2. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS BT3000 PLUS analyzer: Input Voltage Range:...................... Universal input, 100 - 240 V~ Input Frequency:............................. 50-60 Hz Power Consumption:....................... 590 Watts max New "Vacuum Pump System" P/N 06-05161-01: Input:............................................... 100/240 V~, 50-60 Hz Power:............................................. 40 Watts Previous "Vacuum Pump System" P/N 662.0788 - (OBSOLETE) Input:................................................ 220 V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request) Power Consumption:....................... 80 Watt Printer (accessory):....................... Approx. 50 Watts, 100/240V~, 50-60 Hz (depending upon model) UPS (optional):............................... Input 220V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request) Output 220V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request) Power: 1100 V.A. (710 Watt) The detailed information regarding the specifications of the instrument power supply is outlined in Section XI entitled "Power Supply" The internal power supply of the analyzer is stabilized and incorporates the Power Factor Correction device (PFC), thereby require no additional external electronics accessory. The use of an optional UPS device (uninterrupted power supply) is recommended to avoid undesired power interruptions and to ensure software integrity in case of sudden power failure. 2-3. EMC AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY The BT3000 PLUS instrument has passed all tests related to Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), and "Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use" performed by the OCE Lab (EMC & Electrical Safety Compliance Test Laboratory), Ministry of Communication - Italy accredited EMC certification body, No. 051 of 21 October 1998. Certificate's documentation is available on request. The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer conforms to following EMC directives (Electro Magnetic Compatibility): EMC:…………………... EN61326 EMC:…………………... EN55011 Electrical Safety:……… EN61010-1 The EMC performance characteristics and electrical safety reports are available upon request. Section - II Technical Specs BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 6 2-4. PERFORMANCE & TECHNICAL SPECS Operating Mode:…………………. Methods:………………………….. ISE Module:………………………. Test Mode:……………………….. Tests on line:…………………….. Tests in memory:………………… Test Re-runs:…………………….. Calibrations and Controls:……… Automatic Profiles:………………. Measurement:……………………. Quality Control:…………………... Remote Diagnostic:……………… Maintenance:…………………….. Sample Tray Capacity:………….. Sampling Arm:…………………… Bar code scanner:……………….. Random access Tests for Clinical Chemistry and Immune-Chemistry Na, K, Cl and CO2 Routine, Batch, Emergencies (STAT), and profiles 80 refrigerated reagents + Relation Tests 500 single or double-reagent Automatic or on demand Automatic or on demand Automatic execution of related profiles or on demand Direct reading of 34 cuvettes in non-disposable optical glass 3 known levels and 3 unknown levels Via modem (optional) Automatic program 78 total positions; 52 positions for Samples & STAT, 26 for Standard and Controls 2, for samples and reagents 2 distinct readers for positive identification of samples and reagents TIME REQUIRED TO REACH STEADY STATE Ambient conditions:……………… Time required for the analyzer to reach steady state:………………. Ambient conditions:……………… Time required for refrigerated bottles to reach steady state:…… 21 °C R.T., 33% RH 20 minutes 21°C T. A., 33% RH Approximately 2 hours CLINICAL CHEMISTRY Sampling Cycle:………………….. Analytical throughput:……………. Approximately 12 seconds Up to 300 tests/hour single reagent ISE PROCEDURE Analytical throughput:…………… Up to 190 tests/h (K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2) 2-4.1. OPERATING AMBIENT CONDITIONS The instrument will perform optimally in the following ambient conditions: CUVETTE OPERATING TEMPERATURE Programmable Temperatures: OFF, 30ºC, 32 °C, or 37 °C Precision ± 0,2°C - Accuracy ± 0,2°C Temperature Monitoring Device based on Peltier Effect REAGENT CHAMBER TEMPERATURE Nominal Temperature: Between 5°C and 15°C approx. (depending upon the setting) Temperature Monitoring Device based on Peltier Effect OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 18 °C to 32 °C, 10% to 90% RH, Non condensating Section - II Technical Specs BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 6 2-4.2. VOLUMES WORKING SOLUTIONS Clinical Chemistry Reaction Volume:…………………………….. Sample Volume:………………………………. 280 µl minimum - 700 µl max (for double reagent) From 1 to 100 µl ISE Concentrated Buffer Solution:…………….…. Concentrated Reference Solution:………….. Sample Volume:…………………………….… Concentrated Buffer 10 ml:………………..…. Concentrated Reference Solution 10 ml:…… Approximately 50 µl + 400 µl (H2O) Approximately 50 µl + 400 µl (H2O) 30 µl Approximately 200 tests Approximately 200 tests RESIDUAL VOLUMES OF REAGENT BOTTLES 80 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 2 ml 50 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 1.5 ml 20 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 0.6 ml 10 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 0.6 ml 2-4.3. ISE MODULE The ISE Module is designed to utilize solid state Ion Selective Electrodes: Number of electrodes:………………………. 4 plus Reference Electrode Analytes:……………………………………... K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2 Analytical throughput:……………………..… Up to 190 tests/h (K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2) Number of Reagents for the test:………..… 2, Buffer and Reference Solution (concentrated) Sample Type:……………………………..…. Serum, Urine (Whole) Minimum Sample Volume:……………….… 30 µl Concentrated Reagents Dilution:………..… 1/9 with H2O (automatically) Dilution of Serum/ Buffer:………………..…. 1/14 (automatically) Precision on Serum test:………………….... +/- 1% for K+, Na+ +/- 2% for Cl+/- 3% for CO2 Precision on Urine test:……………….….… +/- 2% for K+, Na+, ClLinearity for Serum test:……………………. Na+ = 50 - 200 mEq/l K+ 1 - 20 mEq/l CO2 10 - 45 mEq/l Cl = 50 - 400 mEq/l Linearity for Urine test:……………………... Na+ = 20 - 400 mEq/l K+ 2 - 200 mEq/l Cl = 40 - 400 mEq/l Accuracy for Serum test: Intra Run Serum (20 samples):………….… Infra Run Serum (N°20 samples):……….... Accuracy for Urine test: Intra Run Urine (20 samples):……………… Infra Run Urine (20 samples):……………… Average Life of Electrodes:………………… Section - II Technical Specs Na+ and K+ ClCO2 Na+ and K+ ClCO2 C. V. C. V. C. V. C. V. C. V. C. V. Na+, K+ and ClCO2 Na+, K+ e Cl- C. V. < 2% C. V. < 5% C. V. < 2.5% Na+ and Reference Electrode K+ Cl- & CO2 12 months 3 months 3 months BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 6 < 1% < 2% < 5% < 2% < 2.5% < 5% 2-4.4. “UTILITY” EXECUTION TIMES FUNCTION TIME Wash with water………………….. Wash cuvettes……………………. Extra wash cuvettes……………… Zeroing on water…………………. Sleep mode wash………………… FCC Function…………………….. ISE wash…………………………. Shutdown wash (cuvettes & ISE) Cuvette single wash……………… Needle single wash………………. Consumption per test……………. Consumption per ISE test……….. 5 minutes 7 minutes 11 minutes 6 minutes 5 minutes 15 minutes 12 minutes 13 minutes WASHING SOL. USED (approx) 200 ml 250 ml 500 ml 200 ml 200 ml 300 ml 20 ml 300 ml 6 ml 2 ml 8 ml 10 ml DEDICATED SOLUTION USED (approx) 15 ml 15 ml 15 ml NOTE: stated times and liquid consumptions should be considered only as indicative as they may vary in different conditions 2-5. FUNCTIONAL LIMITS The instrument will not perform correctly in the following situations: 1) 2) 3) 4) Out of range (defined) ambient conditions. Use of unapproved chemical products such as Washing Solution, Distilled Water, and ISE reagents etc. Non-observance of care and maintenance procedures. Use of unapproved spare parts and consumables. The manufacturer does not guarantee the correct instrument performance if new methods are implemented unexpectedly. Consult the manufacturer regarding application of different methods. 2-6. CUVETTE TEMPERATURE CONTROL The cuvette plate is thermally controlled in a very precise way. The solution dispensed in the cuvette reaches the working temperature in minimal time possible. However, it is possible to observe a notable time difference due to the potential difference of the temperature of reagents. Therefore, the heated sampling tube aids in preheating the reagent before dispensing. The stabilization times of the solution in cuvette range from 80 seconds to 60 seconds with reagent temperatures at 11°C and 22°C, respectively. The time was measured after the solution had reached 36.7°C: Accuracy measured after 2 minutes: Adjustment measured after 2 minutes: 2-7. +/- 0.25°C. +/- 0.20°C. REAGENT REFRIGERATION The purpose of reagent refrigeration is for optimal conservation and reagent performance. The temperature inside the reagent chamber is variable, based on the external ambience and the time inside the refrigerated chamber. A reagent bottle inside the chamber gradually reaches the minimum temperature within 2 hours. The temperature range may go from 5°C to 15°C with outside temperature of 20°C and 32°C, respectively. Section - II Technical Specs BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 6 2-8. DILUTER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY A unique diluter system is used for the processing of chemistries and ISE testing. Technical Specifications for the Biotecnica dilutor are as follows: Diluter:Volume F.S.:…………… 470 µl Linearity F.S.:………….. +/- 0.1% F.S. Accuracy at 3 µl:……….. +/- 3% Accuracy (Full Scale):…. +/- 1% from 10 to 470µl Reproducibility:………… +/- 0.7% at 3µl; +/- 0.6% > 3µl Life Expectancy:……….. 3 million operating cycles Maintenance:…………… Every 300,000 operating cycles (O-ring seal replacement) Peristaltic Pump:Dispensation Volume:…. Approximately 1ml per sec. Average Life……………. >1 million cycles Maintenance:…………… Every 50,000 cycles (Cartridge replacement) Pinch-Valve:Average Life:…………… Maintenance:…………… Approximately 1 million cycles Monthly replacement of valve tube NOTE: All declared values are approximate and are dependent upon work load of the components, inactivity, and observance of routine maintenance. 2-9. PHOTOMETER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY Optical System…….. Detectors…………… Solid state photometry, (patented by Biotecnica Instruments) 10 UV/VIS photodiodes + reference channel PRECISION AND ACCURACY Spectral Response:.. 340, 380, 405, 436, 480, 510, 546 578, 630, 700 nm Bandwidth:………….. +/- 5nm max (The 700 nm is a Long Pass filter) Linearity O.D.:……… +/- 1% from 0 to 2,000; +/- 2.5% from 2,000 to 2.400 Resolution:………….. +/- 0.001 Abs. Drift:…………………. +0.005 Abs. per hour (after warm-up) Optical path length… 7 mm NOTE: The specification regarding drift applies exclusively to the photometer, excluding the drift related to the halogen lamp of the photometer. 2-10. PHOTOMETER TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP This lamp is custom made. It is a halogen lamp with dichroic reflector and a special coating for maximum UV (ultra violet) emission. Beam Angle: …………………… Watts: …………………………… Volts:…………………………….. Avg Rated Life:…………………. 9° 35W 12 Approximately 2000 hours NOTE: For optimal result the lamp can be used for about 1500 hours. The long-term use will result in the gradual deterioration of the UV emission. Section - II Technical Specs BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 6 2-11. DATA MANAGEMENT Computer:......................…....... RAM:……………………………. DVD/CD Rom Player:.......….... Hard disk:..........................…... Floppy Disk Drive:.............…... Monitor:.............................…... Interface:............................….. Printer:...............................….. Mouse & keyboard:...........…... External Modem:................….. Error Messages:...............….... Software:...........................…... 2-12. Pentium Mobile, > 1.6 GHz or more, IBM compatible > 256 MB > 16X >40 GB 1,44 MB LCD Display Module TFT 12” with integrated touchscreen Serial Ports RS232C, USB Ports, LAN, VGA Ink-jet Color IBM compatible or other Cordless, IBM compatible. Optional Visible (Vocal optional) Microsoft Windows 2000® PRO (License) FLUID DYNAMICS Mixing, Prime, Water H2O Supply, Liquid Sensor Sensitivity, Contamination, Sample Viscosity, Carry-Over, and Sample Evaporation. 2-13. WASHING SOLUTION SUPPLY The analyzer BT3000 PLUS, utilizes distilled water mixed with a surface - active agent (surfactant) for all the washing and sampling operations. The operator can use any container of desired dimensions for the washing solution. The container can be positioned at a considerable distance from the analyzer as a powerful pump is used for constant supply of washing solution to the additional reservoir of the analyzer. The maximum permissible connecting tube distance between the analyzer and the water container is 25 meters horizontally and 6 meters vertically. This data is valid for a flexible plastic tube with inside diameter of 6 mm max. 2-14. LIQUID SENSOR The liquid sensor incorporates a high frequency electronic circuit with functions of capacitive discriminator. For this characteristic, the sensor can detect any type of liquid including distilled water with the same sensitivity. In the normal operating conditions the minimum detectable volume is 100 µl. The limiting factor necessitates that the container is surrounded by a metallic surface. The distance of the isolating material from the metal should not be more than 4 mm. However in different conditions and without the surrounding metallic material around, the analyzer is sensitive to minimum volumes of 150 µl. Recently carbon filled plastic adapters (black) have been introduced, which have identical characteristics to the ones in metal. Section - II Technical Specs BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 6 Top View of the BT3000 PLUS 3-2. Analyzer Structure REAGENT BOTTLES REAGENT CHAMBER SAMPLING ARM PHOTOMETER COMPUTER MODULE POWER SUPPLY DILUTER SERUM PLATE READING STATION SAMPLING MODULE CUVETTE PLATE ISE REAGENTS ISE MODULE ISE ARM 3-1. DILUTER SECTION - III ELECTRONICS The analyzer structure is composed of a heavy-duty sheet metal. The outer casing and covers are molded in a highly resistant Baydur® material. The preceding figure illustrates the location of various modules on the analyzer. Each module has a specific function for the analyzer operation. Section - III Electronics BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 3 3-3.1. 3-3.4. 3-3.2. 3-3.3. 3-3.5. 3-3.7. 3-3.6. 3-3. Description of Analyzer Modules 3-3.1. COMPUTER MODULE The computer module consists of a LCD monitor, a touch-screen, main-board, power supply, and peripheral devices. 3-3.2. Reading Station The reading station is comprised of a cuvette plate, photometer, diluter, washing station, water reservoir, and the associated electronics. 3-3.3. Power Supply Module The power supply module is the general power source of the analyzer. 3-3.4. Reagents System The reagent system consists of the rotating reagent plate, refrigeration system, barcode, and electronics. Section - III Electronics BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 3 3-3.5. Sampling Module The sampling system consists of the rotating serum plate, barcode, Vacutainer® sensors, washing bowls, and electronics. 3-3.6. ISE Module The ISE module consists of the electrodes panel, diluter, ISE reagents, and electronics. 3-3.7. Dual Sampling Arms Module The dual sample arm modules consists of 2 sampling arms, incorporating electronics with appropriate Servomotors, and sampling needles. Note: For detailed description of the preceding modules, refer to Sections VI to XII of this manual. 3-4. System Electronics The electronics of the analyzer, with the exception of the IBM compatible computer, is composed of 80C51 micro-controllers. All the modules are defined as intelligent peripherals. Micro-controller 87LPC764 is programmed to perform process control functions assigned to it as a slave driver. The master functions are performed by a 552 microprocessor, which communicates with the main-board of the IBM through RS 232 serial port. The modules communicate between them through the I2CBUS protocol, established by only two conductors, SCL and SDATA. The wiring of the instrument is extremely simplified, with the cable connecting various modules has only two wires for communication and additional wires for power supplies. The power supply of the instrument is composed of two power supplies of high quality. One power supply is located inside the computer module and is used for powering the IBM module with its various peripheral devices. The 5 Volt power supply, in addition to supplying the main-board, is used for energizing the series of micro-controller modules. The second power supply, located outside the computer module, is for the supply of voltage to the power circuits. The three voltage outputs power the following systems: 1. 24V, 8A; variable from 18 to 26 Volts, for refrigerated Peltier groups. 2. 24V, 8A; stabilized the servomotors, solenoid valves, pumps, temperature controls, and fans 3. 12V, 8A; stabilized, for Halogen lamp of photometer All of the supplies are isolated to enhance digital communication through the opto-electronic devices, thus greatly reducing the interference, which is typical of direct digital-power circuits communication. Both of the power supplies incorporate PFC and have a universal input, which ranges from 100 to 240 Volts. Example of the I2C-BUS Configuration 3-5. The I2C-BUS uses several microprocessors as shown below: VDD RP RP Microprocessor Master Logic Microprocessor Slave Logic (Peripheral) Microprocessor Slave Logic (Peripheral) SDA SCL RST Section - III Electronics BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 3 Microprocessor Slave Logic (Peripheral) SECTION - IV SOFTWARE Important Notice: Any modification to the Variable Serial Protocol is restricted to qualified personnel only. The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. guaranties the correct performance of the internal serial protocol. The responsibility for any malfunction arising out of any modifications to the scripts of the Variable Serial Protocol rests with the customer. WARNING This information regards the setting up of the barcode for sample tubes identification. The reading of the sample barcode label has the same progression as patient code. For example: Once a patient code of 15 characters has been entered, then a code of 8 characters followed by 7 empty spaces to reach the 15 characters is sent. The code read on the barcode label must have the same sequence 8 + 7 for correct detection. SERIAL COMMUNICATION OF THE BT3000 PLUS TO A HOST COMPUTER 4-1. GENERAL The analyzers BT3000 PLUS allows bidirectional communication through RS 232C serial connection with any host computer. The particular feature of the dialog is that it is always the host computer, which initiates the communication for either transmitting patient list or for receiving the results. To initiate any communication the host computer will have to send to analyzer the character STX (0x02) and expect the character ACK (0x06) as a response. At this point the host computer will send data to the analyzer and terminate the communication by sending the character EOT (0x04). It is important to remember that any communication is followed by a response from the analyzer. It must be noted that if the parameter to be transmitted is shorter in length than the length requirement of the communication protocol than a space must be added before or after. For example the analysis have length 4, therefore to send a code GLU one must add a space before or after to reach the length of 4 characters. 4-2. PATIENT TRANSMISSION ► ► ► ► ► ► ► ► ► ► ► Start communication with sequence STX<->ACK Send patient code................................................. Send list type for patient insertion......................... Send type of serum............................................... Send if the patient is a clone................................. Transmit position of capsule................................. Send number of tests to be executed................... Send codes of tests to be performed.................... Send Check-Sum.................................................. Send end transmission character EOT Wait for response from the analyzer..................... (15 characters) ("T" for Routine or "R" for STAT) ("S" for Serum or "U" for Urine) ("Y" for Yes or "N" for No) ("00" unknown) (from "01" to "99") (4 characters) (3 characters) (2 characters) If the communication is successful then the analyzer responds with character "Y" followed by a byte, which identifies the position where patient has been inserted. In case the communication was unsuccessful, then the analyzer responds with "N" followed by a byte identifying the type of error. The possible errors generated by the analyzer in response to the invalid insertion of patient are as follows: Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 13 0x01........... 0x02........... 0x03........... 0x04........... 0x05........... 0x06........... 0x07........... 0x08........... 0x09........... 0x0A.......... 0x0B.......... 0x0C.......... 0x0D.......... 0x0E.......... Check-Sum Error Unknown Command Routine/STAT field Error Serum/Urine field Error Clone Yes/No field Error Capsule position Error Number of Analysis field Error Wrong Number of Test Position already in execution Cloning impossible Code duplicated One or more analysis not present in the analyzer One or more analysis not present in the current plate Too many analysis for the patient For example to send a patient with code 000000000000001, serum type and with analysis GLU, BUN and CHO onto the STATS list, then one must send the following sequence of characters (excluding initial sequence STX<->ACK): 000000000000001RSN0003GLU BUN CHO 134<EOT> Where: 000000000000001...... R................................. S................................. N................................. 00................................ 03................................ GLU, BUN, CHO......... 134.............................. <EOT>........................ 4-3. Patient code Identifies STATS list Identifies the type of patient (in this case: Serum) Identifies that the patient is not a clone Unknown position (the analyzer will insert the patient in a convenient position) identifies the number of test to be executed. Test codes (observe the space after each code to reach the 4 characters limit) Identifies the Check-Sum This character ends communication RESULTS RECEPTION There are three commands for receiving reports from the analyzer: R........ L......... A........ Reception of next available report Reception of the last report sent (in case of reception problems) Reception of the first available report (in case one desires to receive again all the reports) The commands R, L, and A require standard communication or the procedure STX<->ACK and the character EOT to end communication. As a response to one of these three commands the analyzer sends the requested report (if available) or the character NAK (0x15) if there is no report to be sent. It must be borne in mind that after a run test the reports are not immediately available for transmission, as these need validation. To do this go to Utility menu, RS232 and enable the option "Accept result to be sent". This operation must always be performed after each run test or groups of run test. There is also an additional option for performing validation operation automatically. Go to Setup of the analyzer (Menu Utility, Setup Analyzer), go to the Serial (fourth from the left) and enable the option "All results must be sent automatically (without validate)" at the bottom of the page. In case of positive response to the request for a report the analyzer transmits: Patient code................. List type....................... Sample type................. Number of reports....... Section - IV Software 15 characters "T" for Routine or "R" for STATS "S" for Serum or "U" for Urine 3 characters BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 13 Patient code................. List type....................... Sample type................. Number of reports....... 15 characters "T" for Routine or "R" for STATS "S" for Serum or "U" for Urine 3 characters For each report: Analysis code.............. Result........................... Check-Sum.................. <EOT> 4 characters 7 characters 3 characters The following is an example of eventual response to the data sent in "Sending a patient to BT 3000 PLUS": 000000000000001RS003GLU 000.000BUN 0010.10CHO 00100.0245<EOT> 4-4. Where: 000000000000001.. R................................... S................................... 003................................ GLU............................... 000.000........................ Patient code Identifies STATS list Identifies the type of patient (in this case: Serum) Identifies numbers of reports First test code GLU test result BUN......................... 0010.10.................... CHO.......................... 00100.0................... 245.......................... <EOT>.................... Second test code BUN test result Third test code CHO test result Identifies the Check-Sum This character ends communication CALCULATION OF CHECK-SUM: This procedure calculates a Control code in accordance with the transmitted or received data. An algebraic sum of ASCII values of all the sent characters is executed. For example the character "A" has ASCII value 65 - 0x41. Consequently the module 256 of the found value is executed (balance of dividing the value by 256). This is the Check-Sum to be sent. 4-4.1. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE SERIAL PROTOCOL The patients reception has been improved in the following manner: 1) 2) 3) Code 22 23 24 If a patient is already in the list and is sent again, then the same will be overwritten. If more patients above the real capacity of the list were sent then these were sent to the supplementary list of controls. This error has been corrected. The following errors have been added to the existing list: Description A patient has been sent after assigning him a specific position, which is already occupied. The patient is already in the list (or has been executed), the Clone field has not been enabled, but the list of assignment is different in comparison to that of the patient stored in the analyzer. The transmitted code belongs to an executed patient but neither the Repetition field nor the Clone field has been activated. Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 13 4-5. WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERFACE CABLE BT3000 PLUS BT3000 PLUS 4-6. VARIABLE SERIAL PROTOCOL Introduction The variable serial protocol has been designed to provide the user with possibility to personalize the transmitted and received data from the analyzer. The user can transmit or receive in addition to preset data (patient code, analysis code, results etc.), also the simple text strings and/or characters in order to meet the personal requirements. Not only the user can decide to send or receive numerical information (for example number of tests) not as single byte but as a preset numerical string or vice versa. For example the user can decide to receive something like: "Initiate analysis data" <Analysis data true and typical> "End analysis data" Where the phrases "Initiate analysis data" and "End analysis data" do not refer to any preset data by the analyzer but serve only for monitoring communication process (can be useful for inserting specific markers on those programs which obtain information from text files). It is obvious that the protocol of initiation and end of communication, the commands for the request of report, and the analyzer responses in case of error or success remain identical to the usual preset serial communication. NOTE: a) If a check-sum is omitted in a communication then the analyzer will not control it. b) The following numbers have been used to represent the error codes relevant to sending a patient to the analyzer as regards the parameters not part of the standard serial communication: Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 13 Error Code 1 2 3 4 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Description Number of invalid analysis Invalid Data (not through variables) Invalid Data (through variables) An analysis variable is outside the SET BEGIN/END relative to the analysis The patient is not to be repeated The field corresponding to the Serum/Urine is different from the patient in memory Patients list full Transmitted list different from the original A patient has been sent after assigning him a specific position, which is already occupied. The patient is already in the list (or has been executed), the Clone field has not been enabled, but the list of assignment is different in comparison to that of the patient stored in the analyzer. The transmitted code belongs to an executed patient but neither the Repetition field nor the Clone field has been activated. Notes regarding Scripts A script is a text document. Each one of the single commands must each reside in a different line and be complete. In other words a single command cannot be divided into more lines. Stringn ‘Name’|$10 -> Valid line Stringn ‘Name’|$10 char ‘A’ -> Invalid line Stringn ‘Name -> Invalid Command |$10 An editor for writing, modifications, saving and compiling of one or more scripts is accessible inside the program (setup function). In any case it is possible to write a script with any text editor (DOS or Windows) like Notepad of Windows or the EDITOR of the DOS. It is not possible to import documents written with UNIX as the characters used for going to the next line are different from the ones used by the DOS or Windows. CAUTION! If one wants to use the script stored in a removable disk (for example floppy disk) then it will be necessary to copy it on the hard disk. TYPE OF DATA Identifies a single character, can pass as printable character (enclosed between Character: single apostrophes), as decimal ASCII value (followed by symbol $) or else hexadecimal ASCII value (followed by 0x). If for example we want to identify the character A (decimal value 65 or hexadecimal value 41) then we can write 'A', $65 or 0x41. Identifies a sequence of printable characters enclosed in single apostrophes, for String: example: 'this is a string'. Identifies a portion of test (preceded by a character ; which will not be compiled Comment: but will serve as note only for the programmer. These are particular sequence of characters preceded by the symbol #, which Variables: will be used by the program for storing internal informations (patient code, analysis name and etc.), refer to "TABLE 1 - TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION". There are also variables for direct uses, which allow for identification of any character below ASCII 32 (space) to facilitate the writing of the script (for example, one can use the variable #EOT to identify the character $4), see "TABLE 2 - INTERNAL VARIABLES". Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 13 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS String: Identifies a string of variable length ending with a particular character. Syntax: String <string>I<Terminator> Where <String> <Terminator> Transmit/receive string End character NOTE: It is not possible to use the variables like parameter <Terminator> Example: String ‘Hello Word’|$0 String ‘My String’|’@’ String #Variable1|0x10 Stringn: Identifies a string of fixed length Syntax: Stringn <String>|<Length> Where <String> <Length> Transmit/receive string String length Note: If the length of the text strings is less than the data length then a series of spaces will be added on the right to reach the data preset length. In case the text string is longer than the data length then the string end will be cut off to match the data length. If the length of the numerical values is less than the data length then a series of characters '0' will be added to the left to reach the preset data dimension. In case the length of the numerical values string is longer than the data length then the string will be truncated to match the data length. It is not possible to use variables as parameter <Length>. Example: Stringn ‘Hello Word’|$40 Stringn #Variable1|0x10 Char: Identifies a single character (or single byte) Syntax: Char <Character> Example: Char ‘H’ Char $20 Char 0x10 Char #STX Set: Identifies the beginning and the end of the group of repetitive commands Syntax Set Begin<Name of group> Begin repetitive group Set End<Name of group> End repetitive group NOTE: Actually the ANALYSESDATA is the unique SET present, which identifies transmission/reception. Only one command SET BEGIN and one command SET END can be present in a script. A script must always contain the command SET. The variable PATIENTNUMBERTEST must be present before the command SET. Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 13 the analysis in COMPILATION ERROR One or more errors due to incorrect script writing or the system error may show up during compilation of a script. The compiler shows the error code, the description of error, and the line where it has been detected. The following table shows the error codes, description, and the possible causes: Error Code Description 1 Unknown command 2 A string request 3 A number request 04 Invalid number format 5 Excessive data 6 7 Invalid data String Terminator Request 8 Too little data 9 Invalid String Length 10 Empty string Possible Causes An invalid command has been inserted in the commands of script. A string as first parameter for String or Stringn command has not been inserted. A string like parameter <lunghezza> of command Stringn has been inserted. Inserted invalid decimal or hexadecimal number. a) Inserted more than two parameters for command String or Stringn. b) Inserted more than one parameter for the command Char or Set. A string for command Char has been inserted. The end (') character of a string not found. a) Inserted less than two parameters for command String or Stringn. b) No parameter inserted for command Char or Set. The string length for Stringn command is less than 0 or more than 128. a) An empty string inserted for the command String or Stringn. b) Inserted a character identified as " a) 11 Unknown variable 12 Damaged file 13 Unknown file 14 Incorrect identifier in the SET command. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Damaged exit file SET command not closed Too many SET commands SET command not found Incorrect variable for SET command Variable not found before the SET command The variable must be String type Tried to transfer an invalid variable in the list of internal variables. b) Tried to use a transmission variable in the script of reception or vice versa. Hard disk error. Contact Sales/Service. Internal error. Probably damaged program. Reinstall the program. If the problem persists contact sales/service. a) The text SET BEGIN or SET END not written. b) A different value from ANALYSEDATA transferred as <Group name> for the SET command. Hard disk error. Contact sales/service. The SET END not inserted in the script. More than one SET BEGIN command inserted. The SET BEGIN command not found in the script. A different value from ANALYSEDATA transferred as <Group name> for the SET command. The highlighted variable required in the script before the SET BEGIN command. The highlighted variable must be String type, not Char An already occupied position on the plate has been entered Patient exists but in different An already existing code (or already executed) on the lists plate has been entered, but the list is different. Patient executed but no An already processed code has been entered without repetition indicating a repetition or a clone. Already occupied position Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 13 TABEL 1 – TRANSMISSION The following variables are used for the transmission of a report from analyzer to the host computer: Variable PATIENTCODE PATIENTNAME PATIENTSURNAME PATIENTGROUP PATIENTLISTTYPE PATIENTTYPE PATIENTNOTE PATIENTNUMBERTEST CHECKSUM ANALYSESCODE ANALYSENAME ANALYSESTYPE ANALYSESCONCENTRATION1 ANALYSESCONCENTRATION2 ANALYSESFLAGS1 ANALYSESFLAGS2 ANALYSESMINVALUE ANALYSESMAXVALUE ANALYSESUM1 ANALYSESUM2 ANALYSESUMFACTOR ANALYSES2RESULT ANALYSESSERUMTYPE ANALYSESURINE24H Usage Type of valid data Patient Code Patient Name Patient Surname Group (1) List (2) Method Type (3) Descriptive Note Number of Results Check-Sum Analysis Code Analysis name Analysis Type (4) 1st Concentration 2nd Concentration Flag 1st Result Flag 2nd Result Minimum Value Maximum Value 1st Unit of Measurement 2nd unit of measurement Unit Factor Does the 2nd result exists? (5) Method Type (3) Urine in 24/h String String String String Character String Character String Character String String Character String Character String String String Character String String String String String String String String String String Character String Character String (1) Identifies Male, Female or Child (Select one of these): ‘M’ : Male ‘F’ : Female ‘C’ : Child (2) Identifies Routine or STAT (Select one of these): ‘R’ : Routine ‘S’ : STAT Transmitting patient from archive will always have identifier of Routine. (3) Identifies Serum or Urine (Select one of these): ‘S’ : Serum ‘U’ : Urine (4) Identifies Clinical Chemistry, ISE Module or Relation Analysis (Select one of these): ‘C’ : Clinical Chemistry ‘I’ : ISE Module ‘R’ : Relation Analysis (5) Identifies if the 2nd result exists or not (Select one of these): ‘Y’ : 2nd result exists ‘N’ : 2nd result does not exists ● ● If only the final result is desired then always refer to variables pertaining to 2nd result. In case of the absence of 2nd result then its variables will have the same values of the 1st result. Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 13 TABLE 1 – RECEPTION The following variables are used for reception of a patient by the analyzer: Variable Usage PATIENTCODE PATIENTNAME PATIENTSURNAME PATIENTLISTTYPE PATIENTGROUP PATIENTTYPE PATIENTURINE24H PATIENTNOTE PATIENTISCONTROL PATIENTCONTROLKNOK PATIENTCONTROLLEVEL PATIENTCLONE PATIENTCUPPOSITION PATIENTNUMBERTEST #PATIENTTOREPEAT CHECKSUM ANALYSESCODE Patient Code Patient Name Patient Surname (1) List (2) Group (3) Method Type Urine in 24/h Descriptive Note (4) If the patient is a control (5) If it is a known control (6) Control Level (7) If it is a clone Vial (Cup) position Number of test Patient repetition Check-Sum Analysis Code Type of valid data String String String String Character String Character String Character String String String Character String Character String Character String Character String Character String Character String Character String Character String (1) Identifies Routine or STAT (Select only one of these): $0 : Routine $1 : STAT ‘0’ : Routine ‘1’ : STAT ‘R’ : Routine ‘S’ : STAT ‘ROUTINE’ : Routine ‘STAT’ : STAT (2) Identifies Male, Female or Child (Select only one of these): $0 : Male $1 : Female $2 : Child ‘0’ : Male ‘1’ : Female ‘2’ : Child ‘M’ : Male ‘F’ : Female ‘C’ : Child ‘MAN’ : Male ‘FEMALE’ : Female ‘CHILD’ : Child (3) Identifies Serum or Urine (Select only one of these): $0 : SERUM $1 : URINE ‘0’ : SERUM ‘1’ : URINE ‘S’ : SERUM ‘U’ : URINE ‘SERUM’ : SERUM ‘URINE’ : URINE (4) Identifies a Control or a Sample (Select only one of these): $0 : Sample $1 : Control ‘0’ : Sample ‘1’ : Control ‘N’ : Sample ‘Y’ : Control ‘S’ : Sample ‘C’ : Control ‘NO’ : Sample ‘YES’ : Control ‘SAMPLE’ : Sample ‘CONTROL’ : Control Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 13 (5) Identifies a Known or Unknown Control (Select only one of these): $0 : Unknown $1 : Known ‘0’ : Unknown ‘1’ : Known ‘N’ : Unknown ‘Y’ : Known ‘U’ : Unknown ‘K’ : Known ‘NO’ : Unknown ‘YES’ : Known ‘UNKNOW’ : Unknown ‘KNOW’ : Known (6) Identifies Control Level (Select only one of these): $1 : Level 1 $2 : Level 2 $3 : Level 3 ‘1’ : Level 1 ‘2’ : Level 2 ‘3’ : Level 3 ‘L’ : Level 1 ‘N’ : Level 2 ‘A’ : Level 3 ‘LOW’ : Level 1 ‘NORMAL’ : Level 2 ‘ABNORMAL’ : Level 3 (7) Identifies if it is a Clone (Select only one of these): $0 : Normal $1 : Clone ‘0’ : Normal ‘1’ : Clone ‘N’ : Normal ‘Y’ : Clone ‘NOCLONE’ : Normal ‘CLONE’ : Clone (8) Identifies if the patient is a repetition or not #00 : Normal patient #01 : To be repeated '0' : Normal patient '1' : To be repeated 'N' : Normal patient 'Y' : To be repeated Note: It is possible to repeat the patient if: 1) It is not present among the executed patients 2) No free position exists on the plate 3) The patient has already been inserted in the current list 4) The lists of execution are different 5) The Serum/Urine field is different 6) It is also selected as clone Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 13 TABEL 2 – INTERNAL VARIABLES Variables Decimal NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS TAB LF VF FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US $00 $01 $02 $03 $04 $05 $06 $07 $08 $09 $10 $11 $12 $13 $14 $15 $16 $17 $18 $19 $20 $21 $22 $23 $24 $25 $26 $27 $28 $29 $30 $31 Hexadecimal 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 0x20 0x21 SCRIPT EXAMPLES The examples outlined here are the transformation in script of the standard routine of the patient reception by the analyzer. Stringn Char Char Char Stringn Stringn #PatientCode|$15 #PatientListType #PatientType #PatientClone #PatientCupPosition|$2 #PatientNumberTest|$2 Set Stringn Set #BeginAnalysesData #AnalysesCode|$4 #EndAnalysesData Stringn #CheckSum|$3 The following are the details of the above Scripts: #PatientCode|$15 Stringn Patient Code of fixed length equal to 15 characters #PatientListType Char Type of list (Routine/STAT) as single character #PatientType Char Serum type (Serum/Urine) as single character Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 11 of 13 #PatientClone Char Identifies if the patient is or is not a clone (single character) #PatientCupPosition|$2 Stringn Position of serum cup (string of fixed length equal to 2 characters) #PatientNumberTest|$2 Stringn Number of tests to be executed (string of fixed length equal to 2 characters) #BeginAnalysesData Set Beginning of analysis codes #AnalysesCode|$4 Stringn An analysis code of fixed length equal to 4 characters. It must be entered for each type of test as per qty indicated in the #PatientNumberTest. #EndAnalysesData Set End of analysis codes #CheckSum|$3 Stringn Check-Sum (transferred as a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters) The following examples are the transformation in script of the standard routine for the transmission of a report by the analyzer to the host computer: Stringn Char stringn Set Stringn Stringn Set Stringn #PatientCode|$15 #PatientType #PatientNumberTest|$3 #BeginAnalysesData #AnalysesCode|$04 #AnalysesConcentration2|$7 #EndAnalysesData #CheckSum|$3 The details of the above scripts are as follows: #PatientCode|$15 Stringn Patient Code of fixed length equal to 15 characters #PatientType Char Serum type (Serum/Urine) as single character #PatientNumberTest|$3 Stringn Number of results to be sent (a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters) #BeginAnalysesData Set Beginning of zone repeated for the number of results to be sent (see #PatientNumberTest) #AnalysesCode|$04 Stringn An analysis code of fixed length equal to 4 characters #AnalysesConcentration2|$7 Stringn Concentration referred to the analysis code as per #AnalysesCode (a string of fixed length equal to 7 characters) #EndAnalysesData Set End of zone repeated for the number of results to be sent #CheckSum|$3 Stringn Check-Sum (transferred as a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters) Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 12 of 13 4-7. SERIAL COMMUNICATION TEST PROGRAMS 4-8. PROGRAM COMUNICA.EXE: A simple communication program for sending command characters to the analyzer and receive any response. At the start the only input to the program is the number of the communication port (from 1 to 4). A blue screen divided into two sections is displayed. In the upper section the characters coming from the analyzer are displayed, while the lower section displays the characters sent to the analyzer. The only special keys used are F1 to clear the screen and F10 for exiting the program. The special characters (with values less than 32) are displayed in ASCII notations along with their values. For example the Character EOT - value 4 - will be shown as EOT (4). To send a special character (with values less than 32 or higher than 124) it is necessary to keep pressed the ALT key and simultaneously write the value of the character to be sent using numerical keys. For example to send EOT it is necessary to keep the ALT key pressed and simultaneously enter the value 4 through the numerical key and then release the ALT key. 4-9. PROGRAM BTPLUS.EXE: A simple communication program that simulates the host computer. At the start it is necessary to identify the number of communication port (from 1 to 4) and the desired procedure (Transmission or Reception). In case the Transmission is selected the program will ask for patient code (from 1 to 15 characters), the test number (from 1 to 9) and the relevant analysis code for each test (for example: BUN). It is a good practice to use the same analysis codes, which the analyzer has memorized in the plate actually in use, if otherwise then an error will result in the transmission phase. Now the program will execute an initialization procedure of communication with the analyzer, will send patient data and wait for the outcome of transmission. At the end the screen will display the outcome of the operation or show the position number of the plate where the patient has been inserted or explanation of error code sent by the instrument (for example: Patient Code Duplicated). If the Reception procedure is selected, then the program will begin initialization of communication with analyzer, will ask for data of the next report ready for serial dispatch and show data of relevant downloaded report. If there are no reports to be received, then a relevant message will be displayed. Every time the program waits for a response from the analyzer, in case of problem it is possible to abort the current operation by simply pressing the Esc (Escape) key. Note: Both the programs must reside in the computer connected serially to the analyzer through appropriate cable indicated in the Operators Manual. The computer must be an IBM compatible equipped with DOS operative system: Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows 2000. The operating systems such as MAC, UNIX, Windows ME or XP are not supported. Since the programs operate in DOS ambience, therefore in case the Windows operating system is used then it will be necessary to open a DOS shell (the command Prompts of MS-DOS is found in the menu Programs, Accessories - accessed through the Start button on the bottom left of the screen). Both the programs use serial port with the following setups: Baude-Rate....................... 9600 Stop-Bits........................... 1 Parity................................. None Hand-shake...................... Hardware Important Notice: These two programs are in the installation disk under Utility folder. Section - IV Software BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 13 of 13 SECTION - V REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF VARIOUS PARTS REAGENT MODULE REFRIGERATION MODULE SAMPLING ARMS READING STATION REAR PANEL ACCESS COMPUTER BOX SERUM MODULE ISE MODULE BT3000 PLUS - EXPLODED VIEW Figure 5-1 Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 21 5-1. ACCESS TO VARIOUS MODULES - INTRODUCTION The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer requires a series of mechanical adjustments during the production and assembly process to assure optimal performance. The same mechanical adjustment procedures that were followed in the production are outlined here for field maintenance and repair. The analyzer is based on a modular construction. Each module must be correctly inserted into its proper location. Any positioning adjustments are facilitated by the large tolerances on the mounting holes. It is important to check that the sampling arm movement precisely coincides with all the operating positions. A fine adjustment of positions can be made through the software. During the production phase of the analyzer, a special reference mask (jig) is used to correctly position the various modules in their locations. However, during maintenance and repair, one must take care to operate, step by step, so as not to alter the original assembly. Therefore, it is strongly recommended not to disassemble multiple modules at one time. Instead, the modules should be serviced and calibrated one at a time 5-2. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SERUM/ISE SAMPLING ARM Turn off all power to the instrument before replacing or repairing the sample arm. Remove the casing and all of the parts necessary to access the arm subassembly (see Figures 5-2 & 5-3). Disconnect the electrical cable and the liquid heater cable. Unscrew the liquid line connector from the appropriate diluter. Unscrew the sampling arm assembly 3 mounting screws. Gently lift the sampling arm module and place it on a safe location. This operation may not seem simple but the figure here facilitates the removal. Replace the repaired or substitute sampling arm module in its appropriate location observing the preceding steps in reverse order. Arm Head Needle Timing Belts SAMPLING ARM (FRONT) SAMPLING ARM (REAR) Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Do not tighten the new sampling arm mounting screws to allow for position calibration. Manually swivel the sampling arm to verify coverage from reagent plate to the cuvette plate. Also verify if the sampling needle centers the washing funnel and the reading cuvette correctly by observing the following procedure: Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 21 1) 2) 3) 4) Manually lower the sampling needle all the way into the washing funnel to verify that it centers correctly. Gently lift out needle from washing funnel and move it CCW (counterclockwise) to the cuvette plate. Align the washing piston with any cuvette on the cuvette-plate, and then carefully slide downwards the washer body until the piston bottoms into the cuvette. Locate and mark the position of 12th cuvette by counting anticlockwise starting from the cuvette adjacent to the cuvette with washing piston. Move CCW (counterclockwise) and lower sampling arm needle into the 12th cuvette and verify that it centers correctly. If necessary adjust the whole arm assy until the needle is centered properly. To verify the correct needle centering position in the washing funnel, lower again the sampling needle into the washing funnel. Repeat the funnel/cuvette adjustment procedure for a few times until the needle centers properly on the washing funnel and the cuvette then finally tighten the three mounting screws on the arm bracket. NOTE: When the sampling arm is substituted or simply removed for service and then reinstalled, it is highly important to verify the zero position and afterwards check all the other positions observing the procedure as follows: a) Start up the analyzer and let the program bootstrap begin. b) During bootsrap press the keys <Alt>, <Ctrl> and <Shift> simultaneously. c) Let the bootstrap end (a message "ONLY FOR SPECIALIST" appears on the screen). d) Align any cuvette on the cuvette-plate with the washing piston, and then carefully slide downwards the washer body until the piston bottoms into the cuvette. e) Lower the sampling arm needle into the washing funnel and press enter key. Do not touch the sampling arm; leave it in whatever position it is in. f) Enter the mechanical calibration program (icon with gear symbol). g) Carefully perform mechanical calibration of all the positions. Do not overlook any position. h) Perform a general reset (F5). The arm needle should position itself on the center of the washing bowl. Verify the correct position. The function "ONLY FOR SPECIALIST" can also be activated with the instrument already turned on. Perform a reset by clicking on the icon Ⓡ and press the keys ALT, CTRL, and SHIFT simultaneously and then repeat preceding steps d) to h). IMPORTANT NOTICE: Mechanical calibration procedure for the ISE Arm is the same as above except that the ISE Arm needle is first centered on the ISE washing funnel (metallic funnel located on the right of the serum plate) and then moved CCW to any cuvette on the cuvette plate where it centers correctly. 5-2.1. ARM HEAD RETROFIT KIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS P/N 07-04438-02 This retrofit kit replaces and upgrades the previous sampling arm head (P/N 07-0443801). It simplifies the routine maintenance procedure. The new arm head installation is permanent, and only the tube heater assy must be replaced when necessary. To install the arm head observe the following step-by-step procedure: 1) Turn off power to the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid electric shock. 2) Gently disconnect the previous arm head tubing and cable connectors. 3) Loosen the 3 setscrews on the rear near the (shaft) and remove the arm head. 4) Unscrew the 2 lateral screws from the new arm head cover and remove cover (Figure 5-6) from the body. 5) Carefully place the new arm head body over vertical shaft (Figure 5-4) ensuring that the locking screw is parallel to the reference slot on top edge of the shaft. Gently push down the arm head body until level with the top edge of shaft and securely tighten the locking screw. 6) Insert the metallic fin into the aperture on the rear of arm head and tighten the screw (Figure 5-5). Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 21 Reference Slot Head Body Fin Shaft Locking Screw Figure 5-4 7) 8) Figure 5-5 Place the cover on the arm head and gently push down to stop. Ensure that the sample tube is correctly positioned between the metallic fin and the appropriate slot on the rear of cover. Securely fasten the two screws on the sides of the cover (Figure 5-6). Securely connect sample tube and cable to correct connectors. Cover Left Sampling Arm, cut 20 cm from this tube. Figure 5-6 Sampling Tube with Needle Holder P/N 08-05029-01 Figure 5-7 NOTE: The preceding installation procedure is identical for both the sampling and ISE arms (left arm and right arm in BT 3000 PLUS). To facilitate production the length of sample tube (single plastic tube adjacent to the electrical connector - Figure 5-7) is identical in both the arms. It is necessary to reduce the length of the plastic tube of left arm head (for clinical chemistry sampling) by about 20 centimeters prior to connecting it to the diluter. The length of tube of right arm head (ISE sampling arm) remains unaltered. In the analyzers BT 1000 and BT 2000 PLUS (without ISE sampling arm) the tube length of sampling arm head must be reduced by 20 centimeters (Figure 5-7) as already outlined 9) 10) It is mandatory to perform calibration of positions with the standard service procedures. This operation is necessary because of possible variations during installation. It is mandatory to perform the calibration of volumes using appropriate procedure. This procedure is necessary because the vertical position of needle may result to be slightly displaced with respect to the previous version of sampling arm. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 21 Final testing: After terminating the installation procedure, test the system as follows: a) Verify that the new arm head is firmly secured to the shaft (Fig. 5-4, 5-5 and 5-6). Try to rotate the head after holding the shaft stationary. Head should not move, if otherwise then firmly tighten the locking screw. b) Touch with finger the sampling needle, instantly the red LED at the bottom of arm head lights and projects a beam downwards. c) Let few minutes pass and then touch the needle holder, it should feel warm (heated). d) In the program of calibration services repeat the verification of positions and eventually correct them. Now the new arm head has been correctly installed. Any future maintenance will be much easier as the only part subject to wear and periodic replacement is the "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" P/N 08-05029-01 (Figures 5-7 & 5-11), which also incorporates the supply voltage leads for powering the arm head system. The "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" kit integrates sampling needle, needle holder, sampling tube with heating circuit and appropriate connectors. Additional Informative Photographs: Arm Head (Top View) Arm Head (Bottom View) Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Arm Head (Side View) Figure 5-10 Sampling Tube with Needle Holder P/N 08-05029-01 Figure 5-11 5-2.2. SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER P/N 08-05029-01 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS In the arm head the only part subject to wear and periodic replacement is the "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" P/N 08-05029-01 (Figure 5-12), which also incorporates the supply voltage leads for powering the arm head system. The "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" kit integrates sampling needle, needle holder, sampling tube with heating circuit and appropriate connectors. To install the arm Sampling Tube with Needle Holder observe the following stepby-step procedure: Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 21 Cover Left Sampling Arm, cut 20 cm from this tube. Figure 5-13 Sampling Tube with Needle Holder P/N 08-05029-01 Figure 5-12 Disconnect Tube & Cable Figure 5-14 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Figure 5-15 Turn off power to the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid electric shock. Loosen (do not remove) the 2 lateral screws from the arm head cover and carefully remove cover by sliding upwards from the arm head (Fig.5-13). Gently disconnect the previous "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" tubing and cable connectors (Figure 5-14). Note that the ISE ARM (on the right side) cable and tubing connectors have different locations. Loosen (do not remove) the screw (Figure 5-15) on the needle clamp. Carefully disconnect tube (Figure 5-16) from the arm head and remove the defective "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" (Figure 5-17). Correctly install the new "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" on the arm head and firmly secure the needle holder by tightening the clamp screw (Figure 5-15). Place the cover on the arm head and gently push down to stop. Ensure that the sample tube is correctly positioned between the metallic fin and the appropriate slot on the rear of cover. Securely fasten the two screws on the sides of the cover (Figure 5-13). Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 21 Figure 5-16 Figure 5-17 NOTE: The preceding installation procedure is identical for both the sampling and ISE arms (left arm and right arm in BT 3000 PLUS). To facilitate production the length of sample tube (single plastic tube adjacent to the electrical connector - Figure 5-12) is identical in both the arms. It is necessary to reduce the length of the plastic tube of left arm head (for clinical chemistry sampling) by about 20 centimeters prior to connecting it to the diluter. The length of tube of right arm head (ISE sampling arm) remains unaltered. In the analyzers BT 1000 and BT 2000 PLUS (without ISE sampling arm) the tube length of sampling arm head must be reduced by 20 centimeters (Figure 5-12) as already outlined 5-2.3. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD “L” 15-04765-01 KIT P/N 11-05248-01 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (The reference communication is ECN No. 132 dated 12th Jan. 2005) CAUTION! It is recommended the analyzer be switched off and the power cord unplugged from the wall outlet prior to removing the access covers or servicing. NOTE: Illustrated instructions may not be the exact representation for the analyzer due to possible design modifications. Fig. 5-18 Fig. 5-19 1) Carefully lift off the ISE Module and gently remove the I/O fluid tubes (Fig. 5-18). 2) Carefully remove the ISE solutions container and the container support from the ISE compartment(Fig.5-19). 3) Unscrew the 4 socket head cap screws (on the left and right sides) near the ISE and reagent covers (Figures 5-20 & 5-21). Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 21 Fig. 5-20 Fig. 5-21 Fig. 5-24 Fig. 5-23 Fig. 5-22 4) Take out the cylindrical container (Figure 5-22) and carefully remove analyzer base cover by gently pulling back as shown in Figure 5-23. 5) Disconnect tube and cable connector of Arm. 6) Unscrew 3 socket head screws, which secure the Sampling Arm located on the left of analyzer (Fig. 5-24) and lift off arm by slightly tilting it. Fig. 5-25 Fig. 5-26 7) Remove the 4 screws that attach the Arm Controller Board to the arm drive subassembly (Fig. 5-25). 8) Firmly secure the new Arm Controller Board, and verify the presence of correct microcontroller - µC (Fig.5-26)as follows: • µC3-ARM-C-XX (P/N 30-05055-01) on the "Angular Position Encoder Board" P/N 15-04767-01 (board with two encoders). • µC3-ARMCM-XX (P/N 30-05055-02) on the "Angular Position Encoder Board" P/N 15-05234-01 (board with one encoder). 9) To reassemble, replace the screws, cables and covers, following the disassembly procedures in reverse order. Always check all screws for tightness. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 21 5-3. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENT MODULE The repair or replacement of the reagent module is relatively complex because of the necessity to remove many parts before the extraction of whole module. It is important to turn off power to the analyzer before any repair or replacement. After the repair or replacement, no mechanical re-calibration is necessary. However, there is the possibility that the sample arm may require an angular position adjustment through software program. The following situations may require service personnel intervention: 1) 2) 3) 4) Replacement of one or more Peltiers Replacement of the transmission belt Replacement of the drive motor Replacement of the temperature or Hall sensors For these operations, refer to disassembly procedure and associated photos. 5-3.1. REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PELTIER MODULES This operation requires the removal of the front body, computer box, and the front cover. Refer to the photo sequence in the disassembly procedure. Disconnect all of the connecting cables, unscrew the 4 mounting screws securing the Peltier module and remove the module. Turn it upside down and carefully place it on a surface. Unscrew and remove the two heat sinks. Now, observe the exposed group of Peltiers and the electrical connections soldered to a PCB. Check for the defective or interrupted Peltier using the Ohmmeter. Bear in mind the difficulty of instrumental measurement because of the emission of residual energy produced from the Peltier. The use of a digital tester may provide a faulty measurement. It is recommended to verify the inconsistency of an average measurement rather than the absolute value that is, in theory, approximately 2 Ohm per Peltier. Generally, a defective Peltier presents a partial interruption with values of some 10 Ohms, which are sufficient to drastically reduce the current flow in the series of Peltiers, therefore generating a diminished performance of the refrigeration group. Unsolder the leads of the defective Peltier, unscrew the 2 screws on the metallic disc securing the Peltier element and remove it. Substitute the damaged Peltier with a new Peltier module using thermal grease for dissipation. Make sure to take into account the proper polarity (see Figure 7-1 in Section VII). An incorrect assembly may affect the system performance. Carefully tighten the screws ensuring that these are not overtightened so as to avoid damage to the ceramic elements of the Peltier. After assembling all of the devices, it is important to recalibrate the temperature control. 5-3.2. REPLACEMENT OF TRANSMISSION BELT THE REAGENT PLATE For this operation, it is necessary to remove the case, computer box, and the front cover. Remove the round refrigeration chamber (in aluminum) by unscrewing the 16 mounting screws. Observe the photo sequence for disassembly details. Loosen the screws of drive motor assembly plate, located on the top left corner, and slide it slightly inward to loosen the belt. Remove the damaged belt and replace it with a new belt. To reassemble, follow the preceding steps in reverse order. Carefully slide the motor plate outwards to the left to provide the correct tension and tightness to the belt, and then tighten the mounting screws. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 21 5-3.3. REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PLATE DRIVE MOTOR The removal operations are similar to the above "Replacement of the Reagent Plate Transmission Belt". The motor is secured to the plate through 4 screws. 5-3.4. REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENT TEMPERATURE AND HALL SENSORS The removal operations are similar to the "Replacement of the Reagent Plate Transmission Belt". Two fixing screws on one side secure the rectangular PVC housing of Hall sensor. The sensor requires precise positioning to correctly couple with the magnet on the drive pulley. The Hall sensor assembly must come close to the transmission belt, which interposes between the magnet and the Hall sensor at a maximum distance of 1mm almost grazing the same belt. The temperature sensor is housed in a rectangular metallic container, which is closely secured to the bottom of the circular aluminum reagent chamber with a single screw accessible from the top of the chamber. The Replacement of the temperature sensor does not require any particular care, except that the two parts must be joined perfectly by properly tightening the screw. No temperature verification or calibration is necessary. 5-4. REPAIR/REPLACEMENT - READING STATION MODULE It is possible to access nearly all the parts of the reading station module for the maintenance and the repair. The analyzer must be turned off prior to repair or Replacement. Only in the case of the Replacement of Peltiers (located at the bottom of module). It will be necessary to remove this module. The following components are easily accessed without removal of the module: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Replacement of the Peltier Replacement of Halogen lamp Replacement of all the tubes of the hydraulic circuit Replacement or maintenance of diluter Replacement of washing piston Replacement and inspection of reading cuvettes Replacement of photometer 5-4.1. REPLACEMENT OF THE CUVETTE PELTIER For the Replacement of the Peltiers it is necessary to remove the 3 mounting screws (see Figure 5-32 entitled "Reading Station - Bottom View") To facilitate the removal of a screw located inside, it is necessary to remove the front cabinet. It is important to disconnect all of the cables and tubing before removing the station. Each Peltier group contains a fan and heat sink and is securely attached with 4 screws to the base of the station. Coat the new Peltier surface with a thin layer of thermal grease and secure it to the base of the reading station with 4 screws. Tighten the mounting screws until they are snug, ensuring that the pressure is applied uniformly. Do not overtighten otherwise the Peltier may get damaged. Ensure leads' polarity is matched correctly. The incorrect assembly of the Peltier can cause serious malfunction of the thermostatic system. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 21 4 3 1 2 Replacing the Halogen Lamp Figure 5-27 5-4.2. REPLACEMENT OF THE HALOGEN LAMP Precautions for handling the halogen lamp: a) b) c) d) Always allow the burnt out lamp to cool down. Never touch the reflector or the lamp with bare fingers. Use a rag when changing. If the lamp is touched inadvertently during installation, clean the lamp or reflector with alcohol and dry with a clean, soft cloth before burning. Contamination of the lamp or reflector may reduce lamp performance. It is recommended to initially burn the new lamp for about 30 minutes before analyzer operation. LAMP LAMP Rear Cover LAMP REMOVAL (Rear Cover) LAMP REMOVAL (Front Shutter) Figure 5-28 Figure 5-29 Disconnect the input power before servicing. The replacement of the Halogen lamp can be done by the removal of the rear panel, or by sliding the transparent shutter front panel and then removing the access cover from the deck (Figures 5-28 & 5-29). Release the lamp assembly by gently sliding downwards. Loosen the front screws ❷ in the socket ❸ and remove the burnt out lamp ❹. Insert a new halogen lamp fully into the socket and firmly tighten the screws to secure the lamp. It is recommended to slightly press both of the lamps retaining spring clips ❶ before fitting the lamp. Slide the lamp assembly onto the light cone and orient the lamp socket in the vertical position as shown in the Figure 5-29. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 11 of 21 5-4.3. REPLACEMENT OF HYDRAULIC TUBES There are three tubing and accessory kits for maintenance. A "Quarterly Maintenance Kit" (P/N 11-05338-01, Figure 30A) for ISE tubing (replaces Bimonthly Maintenance Kit P/N 662.1016), "Six-Monthly Maintenance Kit" P/N 11-05337-01 (Reading Station Figure 30A) for special tubes exposed to wear and tear, including pump cartridges etc. for an over-all maintenance, and an annual maintenance kit: "Vacuum Pump Annual Service Kit" P/N 11-05339-01 (for noncurrent Vacuum Pump System P/N 662.0788 and by-products refer to Section 012, Para 12-2.15.1.). When installing any tubing kit, it is important that the hydraulic circuit is empty. To avoid any undesired liquid spills, disconnect the external water input before applying any maintenance kit. Turn on the instrument and perform a washing cycle to evacuate all liquid in the hydraulic circuit. When changing tubes, follow the illustrative diagrams (Figures 5-30, 5-30A) on the next pages. 5-4.3.1. PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING INSTALLATION The Biotecnica peristaltic pump uses special tubing with bonded collars (colored). A correct installation (avoid twisting and kinking) will promote the best possible tube life, so please ensure that the following guidelines are followed: 1) Remove old peristaltic tubing and discard it. 2) Select the appropriate tubing and insert one of its fixed collars into one of the appropriate grooves on the pump bracket. 3) Lay the tubing around the pump rollers and stretch the tubing slightly (must not exceed 1 centimeter max of stretching) and insert the other fixed collar into the second groove on the collar bracket. Fixed Collar 1 cm max Stretching CAUTIONS: Groove Peristaltic Tube Pump Bracket a) During installation the tubing should be stretched slightly (must not exceed 1 centimeter of stretching) to avoid peristaltic tubing failure or poor tube life through permanent elongation. b) Be sure that the tube is not at all twisted when you place it around the pump rollers. Twist in the tube may prevent pumping. c) Pump Rollers PERISTALTIC PUMP ASSEMBLY Section - V Repair or Replacement To prevent emergency service, schedule peristaltic tube replacement at regular intervals as outlined in the manual. Thus, peristaltic tube replacement during regularly scheduled preventive maintenance is a must. BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 12 of 21 4 7 2 1 3 6 Washer/Diluter - BT 3000 PLUS (Reading Station) NOTE: 4 KITS P/N 662.1016, 11-05219-01 AND 11-05220-01 TABULATED BELOW HAVE BEEN REPLACED BY THE KITS 11-05337-01, 11-05338-01 SHOWN ON THE NEXT PAGE 14 OF 21. 5 HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORRIES Figure 5-30 ITEM QTY 1A 5 6 7 2 1 1 1 ITEM 1 1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 ITEM 1 1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 QTY 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 ISE Module BIMONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 662.1016) DESCRIPTION Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode ISE Pump Tube REF - K Tube Manifold SIX MONTH MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05219-01) DESCRIPTION Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE Aspiration Tube for Washing Module H2O Tube for Washing Module Peristaltic Pump Cartridge Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode ISE Pump Tube REF - K Tube Manifold ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05220-01) DESCRIPTION QTY 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1A Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE Aspiration Tube for Washing Module H2O Tube for Washing Module Peristaltic Pump Cartridge Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode ISE Pump Tube REF - K Tube Manifold Tubular Filter for Water Container Sampling Needle Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 13 of 21 4 2 7 1 3 6 Washer/Diluter - BT 3000 PLUS (Reading Station) 4 CURRENT MAINTENANCE KITS 5 1A HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORRIES Figure 5-30A ISE Module SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05337-01) # BT 3000 PLUS (KIT MANUTENZIONE SEMESTRALE cod. 11-05337-01 #BT 3000 PLUS) ITEM (POS.) QTY (QTA) 1 1A 2 3 4 - 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE) Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE Aspiration Tube #Washing Module H2O Tube #Washing Module Peristaltic Pump Cartridge Tubular Filter for external water container Sampling Needle QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05338-01) # BT 3000 PLUS (KIT MANUTENZIONE TRIMESTRALE - cod. 11-05338-01 #BT 3000 PLUS) ITEM (POS.) QTY (QTA) 5 6 7 - 1 1 1 1 Section - V DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE) Interconnection Tube #GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode ISE Pump Tube REF - K Tube Manifold Peristaltic Pump Tube Warning Notice Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 14 of 21 5-4.4. REPLACEMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF DILUTER Even though it is unlikely that the diluter will require Replacement, its removal for service is quite simple. Turn off all power to the instrument before servicing. The diluter is secured through 4 screws on its flange and one cable connector for electrical circuitry. The maintenance involves yearly cleaning of the piston and the transparent Plexiglas chamber. To perform maintenance disconnect the fluid tubing. Unscrew the 2 screws located on the front of the diluter Plexiglas chamber and carefully remove the Plexiglas chamber exposing the piston. Clean the piston with a soft lint-free cloth. Wash the Plexiglas chamber and the inside of the O-ring with distilled water. After cleaning, gently replace the chamber onto the diluter drive. Firmly secure with the 2 screws. The O-ring (P/N 330.5703) must be substituted every 300,000 cycles. Prior to O-ring installation, make sure that all surfaces are free of dust, dirt and the like. 5-4.5. REPLACEMENT OF THE WASHING PISTON Turn off the analyzer prior to replacing the washing piston. Push the washing piston carriage fully upward to facilitate the piston removal. Remove all of the silicone tubes. Gently unscrew the piston from the plunger stem by turning clockwise (Fig. 5-31). In case of difficulty (slippery piston, etc.), use the Piston Grip (Fig. 5-34) or lint-free cloth to improve the grip. Fit the new piston and finger-tighten firmly by turning counterclockwise until it is properly seated against the thread shoulder. Reposition the carriage into its original position. Attach all tubing to the appropriate connectors. 5-4.6. REPLACEMENT CUVETTE OF WASHING PISTON READING Washer Module It may become necessary to remove the cuvette wheel Figure 5-31 in order to inspect or replace damaged cuvettes. Generally this operation is necessary when the following malfunctions occur: a) Water is present on the cuvette wheel b) Accidental dropping of foreign matter into the cuvettes c) Accidental damage of one or more cuvettes Turn off the analyzer. Push the washing piston carriage fully upward to aid in the cuvette wheel removal. Unscrew the 6 screws from the cuvette wheel and carefully lift out. Use a gentle oscillating movement, if necessary, while exercising extreme care to prevent any damage to the cuvettes. Inspect the cuvette wheel, rotor, and housing for the presence of any liquid. Clean and dry if necessary. Afterwards, diagnose the cause of the problem. Do not wash the cuvettes as this operation will result to be complex because of the use of only distilled water to avoid calcareous build-up. Perform the washing after the cuvette drying or substitution by using appropriate analyzer functions. The foreign objects or physical debris inside the cuvettes can also be removed by turning the cuvette wheel upside-down. Another solution for cleaning cuvette (analyzer must be turned on) is to use the aspiration tube of the washing piston (on top of the washing plunger) by inserting it all the way into the cuvette for few seconds and then manually rotate the cuvette wheel to move to the next cuvette for cleaning. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 15 of 21 When replacing the cuvette wheel, position the small guide hole in the cuvette wheel that coincides with the locating pin on the cuvette rotor. Gently push the cuvette wheel downward onto the rotor. Fasten the cuvette wheel securely by screwing the 6 socket head screws back onto the cuvette rotor. To ensure that pressure is applied uniformly, first tighten all of the screws finger-tight and then tighten them in a crosswise pattern. Do not use excessive force. Gently push downward each cuvette until it bottoms against the depth of the rotor. Attach any disconnected tubing to the appropriate ports. A thorough washing procedure should be performed through the analyzer program before any testing is performed on the analyzer. NOTE: Another efficient method for cleaning the cuvettes may be used without removing the cuvettes plate from its original position. Disconnect the aspiration tube located on top of the washing piston carriage and insert it into the bottom of the cuvette for few seconds to aspirate any dirt or contaminants. Repeat this procedure after manually rotating the cuvette wheel to clean off the desired cuvettes. The high power suction produced by the vacuum pump will quickly eliminate any dirt or contamination. CAUTION: It is required that a complete FCC procedure be performed after replacement of one or more cuvettes. If the removal and replacement of cuvette wheel required no replacement of cuvettes, only the "zeroing" procedure is required. 5-4.7. PHOTOMETER REPLACEMENT The box containing the photometer module is mounted on the underside of the base plate of the light source. Turn off the power to the analyzer before replacing the photometer. The photometer module can be easily removed by unscrewing the 4 mounting screws on the base plate. The new generation photometers (since July 2004) are equipped with an additional connecting cable (having a pare of male/female connectors) for the Reference Channel (Figure 5-32). Caution: It is required that a complete FCC procedure be performed after replacement of the photometer. 5-5 INTRODUCTION TO THE COMPUTER BOX The LCD Display module (Figure 5-36), with fully integrated touch-screen, is on the front of the computer box. An on/off switch for the analyzer is located on the bottom left of the display. The peripherals, CD-ROM player and the floppy disk drive are accessed through a cover just below the display. All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as follows: Parallel port, USB Ports, Serial-Ports, and PS/2 ports for Keyboard & Mouse The ASUS main-board with a 1 GHz Intel Pentium® III (or more) processor, 128 Mb (or more) RAM, DVD/CD-ROM player, 10 Gb (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply are all located inside the computer box. Product enhancement resulting from new innovations in technology and from our continuing quality improvement effort may necessitate changes in this configuration in the future. However, any eventual changes will be fully compatible with the previous version. A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply interconnects the computer box and the process electronics. 5-5A COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD The Computer Box consists of a LCD display monitor incorporating touchscreen. The system power on/off switch is located to the left of the monitor. The DVD-ROM and the Floppy-Disk access door is located below the monitor. All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as follows: Parallel port for the printer, Serial-ports, USB ports, PS/2 ports for keyboard & mouse, CRT port, LAN ports, and Audio port. Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 16 of 21 The following components are located inside the Computer Box: Mainboard with1 GHz Intel Pentium® III (or more) processor, 128 Mb (or more) RAM, DVD/CD-ROM player, 10 Gb (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply. This configuration is subject to variation because of continuous technological evolutions. A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply interconnects the computer box and the process electronics. The Figure 5-37 shows the entire computer box assembly. 5-5.1. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF THE COMPUTER BOX First, remove the 2 mounting screws on the rear to access the internal parts of the module. Now, it is possible to open the box from right to left so that the rear of the box is exposed to the service engineer. One can observe the DVD player, floppy disk drive, and the hard disk inside the lower opening on the rear of the box. The following different operations are required for the removal and Replacement of each particular device: 1) Hard Disk: Remove the mounting screws on the supporting bracket and dislodge the hard disk driver. 2) DVD & Floppy Disk: Unscrew the appropriate screws on the underside of the box and remove the DVD or floppy-disk drivers. It is also necessary to remove the plastic front panel of the LCD display module. 3) Main-board and Peripheral Devices: The main-board (motherboard) is secured to an "L" shaped metallic bracket. Remove the 4 mounting screws on the rear and extract the slide. With this operation, it is possible to access the main-board and all the peripheral devices. 4) TFT-LCD Display Panel: Remove the plastic front panel. Unscrew the 4 screws on the corners, securing the display, and remove the LCD display panel. 5) Power Supply: The power supply of the computer is located in the upper section of the box. To remove the power supply, it is necessary to extract the supporting bracket of the main-board and then remove the 4 screws securing the omega shaped metallic bracket. 5-5.1.1. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for a computer's hard-drive. 5-5.2. 8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTIVE TOUCH-SCREEN To remove the touch-screen, it is necessary to use a fine blade for lifting away the glassbacking panel from the display. The touch-screen is secured to the LCD panel with a very fine double-sided adhesive tape. It is important that the glass-backing panel is precisely centered. Ensure that the active area of the touch-screen matches the active area of the display. When mounting the touch-screen, carefully observe the four angles marked on the perimeter as a point of reference for facilitating the application. The new touch-screen is already equipped with double-sided adhesive tape. If necessary, replace the touch-screen driver. It is important to install the driver found on the CD provided with the new touch-screen monitor. For application, refer to Section XIV, Paragraph 14-2. Entitled "Computer Module Trouble-Shooting". Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 17 of 21 Cable of Reference Channel Reading Station - Bottom View Figure 5-32 Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 18 of 21 Funnel Cap Opener (Manutenzione Tappo Imbuto) P/N 90-05036-01 Serum Plate (Piatto Sieri) Funnel (Imbuto) FUNNEL CAP OPENER Figure 5-33 Washing Piston (Pistone) P/N 20-05110-01 Grip Sleeve (Manicotto) P/N 662.1025 Cleaning Tool (Specillo) P/N 03254 Washing Piston Removal & Cleaning Washing Piston Kit P/N 662.0610 The washing piston (in Teflon) may have occluded holes. Turn off the analyzer prior to changing the piston as follows: 1) Push the washing piston carriage fully upwards with the thumbs 2) Gently unscrew the washing piston from the plunger stem by inserting the supplied "Grip Sleeve" or abrasive paper of fine mesh (to avoid slipping) and using light finger pressure clockwise. 3) Clean small holes on the side of the piston using the supplied "Cleaning Tool". 4) Fit the cleaned piston and finger tighten firmly by turning counterclockwise until properly seated against thread shoulder of the plunger stem. Use "Grip Sleeve" to tighten Figure 5-34 Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 19 of 21 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT Figure 5-35 Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 20 of 21 Touchscreen LCD Display Module Serial Board Cabinet External Monitor Fan PS/2 Ports for Keyboard & Mouse, USB Ports Power Supply Asus Mainboard ON/OFF Switch Floppy Disk DVD ROM Player Hard Disk COMPUTER BOX FIGURE 5-36 LCD DISPLAY CASING COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD FIGURE 5-37 DVD-ROM PLAYER FLOPPY DISK SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD FAN HARD DISK Section - V Repair or Replacement BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 21 of 21 SECTION - VI READING STATION 6-1. GENERAL The Reading Station is a composite system comprehending the following devices: 1) Heated rotor assembly for reading cuvette. 2) 10-channel stationary Photometer module with additional reference channel 3) Halogen lamp with dichroic reflector for photometer 4) Stationary cuvette drum with integrated Peltier-based (heating/cooling element) thermostatic control. 5) Fluidic system consisting of Water (H2O) reservoir, diluter, and washer. 6) Electronic circuits located on the rear of Reading Station The above-mentioned devices are illustrated in the Figure 6-1 below. Liquid Sensor Peristaltic Pump Water Reservoir Diluter Pinch-Valve Cuvette Rotor Assembly Halogen Lamp Pinch-Valve Washer Light Cone Cuvette Drum Quartz Prism Photometer Reference Channel READING STATION Figure 6-1 Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 8 Reference Channel Peltier Module, Heatsink and Ventilator PCB Reading Plate Interface Drive Mechanism READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW Figure 6-2 6-2. PHOTOMETER MODULE The Biotecnica photometer (Figure 6-1) is a patented product and it consists of a small metallic enclosure containing 10 photometric channels. Each channel has its own interferential filter, photo diode, and amplifier. Each amplifier has a dedicated trimmer for gain adjustment as illustrated in the schematic 15-04649-01. The channels amplification is factory calibrated to adapt the signal levels to the manufacturing tolerances of various optical components (photodiodes, interference filters etc.). The light beam enters through the unique port in the photometer enclosure, and after passing through a series of beam splitters, it reaches all the ten channels simultaneously. The reason for this approach is the instantaneous processing of numerous signals. Reference Channel The reference channel is not inside the photometer box but it is located nearby externally. It is an amplified photodiode embedded in the cuvette drum (see Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2) with its cable connected to the photometer for processing by the multiplexer circuit and A/D converter. The reference channel provides stability to the transmission signal when the photometric system is used in the monochromatic mode. When the photometer is selected in the bichromatic mode e.g. 340/700nm, the reference channel is not utilized as the same function is accomplished by the 700nm channel. The Light path The photometer lamp transmits light beam, which converges on the center of reading cuvette, and then through the cuvette it is reflected into the photometer module by the 90º quartz prism located inside the cuvette drum (see Figure 6-1). A small quantity (approximately 2%) of light flux is captured by the reference photodiode prior to the light passes through the cuvette. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 8 6-2.1. REACTION CUVETTE OPERATING PRINCIPLE The light is transmitted through the light cone, into the reaction cuvette, and then reflected into the photometer module by the quartz prism located inside the cuvette system housing. The UV specific optical glass transparent cuvettes allow transmission of wavelengths down to 340nm. The function of the photometer module is to monitor and measure the color variations or absorbance values, between different reaction mixtures over a wavelength range from 340nm-700nm. After a reaction cuvette has passed a photometer measuring position and the reaction mixture has been analyzed, the cuvette moves on towards the washer module where the single piston drains, rinses, and dries the reaction cuvette for re-use. 6-2.2. LIGHT SOURCE The photometer light source consists of a 12 Volt, 35 Watt tungsten halogen lamp with integral dichroic reflector for the dissipation of infrareds. The lamp is secured through the lamp retaining spring clips on the light cone for easy removal or substitution (see Figure 6-1). This custom made, UV enhanced, halogen lamp provides a high radiation output in the 340nm UV range throughout its operating life of approximately 2000 hours. The lamp efficiency is controlled by the analyzer, which detects the radiation insufficiency at 405nm when the optical transmission goes below the 50% of original emission level. Bear in mind that the acquisition of 100 % is memorized when the "SETLAMP" procedure is performed after replacing with new lamp. 6-3. READING CUVETTE SYSTEM The consistent mass of the aluminum cuvette rotor allows for maintenance of temperature uniformity throughout the 34 cuvette wells (Figure 6-3). The stationary cuvette drum in aluminum encompassing the cuvette rotor integrates Peltier modules, which thermostatically maintain the selected temperature. The Peltier modules, relative heat sinks, and the cooling fans are affixed on the underside of the cuvette drum as shown in the Figure 6-2. CUVETTE CUVETTES PLATE CUVETTE DRUM ROTOR MAGNET AND HALL SENSOR PELTIER HEAT SINK STEPPING MOTOR FAN CUVETTES SYSTEM Figure 6-3 The selected temperature is maintained to within ± 0.1ºC at the base and ± 0.2ºC in the cuvette wells. The stationary part and the moving part are tightly matched with 0.2mm spacing in-between. However there is a thermal gradient between the two parts, which makes it necessary to perform accurate temperature calibrations. The regulation of cuvette temperature is highly simplified through the software. However it requires an appropriate thermometer for calibration adjustments. The calibration procedure is outlined in the Section XIII, paragraphs 13-2. and 13-2.1. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 8 PERISTALTIC PUMP LINEAR ACTUATOR LIQ. LEVEL SENSOR WATER RESERVOIR DILUTER PUMP DILUTER PINCH VALVE WASHER PINCH VALVE READING STATION PVC PANEL WASHER WASHING PISTON DILUTER/WASHER MODULE Figure 6-4 6-4. DILUTER AND WASHER MODULE The upper part of the reading station consists of a PVC panel (Figure 6-4.), which accommodates the following devices: 1) DILUTER: A 470 µl (Full Scale) diluter pump providing the analyzer with high precision, reproducibility, and reliability. The stepper motor and the photo-sensor cable is connected to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) on the rear of the PVC panel. 2) PINCH VALVE: A pinch valve, peristaltic pump and sample needle, which complete the sampling system as described in detail in Section VIII entitled, "Sampling Station". The cuvette washer module positioned in a similar manner to the previous version used on BT 2000/3000. 3) WASHER MODULE: The washer module utilizes a bi-directional, linear actuator-based stepper drive mechanism to provide the washing piston carriage rapid linear movement in up/down directions. The piston has a central bore, three equal openings on the external hemisphere, and a tapered body for improved cleaning, emptying, and drying of the cuvettes. A photo-switch is provided for reset and standby position. The actuator stepper motor and the photo-switch cable connects to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) located to the rear of the PVC panel. These are all managed by the microcontroller µC764. 4) TUBING & CONNECTORS: Most of the in/out fluid tubing has "quick-connect" connectors that incorporate shut-off valves to facilitate the removal of the reading station without liquid spills. 5) WATER RESERVOIR: A water reservoir of 55ml capacity has a transparent porthole and an internal liquid level sensor, which emits yellow light when the fluid reaches the maximum level. The membrane pump located on the rear of the reading station PVC panel refills the reservoir. The washing water from the external water supply tank is aspirated through a transparent tube connected to the rear right side of the analyzer. A filter attached to the transparent tube in the water supply tank and an additional filter on the intake of membrane pump removes undesired corpuscles. In case of liquid level sensor malfunction an emergency overflow tube connected on top of the water reservoir discharges liquid into appropriate container outside the analyzer. The liquid level sensor cable is connected to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01), where the microcontroller (µC 552) monitors the pump through the feedback control with the sensor. 6) PERISTALTIC PUMP: The peristaltic pump is dedicated to supplying the washing water from the water reservoir to the fluidic circuit, which consists of diluter, pinch-valves, sampling tube and the sampling needle. During the washing cycle, the pump dispenses a necessary quantity of water, which flows through diluter, sample tube, sampling needle, and then finally ends up in the funnel for discharging. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 8 6-4.1. DILUTER OPERATING PRINCIPLE PCB 15-05021-01 Photoswitch Input/Output Ports Linear Slide DILUTOR Figure 6-5 Piston Linear Stepping Motor It consists of a ceramic piston driven by a linear stepping motor inside a transparent thermoplastic chamber. It is high-resolution device, which allows fluid displacement of 1/10th of microliter per step. A driver circuit operating in micro steps actuates the stepping motor. The zeroing of the piston is realized through photoswitch and a miniature metallic shield. The electro-mechanical system moves to and fro on a linear bearing slide. The diluter module is connected to the control electronics on the "Master Power Board" P/N 1504209-01 (located on the rear of the reading station) through a 8-pin connector cable. The diluter aspirates and dispenses fluid when the pinch-valve is in the closed position. The washing of the proper fluidic circuit is performed with the pinch-valve in the open position. In the latter case the peristaltic pump on the right of the diluter is activated to supply the washing water from the water reservoir to wash the diluter chamber, tubing, and the sampling needle. The washing water finally ends up in the funnel located on the analyzer deck for discharging. 6-4.2. NEW “NO-PINCH VALVE” (Excerpt from Technical Bulletin No. 9, May 2006) This component also is being installed from June 2006 onwards. The new No-Pinch Valves are maintenance-free and the tubes connected to these valves will not require substitution. However to simplify the in-house processing the current tubing kits have not been modified. The use existing pinch-valve tubing on the new no-pinch valve will simply require cutting it into two pieces of appropriate length. Also the tubing maintenance alert messages (generated by the actual software) should be given consideration only in presence of old pinchvalves. The future software versions of the maintenance program will be modified to distinguish the type of valves (pinch-valves or no-pinch valves) present in the analyzer. A kit consisting of electrically compatible new no-pinch valve is available for substitution on the instruments equipped with previous pinch-valve (will become obsolete after they are out of stock). The new valve kit will be necessary only in case of damaged or defective valve. If however one wants to reduce the instrument maintenance, it is suggested to at least substitute the pinch-valve located below the water reservoir for cuvette washing (see Figure 2). The tubing inserted in this pinch-valve is subject to failure after prolonged inactivity or wear & tear due to high vacuum level of washing procedure. Diluter Water Reservoir NO-PINCH VALVE Figure 6-5A No-Pinch Valve #Diluter P/N 11-05350-01 NOTE: This P/N is also valid for ISE Diluter Section - VI Reading Station No-Pinch Valve #Washer Module P/N 11-05349-01 BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 8 LINEAR ACTUATOR OF THE WASHER LINEAR STEPPING MOTOR OF THE DILUTER MASTER LOGIC BOARD 15-04211-01 MASTER POWER BOARD 15-04209-01 MEMBRANE PUMP FOR THE WATER SUPPLY TO WATER RESERVOIR READING STATION - REAR VIEW Figure 6-6 6-5. ELECTRONICS FOR THE READING STATION SYSTEM The entire electronics of the reading station, excluding the photometer, is integrated in two boards located on the rear of its PVC panel: the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) and the Master Logic Board (15-04211-01). See Figure 6-6. 6-6. MASTER LOGIC BOARD (15-04211-01). This board (Figure 6-6) can be considered the heart of the electronic system. This board accommodates the master microprocessor with a high capacity RAM and EPROM. The bootstrap of the process program for all of the satellite microcontrollers is executed in this RAM. This software is resident in the hard disk and can be modified if needed. Another µC764 is resident on this board and, together with µP552, processes an analog digital signal. Observing the schematic carefully, the µC552 utilizes the UART for communicating with the IBM through the MAX232 (U7) via the RS232. The same µP552 utilizes two analog inputs for reading the temperature of the cuvette plate and the vacuum level of the vacuum pump system. The U8A temperature chip and U8B pressure chip amplify the analog signals of the sensors. The µC764 is dedicated to the control of cuvette plate motor and the linear actuator of the washer module. The U2 chip is a Programmable Array Logic (PAL) device programmed for generating the complex quantity of logic gates used for interfacing the photometer preamplifier with the µP552. The µC764 also uses this gate for connecting to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) described below. The U3 chip is an isolated DC/DC converter, which powers the photometer preamplifier. It regulates +5 Volt DC input voltage into a ±12 Volt DC output voltage. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 8 6-7. MASTER POWER BOARD (15-04209-01) The Main Power Board (Figure 6-6) is the densest board of the analyzer. It accommodates all the devices required to control the stepping motors, valves, etc. for the reading station. However, for practical reasons, another µC764 has been inserted to provide temperature control and regulation for the cuvette plate. The circuit consists of a comparator connected to the temperature sensor, which is inserted into the bottom of the cuvette housing. The U8 comparator output, along with the U5 chip, regulates the switching which generates a variable voltage in the terminals of the Peltier modules. One section of the comparator controls a relay for inverting the polarity when the ambient temperature requires momentary cooling of the cuvettes system. The process just outlined produces a relatively coarse temperature regulation of approximately ±1°C. The fine regulation of ±0.1°C is performed by the software implemented in the µP552. When monitoring the temperature of the sensor, the above-mentioned regulator allows a continuous adjustment of the selected temperature. 6-8. INTERFACE BOARD (15-04270-01) The ISE sampling arm heater, the cuvette motor, Peltier modules of the reading station system and their cooling fans, the Hall sensor, and the temperature sensor are all connected to the Interface Board (Figure 6-2). A bi-color LED indicator is also located on this board to visualize the hot/cold status. NOTE: The Master Logic Board, Master Power Board, Photometer, Halogen Photometric Lamp, Diluter Pump, Peristaltic Pump or any other device on the reading station can be simply accessed through an appropriate cover on the rear panel. This access cover has been designed into the system for facilitating the inspection and maintenance operations. After receiving the information from the central processing unit (IBM), the integrated electronics make the module an independent intelligent peripheral. 6-9. THE 10-CHANNEL PHOTOMETER The Biotecnica 10-channel photometer (Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-7) is a discrete device and has ten channels with interference filters. Each channel has an independent filter, photodiode, and amplifier. The unique optical system provides for simultaneous illumination of all of the channels. The electronics circuit is capable of communicating and acquiring signals from 2 channels for bi-chromatic reading. The 10 amplifiers and as many diodes are visible on the schematic (Figure 6-7). Each amplifier is equipped with a trimmer for gain regulation. The gain adjustment is necessary for adapting the signal level to the manufacturing tolerances of optical components. The two multiplexers, U6 and U7, and their outputs that are connected to the inputs of two A/D converters, U8 and U9, establish the simultaneous selection of two channels. The conversion is serial type. The digital impulses pass through the U10 Gate (74LS132) with Smith trigger function. The two multiplexers are addressed by the µC764 (master logic board) with 4-bit per multiplexer. The electronic circuit of the photometer is powered by ±12 Volts for the analog circuits and +5 Volts for the digital circuits. A 16-conductor flat cable is used for connecting the photometer to the master logic board. The calibration of each channel is performed in reference conditions (usually at the factory). The following requirements must be observed for the calibration procedures: clean and transparent cuvette filled with distilled water, new halogen lamp, and sufficient warm up time. The diagnostic program can be used for verification and any correction, if necessary. Each channel must generate an output signal between 4 Volts and 10 Volts (theoretical). The voltage values are not visible in the diagnostic program, but the integration values are equivalent if the conversion factors are assumed as reference. In practice, the integration values should be between 14,000 and 28,000 points for all of the channels. This range takes into account the tolerances necessary for different lots of lamps and their related exhaustion. In addition an external photodiode acting as Reference Channel (Figure 6-2) has a range (unadjustable) of 3000 to 16000 points. Refer to the diagram of "10-Channel Photodiode Array Photometer" on the next page. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 8 SEMI-REFLECTING MIRRORS LIGHT-BEAM INPUT REFLECTED LIGHT INTERFERENCE FILTERS PHOTODIODE DETECTORS 10-Channel Photodiode Array Photometer Figure 6-7 6-9.1.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PHOTOMETER Optics: Interference Filters: Photodetectors: Electronics: Ten (10) static channels with semireflective mirrors (beam splitters), with a light input angle of 90°. 340, 380, 405, 436, 478, 510, 546, 578, 630nm at a 8nm hbw and 700nm long wavepass. Silicon photodiodes for UV and visible detection 310nm-700nm. In addition a photodiode for reference channel (Figure 6-2). Ten (10) multiplexed amplifiers and A/D conversion with 22-bit resolution. The photodiode of reference channel is embedded in the cuvette drum (Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2. 6-10. FCC PROCEDURE The FCC (Cuvette Correction Factor) function is essential for correcting the optical path of the cuvette, which in any case does not exceed the tolerance of ± 3%. After introducing the potassium bichromate solution in each cuvette and reading the relevant absorbance, the software creates a correction factor for each cuvette based upon average absorbances. As final result one obtains an equivalent response in absorbance better than 99%. The FCC procedure is necessary every time one or more cuvettes are substituted. After the termination of FCC cycle, the analyzer system sets the transmission of all the cuvettes at 100%. Prior to activating the FCC function, prepare reference solution with 4.3 grams of potassium bichromate powder in 1000 ml of H2SO4 0.1 N. Afterwards dilute this solution 1/100 with H2SO4 0.1 N. The absorbance measurement for this product is 400 units at 340nm. The interference filters 340/700nm are used for the test. During the FCC process the system performs: washing, zeroing, introduction of bichromate solution, absorbance readings, and the creation of correction factors. Once the FCC is completed, the system presents simultaneously the absorbance values of all the cuvettes before correction and the percentages of corrections. The program generates a FCC error if one or more cuvettes require a correction of more than 3%. In this case, it is recommended to repeat the FCC procedure to exclude any possibility of other causes. If necessary, substitute the cuvette. Section - VI Reading Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 8 SECTION VII REAGENT SYSTEM 7-1. GENERAL The reagent module system incorporates an appropriately insulated reagent chamber (in aluminum) for reagents refrigeration. The reagent chamber accommodates the rotating reagent plate (divided into sectors) where trays with wedge-shaped reagent bottles are inserted. Each reagent tray (removable) can accommodate 5 large wedge-shaped reagent bottles (50ml or 80ml) snap-fitted with 5 smaller reagent bottles (10ml or 20ml), for a total of 80 reagent bottles. Two large heatsinks with eight (8) Peltier assemblies are affixed to the underside of the reagent module. A cross-flow blower located near the heatsinks, removes the air towards outside. An electronic circuit in feedback with temperature sensor regulates the electronic current of Peltiers and ventilator, thus realizing the temperature monitoring system. A stepping motor driven beltdrive/pulley mechanism provides rotary motion to the reagent plate. The temperature uniformity throughout the reagent chamber is maintained at approximately 12ºC. The temperature inside the reagent chamber is maintained constant up to 26ºC of ambient temperature. Any increase beyond this ambient temperature value will consequently increase the reagent chamber temperature considerably. 7-2. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER - 15-05211-01 (Valid from July 2004 onwards) The board 15-05211-01 is mainly dedicated to the barcode scanner, stepping motor, temperature monitoring, and the reset sensor for the reagent plate. It consists primarily of a µC U3 87LPC767, which controls the actuation of stepper motor connected to the connector J3. The stepping motor provides rotary motion to the reagent plate accommodating reagent trays with reagent bottles. The isolation between the driver A1 (power constituent) and the µC U3 (digital element) is obtained through the optoisolators U4 and U5 (TLP2630). The µC U3 (with gates P1.0 and P1.1) and the integrated circuit U6 control the signals from the barcode module connected to J5. The Hall sensor is connected to the board through J4. The reagent plate resetting occurs when the Hall sensor is face to face with its magnet located in the reagent pulley. The refrigerator temperature control is accomplished through the comparator U7A (MAX492). The voltage present at pin 1 of the comparator reaches the gate P0.4 of U3 and its value corresponding to the reagent plate temperature determines the amount of voltage to be supplied to the Peltier and as well as turning on or off the cross blower fan. The U7B part of the comparator is dedicated to the control of the safety interlock sensor connected to J6. This sensor stops the plate movement when the reagent access cover is opened. The gate P0.7 of µC U3 sends the command bit of optoisolator U8 (TLP521-1). A low logic level of P0.7 determines the simultaneous opening of the MOSFETs Q1 and Q2 (BUZ111S) and the consequent inhibition of the peltier modules of the refrigeration system. The gate P1.6 of U3 controls the high velocity optoisolator U9 (6N136). This optoisolator drives the digital potentiometers PD1 and PD2. The potentiometers through their ohmic variation determine the Peltier supply voltage value. An approximate voltage of 26VDC corresponds to the higher cooling capacity and the approximate voltage of 16VDC corresponds to the lower cooling capacity. The power supply is interfaced through the connector J2. The NTC1 sensor protects the reagent controller module against overheating. The high temperature inside the module (>70ºC) produces a voltage variation on the gate P0.6 of U3. The intervention threshold is fixed at 4.5V. During the alarm condition the Peltier modules are disabled and an alarm message is displayed on the analyzer screen. The gate P0.0 of U3 drives the optoisolator U11 (TLP521-1). The low level logic of P0.0 determines the opening of the transistor Q3 and the power off to the cross blower ventilator. The operating logic turns the cross blower fan ON or OFF when the reagent plate reaches the preset temperature (±0.5º) in the analyzer setup to avoid ice formation in the reagent plate with ambient temperature up to +12ºC (values beyond the operating range). Section - VII Reagent Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 5 The glowing LED (DL5) indicates the activation of cross blower fan. This board, compared to the previous board, has the advantage of functioning also when the analyzer is in the standby mode, without any supply voltage from the IBM. The supply voltage for the µC 767 is realized on board through a DC/DC converter, which is powered by the same source that energizes Peltiers. The temperature sensor is connected to the gate A/D of the 764 for reading the value in ºC. The temperature monitoring system is controlled digitally by regulating nominal 24V in the range of 16V to 28 Volts. Below a certain temperature (approximately 5ºC), it is not possible to further reduce the current of the Peltiers. Therefore to control the temperature, the operation of cross-blower fan is interrupted for the time necessary to reset the selected temperature. The temperature is selected in the instrument setup and the temperature can be set between 5ºC and 15ºC. The set temperature is maintained reagent chamber base to a tolerance of +/-2°C as long as the ambient temperature does not exceed the 26ºC. Beyond 26ºC it is possible to have a considerable increase in the set temperature. If the µC reads a temperature higher than approximately 40ºC, then it interrupts the current to the regulation circuit assuming that there is a problem in the system. For example a defective or damaged fan or an exceptionally high ambient temperature (40ºC) may generate an excessive temperature in the reagent chamber. One can observe in the electrical schematic the NTC near the power connectors. It has the function of heat sensor, which may be produced by false contacts in the connections or some other problems in the printed circuit board. In this case the MOSFET Qx interrupts the Peltier current, when the temperature in the interested zone is approximately 70ºC. 7-3. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER - 15-04313-03 (OBSOLETE - used on Analyzers up to June 2004) This module designed for reagent plate management is housed in an easily removable metallic container. The electronic devices on this board have the following functions: a) Reagent plate drive motor control. b) Zero position sensor control. c) Reagent plate temperature control. d) Barcode reading and interface. This module is located on the rear of the reagent chamber and is easily accessible for service or repair through the small panel on the rear of the analyzer. The Reagents Plate Controller Module (15-04313-03) is controlled by µC87LPC764. This microcontroller manages the stepper motor through two opto-couplers, U3 & U4, which isolates the power driver A1 from the digital circuit. The µC764 receives signals from the barcode module through the U5 chip (Max 232). The reagents chamber temperature is controlled through a U6A comparator and the Q1 transistor. The control temperature is fixed at about 5°C by using the remote control of the power supply (Lambda Alpha 400W). The J2 connector connects the power supply to the controller circuit of the reagent plate. The Q2 transistor functions as a switch to interrupt power supply to the Peltiers through the µC764 (pin 14) whenever requested by the software. The circuit for the control of the Peltier voltages has an additional function of interrupting power to the refrigeration system in case the temperature inside the reagents chamber exceeds 40°C. The circuit, which generates this function, consists of a U6B comparator and an U7 opto-coupler. The Hall sensor (zero position), temperature sensor, and the Peltier modules are all located under the reagent chamber. 7-4. REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM The reagents refrigeration system comprises reagents chamber, refrigeration module with the Peltier modules, conductive spacers, and heat sink, along with the reagent pulley drive assembly. Section - VII Reagent Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 5 Peltier Modules Refrigerator Interface Board Insulation Block Terminals Soldering Details Heat Sink Reagent Refrigeration Module Figure 7-1 7-5. REAGENT & SERUM BARCODES The available codes for sampling procedure are in the memory in blocks of 5 codes. To insert a new block (5 codes) it is important to import data using a floppy disk. The following blocks are available at the present: CODE39, CODE39 FULL ASCII, CODABAR, CODE128 EAN128, CODE93, PLESSEY, PHARMACODE, EAN13 UPCA, UPCE, EAN13 AddON2, EAN8 AddOn2, UPCA AddOn2 UPCE AddOn2, EAN13 AddOn5, EAN8 AddOn5, UPCA AddOn5, UPCE AddOn5 Reagent Barcode The main objective of the reagent bottle barcode is the positive identification of the bottle to avoid position error. However the barcode can be used only with specific labels produced by the manufacturer of the reagents. The installation of the instrument can be configured in the following three different modes of operation, in agreement between the manufacturer of the analyzer, the reagent supplier and the client: 1) 2) 3) Use of reagent bottles without barcode, independent use. Use of reagent bottles with barcode (analysis code), only for positive identification of the bottle. Use of reagent bottles with complex barcode, use of reagents bound by purchasing agreement. This mode allows for a barcode with customized reading key. The instrument doesn't accept bottles having unknown and incoherent barcode symbols, thus preventing the execution of the tests. The applied algorithm provides for the analysis code, serial number, type of bottle and the date of expiry of content. The improper modification of any one of these parameters invalidates its applicability. There is also a built-in prevention against refilling of previously identified bottle. NOTE: Exclusively the Director General of the company manufacturing the analyzer releases additional informations. Section - VII Reagent Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 5 Detent Mechanism Reagents Tray Reagent Chamber Motor Plate Timing Belt Drive Motor Reagent Pulley Barcode Module Temp. Sensor Hall Sensor Peltier Module Heat Sink Conductive Spacer Cross-Flow Blower Refrigerator Interface Board REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW Figure 7-2 REAGENT MOTOR CONNECTOR REAGENT MOTOR WHITE-BLU BLUE WHITE-RED RED REAGENTS DRIVE MOTOR Figure 7-3 Section - VII Reagent Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 5 Power Supply Reagent Temperature Peltiers, Air Blower I2CBUS Reagent Hall Sensor Reagent Barcode AUX Reagent Motor REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE Figure 7-4 Section - VII Reagent Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 5 SECTION - VIII SAMPLING STATION 8-1. GENERAL The removable sample plate is protected by a transparent dust cover with various apertures for the sampling needle entry during operation. The sample plate can be placed in any position because the home position will automatically be recognized once the reset has been activated. The primary tubes can be inserted without removing the plate. Place the tube in the position indicated by the flashing red LED. An optical sensor will differentiate the primary tubes from the cups used for the samples. A barcode reader automatically identifies the position and the data concerning the sample. The two sampling arms are located on the right side of the analyzer deck. On each sampling arm the stepper motor belt driven mechanism causes the needle to move in up and down linear motion. Another stepper motor drive a belt driven pulley mechanism which swivels the sampling arm to the right or left positions across the deck to position the sampling needle for the aspiration and dispensing procedures. The left sampling arm can position the sampling needle for aspiration, dispensing, and mixing on the reagent chamber, serum plate, reaction cuvettes, the wash funnel, and the "home" position. The right sampling arm can position the sampling needle on the sample tubes of serum plate, ISE reagent bottles, ISE funnel, and the wash funnel and the "home". It also positions the sample needle over reaction cuvettes for aspiration, dispensing, or mixing. Both arms have a built-in facility for the pre-heating reagents through special heating tube. They also have the capability to measurement of the remaining reagent volume in the bottles through a built-in liquid level sensor through an Arm Liquid Sensor Emitter (15-05023-01). All other devices, including, the diluter, peristaltic pumps, pinch valves, serum plate drive motor, sample arm drive motors, liquid temperature control circuits, and the electronics, are housed inside the analyzer. The stepper motor for the angular motion of the arm, can generate high frequency oscillations for mixing. The rapid angular movements providing efficient high frequency oscillations of the sampling needle, which when immersed in the cuvette can mix the dispensed fluids. The entire module is an intelligent peripheral slave, which autonomously performs the sampling procedures after receiving information from the Master Logic Board. Sensor LED Sample Needle SAMPLING ARM WITH HEATER Figure 8-1 8-2. SAMPLING ARM MODULE The sampling arm module is an electro-mechanical system for provides the sampling needle with vertical (up/down) and angular (swiveling) motion. The Arm Controller Board (15-04765-01) containing a micro-controller for actuating the stepper motor and is located on the lower section of this module, near the vertical drive mechanism. The liquid sensor circuit is located inside the needle head. Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 7 8-2.1. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04765-01) The arm controller board is the basic circuit for controlling arm movement. The µC764 controls the power to the A & B dual-driver for the sampling arm up/down & swivel motions through the optocoupled gates. The "home" or zero position of the sampling arm is realized through a photo-switch and shutter on the base of the motorized shaft mechanism. An additional sensor module is located at the upper section of the drive mechanism. ISE Arm (Right) Sampling Arm (Left) SAMPLING ARM MODULE Figure 8-2 Setscrews LED Arm Head Controller Board 15-04765-01/02 Needle Timing Belts SAMPLING ARM (FRONT) SAMPLING ARM (REAR) Figure 8-3 Figure 8-4 Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 7 8-2.2. ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER BOARD (15-05023-01) It is a microcontroller 764 based small electronic circuit board located inside the arm head. The 8Mhz oscillator of µC764 is used for realizing amplitude modulation of signal transmitted from needle. The variation of amplitude generated by the needle contacting liquid is controlled and converted by the µC764 in a chain of 40Khz impulses through infrared LED and simultaneously the red Led indicator at the underside of the arm head provides visual repetition of the infrared LED. The circuit is powered by the 5 Volt generated by a low-dropout linear regulator, which obtains the voltage from the downstream of supply line coming from the reading station. No calibration is required for this circuit. 8-2.3. ISE SAMPLING ARM MODULE The ISE sampling arm module is identical to the preceding sampling arm description. It consists of a drive mechanism, stepper motors for the angular and up/down motions, the Arm Liquid Sensor & Emitter Board (15-05023-01), ISE electronics, and arm controller board. Refer to Figure 8-2 entitled "Sampling Arm Module", for the technical information. 8-3. THE SERUM MODULE The serum module is made up of the stepper motor drive mechanisms for serum plate movement, electronics, primary tube sensor with electronics, ISE sensor and electronics, and the Serum Plate Controller Board (15-04422-01). The new design of the serum module integrates the entire sampling system into a single module with the following features: a) Autonomous testing of the module before incorporating into the analyzer b) Compact hydraulic circuit providing stabilized flow efficiency c) Hydraulic circuit hidden from view for safety d) Technical assistance facilitated by the ability to substitute components with other tested sampling modules 8-3.1. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLERS The serum plate controllers are a group of various electronic circuits applied to the removable sampling module. The main controller circuit is housed in a metallic container located near the serum chamber. The additional circuits are firmly secured to the rim of the serum chamber. These electronic circuits perform the following functions: a) Control of the serum plate stepper motor b) Acquisition and management of the barcode data of the serum plate c) Control of the Hall sensor for "home" or zero position d) Control of sensors detecting primary tube sensor presence 8-3.2. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04422-01) This board housed in a metallic container accommodates the µC764, which controls the serum stepper motor through the U4 and U5 opto-couplers, and the A1 driver. The barcode data is acquired and processed through the U3 MAX232 chip. The module receives the data from the Hall sensor at the zero position, connected to J2, as well as the signals from primary tube sensors incorporated in their independent circuits located on the left and right of the serum chamber. Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 7 SERUM PULLEY SERUM CHAMBER PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (LEFT) BASE PLATE WASHING FUNNEL WASHING FUNNEL DRIVE BELT HALL SENSOR SERUM MOTOR BARCODE MODULE PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (RIGHT) SERUM MODULE - TOP VIEW SERUM CHAMBER BALL - BEARING HEAD BASE PLATE SERUM PULLEY SERUM MOTOR SERUM MODULE - FRONT VIEW SERUM MODULE Figure 8-5 8-3.3. LEFT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04280-01) This supplementary circuit is located on the left of the serum chamber. It accommodates a noninvasive infrared detector housed in a PVC body, for the detection of the primary tube. This circuit board is connected to the Serum Plate Controller Board (15-04422-01) through the J1 connector, passing through the another supplementary circuit board on the right. Close by, there is a Hall sensor module connected to the Serum Hall Sensor Board (15-04282-01) on the serum plate, which is connected by the J2 connector, to the Serum Primary Tube Sensor Board (1504280-01). The Hall sensor uses the Smith trigger, while the primary tube sensor uses the U2A-B amplifier in the A.C mode. The emitter LED EM1 is impulse-driven through the U1C oscillator. Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 7 8-3.4. RIGHT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04278-01) This supplementary circuit is located on the right of the serum chamber. This circuit is identical to the one outlined in the preceding paragraph, but without the control for the Hall sensor. For operating characteristics, refer to the preceding paragraph. The J2 connector attaches to the identical board on the left. The J1 connector interconnects these two identical boards through a flat cable to the Serum Plate Controller Board (15-04422-01). BOARD 15-04422-01 I2C BUS SERUM BAR-CODE I2CBUS SERUM MOTOR VACUTAINER SERUM "R" 8-4. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER MODULE Figure 8-6 BARCODE SCANNER This is a high quality laser scanning & CCD module (Figures 8-5, & 8-7). It is connected to the "Serum Plate Controller Module" through the serial port. It can automatically read 6 different types of codes. It is also possible to reprogram the scanning modules with additional codes during installation. Bt 3000 PLUS has barcode scanning modules for the reagent module and the serum module. Important Notice: Any modification to the Variable Serial Protocol (refer to paragraph 4-6. "Variable Serial Protocol" in Section IV) is restricted to qualified personnel only. The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. guaranties the correct performance of the internal serial protocol. The responsibility for any malfunction arising out of any modifications to the scripts of the Variable Serial Protocol rests with the customer. WARNING This information regards the setting up of the barcode for sample tubes identification. The reading of the sample barcode label has the same progression as patient code. For example: Once a patient code of 15 characters has been entered, then a code of 8 characters followed by 7 empty spaces to reach the 15 characters is sent. The code read on the barcode label must have the same sequence 8 + 7 for correct detection. 8-5. SERUM & REAGENT BARCODES The available codes for sampling procedure are in the memory in blocks of 5 codes. To insert a new block (5 codes) it is important to import data using a floppy disk. The following blocks are available at the present: CODE39, CODE39 FULL ASCII, CODABAR, CODE128 EAN128, CODE93, PLESSEY, PHARMACODE, EAN13 UPCA, UPCE, EAN13 AddON2, EAN8 AddOn2, UPCA AddOn2 UPCE AddOn2, EAN13 AddOn5, EAN8 AddOn5, UPCA AddOn5, UPCE AddOn5 Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 7 Reagent Barcode The main objective of the reagent bottle barcode is the positive identification of the bottle to avoid position error. However the barcode can be used only with specific labels produced by the manufacturer of the reagents. The installation of the instrument can be configured in the following three different modes of operation, in agreement between the manufacturer of the analyzer, the reagent supplier and the client: 1) Use of reagent bottles without barcode, independent use. 2) Use of reagent bottles with barcode (analysis code), only for positive identification of the bottle. 3) Use of reagent bottles with complex barcode, use of reagents bound by purchasing agreement. This mode allows for a barcode with customized reading key. The instrument doesn't accept bottles having unknown and incoherent barcode symbols, thus preventing the execution of the tests. The applied algorithm provides for the analysis code, serial number, type of bottle and the date of expiry of content. The improper modification of any one of these parameters invalidates its applicability. There is also a built-in prevention against refilling of previously identified bottle. NOTE: Exclusively the Director General of the company manufacturing the analyzer releases additional informations. Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 7 SERUM PLATE MAGNET AND HALL SENSOR WASHING FUNNEL PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR RIGHT WASHING FUNNEL SERUM CHAMBER PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR LEFT HALL EFFECT SENSOR SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER MODULE SERUM PULLEY BARCODE MODULE SERUM MOTOR SERUM MODULE - EXPLODED VIEW Figure 8-7 Section - VIII Sampling Station BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 7 SECTION - IX ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODES (ISE) MODULE 9-1. GENERAL The ISE module, located on the right side of the analyzer, is used for the determination of electrolytes, in human serum and urine. The analysis method is based on the Ion Selective Electrodes (ISE) technology as the electrodes respond to the ions of the molecules respectively in conformance with the following equation of NERNST: E = E0 + RT/Nf log aM+ The BT3000 PLUS processes the electrolytes independently from the clinical chemistry. In fact, the module has dedicated devices like a sampling arm, diluter, and a hydraulic circuit. The specific operation method is outlined below. A sample of serum or urine is aspirated and diluted with buffer solution in the ratio of 1/14 and then dispensed in the mixing funnel. A peristaltic pump, positioned downstream of the electrodes, aspirates the solution until the bubble sensor detects an air segment, which indicates the final part of the solution. The diluted sample remains in the electrodes for a short period of incubation and is read for four seconds. Afterwards the reference solution is dispensed into the mixing bowl and follows the preceding routine. The values of baseline potentials are subtracted from the sample values for zeroing any eventual drift. The system is calibrated using two standards of known values to obtain a slope. The reference (REF) and buffer solutions (BUF) are concentrated and are diluted automatically with distilled water in a 1/10 ratio during the sampling phase. A second arm identical to that utilized on the Sampling Module, is used for the sampling of the electrolytes (refer to paragraph 2-4.2.). The elaboration of the data can also be performed in an independent way. The ISE Sampling Arm is located to the right of the Serum Module so that the aspiration needle can easily draw the Sera, the Standards & the Controls in the serum plate. The needle also aspirates the cleaning solution, the Pepsin, Buffer, and the Baseline from the appropriate bottles and funnels of the ISE Module. The ISE module accommodates the ISE electrodes, electronics, hydraulic circuit, ISE mixing funnel, bubble sensor, and the pinch valve. The highly integrated single module solution provides a very compact physical design. The remaining hydraulic circuit is located nearby on the right side and includes two pinch valves, diluter pump, and two peristaltic pumps driven by a DC motor and a stepping motor. During instrument operations, the ISE module is out of the view under the cover of the analyzer. However, it can be raised upward and removed by disconnecting the peristaltic pump tube, for inspection or maintenance by the operator or service personnel. This module can be easily be accessed by lifting the little cover on the right side of the analyzer. The location of the ISE funnel directly over the electrodes minimizes carryover and residual bubble interference. The ISE controller board is an intelligent peripheral device. It receives information from the master processor, and using the program resident in its slave processor all the operations relevant to the ISE module are performed. 9-2. SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE ISE MODULE For the following subassemblies, refer to Figure 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 & 9-4 on the preceding pages. 1) ISE controller board 15-04320-01 2) ISE preamplifier board 15-04440-01 3) ISE interface board 15--04503-01 4) Diluter pump module 5) Peristaltic water pump 6) Waste peristaltic pump 7) ISE pinch valve 8) Diluter pinch valve 9) Bubble sensor 10) ISE mixing funnel 11) Saline solution container (BSS) 12) Buffer solution container (BUF) 13) Reference solution container (RES) 14) Enzyme (Pepsin) solution container (ENZ) 15) Washing Solution container (WAS) Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 8 Bubble Sensor Mixing Funnel Tube Guide Potassium Electrode Controller Board Sodium Electrode Pinch Valve Chloride Electrode Preamplifier Reference Electrode Vertical Track Rail Ground Electrode Ise Interface Board Bypass or CO2 Electrode ISE MODULE ARRANGEMENT - FRONT VIEW Figure 9-1. Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 8 Bubble Sensor Electrodes Cover ISE Pinch Valve REAGENTS HOLDER Diluitor Saline Solution Container Buffer Container Baseline Container Pepsin Container Washing Solution Container ISE Module - View "A" Figure 9-2 Mixing Funnel Peristaltic Pump ISE Waste Peristaltic Pump for Washing Pinch Valve Dilutor ISE Module - View "B" Figure 9-3 Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 8 Electrodes: BY-PASS or CO2 (Optional) GROUND Electrode FRONT VIEW ISE Module Electrodes location Figure 9-4 Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 8 The ISE controller module is a group of electronic devices for the operation of ISE module. The controller module consists of a metallic container divided in two parts (fixed supporting bracket integral with analyzer base having two rail tracks and the mobile part with electrodes and electronics). The mobile part is removable for routine maintenance and servicing by technical personnel. The electronic circuit of the ISE module consists mainly of a high impedance preamplifier for the electrodes, an analog-to-digital converter, and a µC767 for data processing. A µC764 is also mounted on the same circuit and is dedicated to the control of diluter pump, photo-switch, and the diluter pinch valve. The separate control of the diluter pump group allows the same diluter pump to be used as required for serum sampling and diluting. 9-2.1. ISE PREAMPLIFIER BOARD (15-04440-01) This ISE preamplifier board is inside a module affixed to the right side of the electrodes and is connected to the ISE Controller Board through a connector. Three dual-chips (two chips in a single housing) are mounted on this board. Each chip of the dual-chip is an electrometer and is connected to the appropriate electrode through a unity-gain as shown on the schematic. On the same schematic, besides the terminals for the ISE electrodes, there is a terminal for connecting the ground electrode at reference voltage of 2.5 Volts called the virtual ground. The preamplifier is powered by a DC/DC ±5 Volt mini-converter located on the controller board. 9-2.2. ISE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04320-01) The controller board is connected to the ISE Interface Board (15-04503-01) at the bottom through an Euro Connector. When the ISE module is raised for maintenance or service, it is disconnected electrically from the ISE Interface Board. However, it is possible to use an extension cable to activate the module for any functional test that is required. A 7714 chip Analog/Digital converter is located on the controller board. This is a special A/D converter with filter and amplification functions that are programmable through the micro-controller. This chip filters and amplifies the analog signals after acquiring them from the preamplifier. It has 24-bit of resolution and can convert weak signals into highly stabile and precision signals. The A/D converter is controlled by µC767 (U11). The µC767 (U11), utilizing opto-electronic gates (section B of the Motors Driver 15-04408-01), drives the stepper motor of the ISE peristaltic pump. Other devices controlled by the microcontroller are the J4 bubble sensor, the U12 temperature sensor, and the ISE pinch valve. The temperature sensor is used for monitoring the ambient temperature near the electrodes. If there is an excessive variation of temperature during the test run, a prompt is generated to repeat calibration. The second µC764 (U2) controls as follows: the diluter system using the section A of the driver A1, the reset photo-switch, and the pinch valve of the diluter. The opto-isolated gates that separate the digital section from the power section are also visible on the schematic. The following external devices are connected to the ISE module through the ISE interface board located underneath the module: diluter pump, peristaltic pump, and the pinch valve. The bubble sensor uses an opto-isolated device as a sensing element. The translucent plastic tube from the ISE mixing funnel passes through the appropriate channel in the bubble-sensor. The variations of signals produced by presence or absence of liquid is detected by the µC 767, which through an appropriate software algorithm signals the presence of bubble. 9-3. COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS The question and answer list below can assist regarding routine system operation, maintenance and the appropriate answers with relevant technical procedures. Exercise extreme care to ensure that the system is regularly provided with properly maintained and care should be taken to avoid any problems and malfunctions. Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 8 COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS Questions Answers Should the samples be manually diluted? Can I test urine samples automatically and together with serum? Which parameters should be set on the analyzer? Should I calibrate the analyzer everyday? Can the analyzer unattended? Do the easily? reagents Can I reagents? How do standards? operate deteriorate substitute I maintain similar the No. The analyzer performs the dilution automatically. Yes. It is not necessary to pre dilute the urine sample, use the same calibration procedure as for serum. Initially set the date, hour, and the desired measurement units. Only the concentration values of standards when the lot has changed. Yes. The calibration is valid for approximately 4 hours and the analyzer will prompt the to recalibrate as required. Yes. The analyzer can operate incessantly without problems. No. Care should only be given to the Buffer when using the CO2 electrode. It is recommended to close the buffer container at the end of use to prolong the life. Overexposure to air by the Buffer will diminish the CO2 slope. No. The ISE reagents are very specific and substituting may affect the precision of the analyzer, as well as the integrity of electrodes. Close them immediately after the use. Do not contaminate them! The accuracy of the samples is dependent upon the quality of the standards. Do not expose them to the sources of strong light and the heat. Can the analyzer suddenly not produce an ISE result? Yes, when the reagents are finished. What has happened if all test values are high? Samples may have exposed to air for more than half an hour on the sample plate or a calibration was performed with a contaminated standard. Why is the Cl and CO2 electrode slopes represented in negative numbers? What happened if the Na & K slopes are negative and the Cl & CO2 slopes are positive? Is it normal for the analyzer to alert the user with messages like: Reagent Empty, Blocked Pump, Air in Sample, etc.? Can the hydraulic circuit occlude completely? Can the Ground Electrode influence the quality of results? Section - IX The potentials of the Cl and CO2 electrodes are inversely proportional to the concentration. The two standards were placed in the inverted positions on the sample (serum) plate. Occasionally It is acceptable. If the system detects a transiting air bubble in the hydraulic circuit. Certainly a momentary stop is preferable than an erroneous result. It is important to perform a prime after replacing exhausted reagent so that the hydraulic circuit is completely filled up with fluid. This reduces the possibility of a bubble formation to minimum. If maintained properly, the hydraulic system will flow continuously. If an obstruction should occur, clean the chloride electrode, with the appropriate tool, first before attempting to clean any other electrode. In case the problem persists then replace all the fluidic tubes with a new tubing kit. Yes. Even a partial occlusion in the ground electrode hydraulics may affect all the channels. ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 8 COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS (contd.) Which actions are necessary prior to turning off the analyzer? What are the consequences of incorrect maintenance? 9-4. If the analyzer is not to be used for a long period, it is essential to disconnect all the tubes and leave the electrodes disengaged in their lodgings. The tubes of peristaltic pumps should be released from their supporting brackets and manually manipulated externally to restore roundness and to avoid sticking. When the analyzer is going to be used again then reconnect all the disconnected tubes and recalibrate the analyzer at least twice. Use new Buffer solution. Apart from generating erroneous results, it may cause irreparable damage to the electrodes. Use of incorrect fluids for cleaning the system may also cause serious damage to the analyzer. For general cleaning in extreme circumstances of the ISE funnel, electrodes, ground electrode, fluidic tubes, etc. use distilled water and a syringe. ISE TROUBLE-SHOOTING BT3000 PLUS (Quick Reference Guide to resolve main problems in ISE Module) SYMPTOMS Bubbles in ISE Module CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Calibration Error. High values of slope K > 60, Na > 68 and unstable values. Calibration Error Slope values at the limit of acceptance. Inexact values in samples and slopes. 1) 2) 1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3) 4) 1) Drift of values 2) 3) No prime performed after maintenance/service of the module. Perform prime. The solution is not aspirated, consequently it remains in the funnel. Obstruction in the Cl and CO2 electrodes column. Remove obstruction by observing appropriate cleaning procedure. Worn peristaltic pump cartridge. Replace with new cartridge. Funnel obstructed. Clean funnel. Tubing sticking together in pinch-valve. Repair or replace. Partially occluded Cl electrode. Clean electrode with appropriate tool. A small obstruction in the Ground electrode. Clean electrode. Reagent solutions not homogenized during refill. Use homogenized solution for refilling. Dirty funnel. Clean the funnel. New electrodes still in the conditioning phase. Erroneous STD solutions. Use correct solutions. Inversion of Baseline with Buffer. Position correctly Baseline and Buffer. Empty Reference electrode. Pinch-valve tube problem. Repair or replace. Use of contaminated distilled water of the analyzer. Use non-contaminated distilled water. Module just reconditioned. Repeat calibration 3 or 4 times. Deteriorated Reference Electrode. Verify and replace. The deproteinization of the electrode column has not been performed. Lack of washing at end of work. Observe appropriate washing procedure. NOTE: If the problem is still not resolved after all the preceding steps, then substitute the preamplifier or the entire ISE Module to resolve the problem. Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 8 Bubble Sensor Mixing Funnel ISE Pinch Valve Electrodes Cover Peristaltic Pump ISE Waste Peristaltic Pump for Washing Diluter No-Pinch Valve Diluter (Substitute for Pinch-Valve) REAGENTS HOLDER Saline Solution Container Buffer Container Baseline Container Pepsin Container Washing Solution Container ISE Module with No-Pinch Valve Figure 9-5 Section - IX ISE Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 8 SECTION - X COMPUTER BOX ASSEMBLY Touchscreen LCD Display Module Cabinet Fan Serial Board External Monitor PS/2 Ports for Keyboard & Mouse, USB Ports Power Supply Asus Mainboard ON/OFF Switch Floppy Disk DVD ROM Player Hard Disk COMPUTER BOX FIGURE 10-1 TOUCHSCREEN LCD DISPLAY CASING COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD FIGURE 10-2 DVD-ROM PLAYER FLOPPY DISK SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD HARD DISK FAN Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 7 10-1. ELECTRONICS MODULE 10-1.1. COMPUTER BOX The LCD Display module (Figure 10-1), with fully integrated touch-screen, is on the front of the computer box. An on/off switch for the analyzer is located on the bottom left of the display. The peripherals, DVD/CD-ROM player and the floppy disk drive are accessed through a cover just below the display. All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as follows: Parallel port, USB ports, Serial-ports and PS/2 ports for keyboard & mouse. The ASUS main-board with a 2.4 GHZ, Intel Pentium® IV processor, 128 Mb RAM, DVD/CD-ROM player, 20 GB (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply are all located inside the computer box. Product enhancement resulting from new innovations in technology and from our continuing quality improvement effort may necessitate changes in this configuration in the future. However, any eventual changes will be fully compatible with the previous version. A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5 Volt supply interconnects the computer box and the process electronics. 10-1.2. MAINBOARD CONNECTORS PS/2 mouse connector (green) 6-pin. PS/2 keyboard connector (purple) 6-pin. Universal Serial Bus (USB) for Data Bus 1 & 2 (black) 2X4 pins. 2 Serial Ports Connector (turquoise green) com1 = 9-pins & com2 = 9-pins. Parallel Port Connector (purple red) 25-pins Printer. Automatic turning off of the fan: during this process, the power supply to the fan will automatically switch to a standby mode. This function reduces both the energy consumption and disturbances in the system, and this is an important feature in implementing a silent system. 10-1.2.1. COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD The Computer Box consists of a LCD display monitor incorporating touchscreen. The system power on/off switch is located to the left of the monitor. The DVD-ROM and the Floppy-Disk access door is located below the monitor. All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as follows: Parallel port for the printer, Serial-ports, USB ports, PS/2 ports for keyboard & mouse, CRT port, LAN ports, and Audio port. The following components are located inside the Computer Box: Mainboard with 1.6 GHz Intel Pentium® Mobile (or more) processor, 256 MB (or more) RAM, DVD/CD-ROM player, 40 GB (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply. This configuration is subject to variation because of continuous technological evolutions. A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply interconnects the computer box and the process electronics. The Figure 10-2 shows the entire computer box assembly. 10-1.3. LCD MODULE 8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTANCE TOUCH-SCREEN The touch-screen interface enables functional operation of the program without the use of an external keyboard or mouse. The LCD module has a protective surface to prevent damage during data input or other operations. Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 7 10-1.3.1. TOUCH-SCREEN DRIVER INSTALLATION The following procedure outlines the installation steps for the Touch screen driver along with Controller model SC801U Microtouch: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) Connect the touch-screen for initiating the installation. Insert the setup CD 30-05325-01 to install the software. Select the type of installation as Custom. Click to enable TOUCH MONITOR. Click to enable CALIBRATION TOOL. Click to deselect EX II SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT. Click to deselect EX II SERIAL TOUCHPEN TOUCHS SCREEN SUPPORT. Deselect SC SERIES SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT. Deselect IST SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT RESTART From the start menu go to: START➨ SETTING ➨CONTROL PANEL ➨ SYSTEM ➨ HARDWARE ➨ DEVICES MANAGER ➨ double click MICE AND OTHER POINTING DEVICES ➨ double click HID-compliant mouse ➨ DRIVER ➨ UPDATE DRIVER ➨ NEXT ➨ SEARCH FOR A SUITABLE DRIVERS ➨NEXT ➨ click to select SPECIFY A LOCATION ➨ NEXT ➨ path C:\ PROGRAM FILES\MICROTOUCH\MT 7 ➨ OPEN ➨ OK ➨ NEXT ➨ FINISH ➨ CLOSE ➨ Close all windows ➨ RESTART. 10-1.3.2. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for a computer's hard-drive. 10-1.4. POWER SUPPLY MODULE Input Voltage Range - Electrical Specifications PARAMETER MIN. NOM. MAX UNIT V-input Range 95 115/230 245 V-rms Output Voltage Range - Electrical Specifications Output Nominal Voltage Value Regulation Ripple & Noise 1 +3.3V ± 5% 2 +5V 3 Output Current Min. Max. 50mV 0.3A 16A ± 5% 50mV 2.0A 25A +12V ± 5% 120mV 0.2A 13A 4 -5V ± 5% 100mV 0A 0.3A 5 -12V ± 5% 120mV 0A 0.8A 6 +5VSB ± 5% 100mV 0A 2A Note: The Connector meets ATX standard specifications. Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 7 Peak 16A 10-1.5. MAINBOARD LAYOUT CONTENTS PS/2 T: Mouse B: Keyboard VIO USB1 USB2 LED DIMM Socket 4 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module) VIA VT82C694X Chipset USB_PWR0 LINE OUT DIMM Socket 3 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module) JTPWR DIMM Socket 2 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module) ATX Power Connector Socket 370 COM 2 DIP Switches DIP_SW LINE IN CPU_FAN MIC IN PWR_FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AUX FLOPPY Accelerated Graphics Port TUV4X PCI 1 CD1 Secondary IDE 0 Primary IDE GAME_AUDIO DIMM Socket 1 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module) PARALLEL PORT COM 1 MODEM PCI 2 VIA VT82C686A Chipset PCI 3 USBPORT Flash EEPROM (Programmable BIOS) MIC2 C-MEDIA CMI8738 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power PCI 4 USBPWR1 CLRTC SMB PCI 5 ASUS ASIC WOR With Hardware Monitor CHA_FAN WOL_CON Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service JEN Page 4 of 7 External Connectors 1 PS2KBMS PS/2 Mouse Port Connector (6-pin female) 2 PS2KBMS PS/2 Keyboard Port Connector (6-pin female) 3 USB Universal Serial Bus Connectors 1&2 (two 4-pin female) 4 PRINTER Parallel Port Connector (25-pin female) 5 COM1/COM2 Serial Port Connectors (two 9-pin/10-1 pin male) 6 GAME/AUDIO Game/MIDI Connector (15-pin female) 7 AUDIO Audio Connectors (three 1/8" jacks) Internal Connectors 1 IDELED IDE Activity LED (2-pin) 2 FLOPPY Floppy Disk Drive Port Connector (34-1 pin) 3 PRIMARY IDE IDE Connectors (Two 40-1 pin) SECONDARY IDE 4 WOL/CON Wake-On-LAN Connector (3-pin) 5 WOR Wake-ON-Ring Connector (2-pin) 6 CPU/PWR/CHA/FAN Chassis and CPU Fan Connectors (3-pin) 7 CHASSIS Chassis Intrusion Lead (4-1 pin) 8 SMB SM Bus Connector (5-1 pin) 9 IR Infrared Module Connector (5-1 pin) 10 USBPORT USB Header (10-1 pin) 11 ATXPWR ATX Power Supply Connector (20-pin) 12 AFPANEL ASUS Panel Connector (12-1 pin) 13 MIC2 Internal Microphone Connector (3-pin) 14 CD/AUX/MODEM Internal Audio Connectors (three 3-pin) 15 PWR. LED (PANEL) System Power LED Lead (3-pin) 16 SPEAKER (PANEL) System Warning Speaker Connector (4-pin) 17 MSG. LED (PANEL) System Message LED (2-pin) 18 SMI (PANEL) System Management Interrupt Lead (2-pin) 19 PWR. SW (PANEL) ATX/Soft-Off Switch Lead (2-pin) 20 RESET (PANEL) Reset Switch Lead (2 pin) Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 7 10-1.6. INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD FIGURE 10-3 LAYOUT INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD CONNECTORS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 PCI1 J1 J2 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 USB1 USB2 AUDIO1 IDE1 IDE2 J7 J8 VGA1 LPT1 KB1 MS1 FDD1 PW1 EPCI1 Section - X Computer Module PCI CONNECTOR LAN 10/100 LAN GIGA SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT USB PORT USB PORT AUDIO CONNECTOR 40 PIN EIDE1 CONNECTOR 44PIN EIDE2 CONNECTOR INVERTER CONNECTOR LVDS CONNECTOR CRT CONNECTOR PARALLEL PORT KEYBOARD CONNECTOR MOUSE CONNECTOR FLOPPY CONNECTOR ATX CONNECTOR EPCI CONNECTOR BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 7 10-1.7. NEW COMPUTER BOX, VARIATIONS & OPTIONS (Excerpt from Technical Bulletin No. 9, May 2006) Over the years, the Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A., has followed and adapted to its instrumentation new technological evolutions in electronics as per opportunities offered by the market. However, the continuous and unforeseeable hardware variations by the suppliers has compelled Biotecnica instruments to acquire and supply only those products which have guaranteed availability on the market for at least 3 - 4 years. Industrial technology conceived for long-term stability and availability has been introduced on all the Biotecnica analyzers from May 2006 onwards. It is reminded that our technical department had announced this transition to the industrial technology in its Technical Bulletin No.8 issued on March 22, 2006. NOTE: Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. informs that the obsolete items (ASUS mainboard, Display panel) will be available for at least 6 months or until these products are out of stock. MODIFICATIONS: Two components have undergone significant modifications: The Display panel and the IBM compatible Mainboard. DISPLAY: The previous model was based on TTL technology. The new display is based on the LVDS technology. TOUCH-SCREEN: It became necessary to substitute this device with a new model compatible with the new board. MAIN BOARD: The previous ASUS or MSI were mass consumer products, instead the new mainboard is ® industrial type, which accommodates the recent Intel Pentium Mobile 1.6Mhz microprocessor. This mainboard has all peripherals onboard with the added advantage of not utilizing devices inserted into slots. In addition there is also a LAN port. The availability without any modification of this new hardware packet is guaranteed for minimum period of 3 years in accordance with our suppliers. See Figure 1 below. IMPORTANT NOTICE: An “Access Violation” may be generated in some parts of the previous software versions due to incompatibility of the new Intel Pentium® Mobile microprocessor installed on the industrial mainboard. Therefore it is highly recommended to utilize software versions 9.4:xx.v/68 or higher. FULL OR PARTIAL SUBSTITUTION OF PARTS IN THE COMPUTER BOX The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. can guarantee the service and the supply of obsolete spare parts for a limited period, as already mentioned for a minimum period of 6 months or until the products are out of stock. After this period or when the products are out of stock, in case of any substitution on older instrument equipped with commercial board and TTL display, it will be necessary to substitute all the devices. In this case it will be convenient to substitute completely with new computer box or a dedicated kit. NOTE: It is necessary to format the hard-disk (consequent loss of all existing data) after substitution of the ASUS or MSI mainboard with the new industrial mainboard. It is highly recommended to backup all data on the hard disk prior to the modification. After this period or when the products are out of stock, in case of any substitution on older instrument equipped with commercial board and TTL display, it will be necessary to substitute all the devices. In this case it will be convenient to substitute completely with new computer box or a dedicated kit. Biotecnica’s technical staff will provide you with additional information and assist you in specifying the correct materials and configurations for your applications as you request. MAINBOARD ASSY FIGURE 10-4 Section - X Computer Module BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 7 SECTION - XI POWER SUPPLY AC/DC MODULE 11-1. POWER SUPPLY Lambda CA400 Series Alpha power supply AC/DC: Universal Input voltage range: Frequency: 12MIN, 24D, 24DRP 100 to 240 ~ 50 Hz to 60 Hz Modular configurable single and multiple outputs: CONFIGURED OUTPUT VOLTAGES Output Voltages (preset) Adjustment Range Output Current 12 Volts 12 Volts 8A 24 Volts 24 Volts 8A 24 Volts 18-29 Volts 8A adjustable 11-1.1. EMC DIRECTIVE APPLICATION TO THE POWER SUPPLIES The EMC directive does not apply to power supplies component. It is impossible for the manufacturer of the power supply unit to guarantee conformity of the final product to this EMC directive. The EMC behavior of the power supply can be considerably affected by the way it is installed in the users system. However, since the power supply is a major component in the performance of the final product, in regards to this Directive, it is indispensable that the power supply manufacturer ensures that the power supply enables the end user to conform to the EMC Directive in the most effective manner. 11-1.2. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION (PFC) Certain applications have a legal requirement for harmonic reduction, as found with invitro diagnostic devices. Power Factor Correction provides the advantage of wide range input, and maximizes the load that can be taken from the main power sources. 11-1.3. INHIBIT OPTION (INH) The inhibit option is provided as a board inside the module that can reduce the output voltage of 12 Volts to less than 0.5 Volts by application of a TTL compatible control signal. This circuit is inhibited through the reset signal. In this way the voltage supply to the analyzer lamp is cut off, while interrupting power to the solid state relay located on the Control Board (15-04431-01), thus interrupting the mains voltage supply to the peripherals (printer and vacuum pump). Section - XI Power Supply BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 1 SECTION XII VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Vacuum Pump System Always check and empty the full waste container and press "Restart" button Analyzer Blue Tube Analyzer Black Tube Restart Waste Probe To Analyzer Normal Pressure Low Pressure Low-Pressure Alarm WARNING 1) Read vacuum pump system instruction and warning notices carefully 2) Disposable gloves must be worn when servicing the vacuum pump system where hands may contact potentially contaminated waste materials biotecnica instruments Figure 12-1 Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01 for BT3000 PLUS 12-1. FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS This silent and compact vacuum pump system has been specifically designed for use with BT3000 PLUS type analyzers. It provides for an automatic and safe collection of waste liquids from analyzer’s reaction cuvettes and sampling needle washing into the external waste disposal container in lab environment. The system consists of a metallic cabinet containing two membrane pumps controlled by a microprocessor, electronics, and the electrical and fluidic connections to the analyzer. The microprocessor manages 3 main functions: pressure measurement, waste container full check, and pump shutdown. The waste discharge has the following pathway (course): A) B) The liquids aspirated by the pumps from the needle washing funnels (bowls) and the cuvettes washing through the two tubes (Blue and Black tubes) respectively are transferred to an internal waste chamber (made of transparent Pyrex). From here the waste fluid is ejected to the external waste container through the waste probe equipped with liquid level sensor. Whenever the external waist container is full the waste-probe liquid level sensor activated audio/visual alarm alerts the operator and instantly shuts down the pumps. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 21 12-1.1. SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTIONS Pressure: Three LEDs on the front panel indicate the system vacuum level. Green LED: Normal operating vacuum level (approximately –60 millibar). Yellow LED: Low vacuum level (below 30 millibar). Red LED:Vacuum level lower than –15 millibar Simultaneous Green, Yellow, and Red LEDs: Indicate high vacuum level (higher than –150 millibar). All LEDs turned off: Pumps disabled. The green LED indicates that the system is functioning properly. The yellow LED may indicate an operating limit condition, still satisfactory but signalling the beginning of vacuum level deterioration. The red LED indicates vacuum level failure due to various reasons. The simultaneous lighting of Green, Yellow, and Red LEDs indicate excessive vacuum level probably caused by an occluded waste probe tube (from the vacuum pump system to the external waste container). If this condition occurs sporadically during washing then it must be considered normal. All LEDs turned off condition is reached when the standby time (2 minutes) terminates without resetting the system (pumps disabled). In this case the green LED of the Restart button flashes in quick successions. The green LED also confirms the power on condition of the vacuum pump system. If the green LED is not lit then this may be due to either the power cordset of the vacuum pump system is disconnected from the analyzer or the vacuum pump system malfunction. 12-1.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE BOARD 15-05085-01 (VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM) The Board 15-05085-01 controls the vaccum pump system operation. The microcontroller (µC) U2 (87LPC767) in OTP version monitors all the functions of the system. It controls the signals from level sensor of the waste probe, two pumps in DC, 3-way solenoid valve, pressure sensor SP1, and generates acoustic alarms at two distinct frequencies. The connector J1 allows connection to the power supply, which supplies 24Vdc. The voltage of 5Vdc is obtained from the 24Vdc through the low dropout regulator U1 (L4931 CV50). The connectors J2 and J3 connect the circuit to the two 24Vdc membrane pumps dedicated to the aspiration of the waste liquids. The connector J4 allows connection for the signals from the LEDs, and the maximum level limit of the waste probe level sensor. The connector J5 is utilized for transmitting alarm signals to the analyzer (for TARGA BT3000 and by-products only). The connector J6 connects the circuit to the 3-way solenoid valve, which deviates waste liquids to the internal waste bottle in the vacuum pump system when the external waste container is full. The connector J7 is provided for an eventual pressure measurement device. The bit P1.7 of the U2 controls the Buzzer BZ1. Depending upon the alarm function, it generates two distinct audible alarms as follows: 1) Frequency of 1 beep per second. 2) Frequency of 2.5 beeps per second. The green LED diode DL1 is lit in normal operating conditions (pressure > 30 millibar) and is monitored by the gate P1.4 of the U2. The yellow LED DL2 lights up when the pressure is in the range of 20 - 30 millibar. This range indicates pre-alarm condition. The gate dedicated to this is P0.2 of U2. The red LED diode DL3 lights up to indicate low-pressure alarm condition < 16 millibar. The command gate is P0.6 of U2. The MOSFET Q1 is used for supplying or switching off voltage to the two membrane pumps connected in parallel. The command bit arrives from the gate P1.0 of U2. The pushbutton SW1 is dedicated to the Restart function of the system. When the green LED inside the pushbutton is lit, it indicates that the vacuum pump system is turned on. The blinking green LED in the pushbutton indicates that the system requires restarting. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 21 The gate P0.4 of the U2 controls the Darlington transistor Q2. It activates or inactivates the 3-way solenoid valve for waste liquids management of external waste container or the internal waste bottle in the vacuum pump system. The pressure sensor SP1 supplies a voltage proportional to the operating pressure of the vacuum pump system. An appropriately amplified signal from the integrated circuit U4 is transmitted to the gate P0.3 of U2. 12-1.3. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01 COMPONENT FUNCTIONS System Overview This paragraph provides a description of the functions of the main components of the Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01. The Vacuum Pump System consists of four main components inside the cabinet: an AC/DC power supply with universal input 100-240 VAC and 24VDC output, the Controller Board 15-05085-01, two membrane pumps, and a 3-way solenoid valve. CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS: Pressure monitoring Only the green LED (DL1) should be lit (indicating nominal operating pressure) during the normal operation of the vacuum pump system. The lighting up of yellow LED (DL2) indicates that the operating pressure has gone below 30 millibar (it can be acceptable if this occurred now and then). If the red LED (DL3) lights up then this indicates that the operating pressure has gone below 16 millibar (inadequate for normal analyzer operation). An audible alarm of 1 beep per second frequency is generated after 6 seconds. In particular cases (e.g. when large amount of liquid is aspirated) it is possible that all three LEDs (on the front panel of the pump cabinet) are lit intermittently. This indicates the presence of high pressure (more than 150 millibar) in the waste bottle located inside the pump cabinet. If this persists for more than 10 seconds then the "Restart" pushbutton LED illuminates generating an audible alarm at the frequency of 2.5 beeps every 10 seconds. Waste Container control The waste probe is placed into the external waste container to transfer liquid ejected from the waste pumps into the container. For safety reasons the waste probe is equipped with a liquid level sensor, which is activated, when the external waste container is full. In this condition the liquid level sensor transmits the signal to the microprocessor, thus putting the system in standby mode. In addition the vacuum pump system generates an intermittent audible alarm of low frequency (1 beep per second), and simultaneously the red LED on top of the waste probe and the LED in the "Restart" button start flashing. In the mean time the system continues to function for about 100 seconds as the waste liquids are deviated to the internal waste bottle through the 3-way solenoid valve, thus continuing the waste aspiration function transitorily but the waste flow to external waste container is stopped. The purpose of this momentary deviation is to avoid any spillage during the transfer of the waste probe from one waste container to another empty container. After emptying or substituting the external waste container press momentarily the "Restart" button on the vacuum pump system front panel to continue the operating procedure and reset the alarm. If the preceding step is not taken, after approximately 100 seconds the aspiration pumps stop running, the three LEDs on the cabinet front panel are switched off and an audible alarm of 2.5 beeps per second frequency is generated. After additional 10 seconds the 3-way solenoid valve is deenergized. NOTE: The liquid level sensor is magnetically actuated reed switch make and break type. Vacuum Pump System reset If due to the above-mentioned reasons the vacuum pump system enters the alarm condition the "Restart" button LED starts flashing, simultaneously the analyzer enters the standby mode and a corresponding warning message "LOW PRESSURE" appears on the screen. Empty or substitute the external waste container and momentarily press the "Restart" pushbutton to reset the vacuum pump system. The vacuum pump system starts functioning and the internal waste bottle is emptied. After reaching the correct operating pressure all the normal operating controls and alarms are restored. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 21 12-1.4. INSTALLATION & OPERATION 1) Connect the Blue and Black waste tubes from the right side of the analyzer to the appropriate quick connect on the vacuum pump cabinet front panel. 3) Connect the Waste Probe electric cable (liquid level detector) and the drain tube of to the vacuum pump cabinet front panel. 4) Insert the Waste Probes in authorized external waste container. 5) Plug the power cordset to power inlet on the rear of vacuum pump cabinet and then into one of the accessory power connectors on the analyzer rear panel. 6) Now the system is fully installed and ready for operation. 7) Switch on the analyzer. The vacuum pump will start running NOTE: The vacuum pump system power inlet on the rear has no ON/OFF switch. The system turns ON and OFF simultaneously with the analyzer. The vacuum Pump System is equipped with a universal power supply of 100 to 240 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz similar the power supply of BT3000 PLUS analyzer. 12-1.5. MAINTENANCE AND CARE This compact pump system is virtually maintenance-free and offers continuous duty collection of waste liquids outside the analyzer. Does not require inconvenient peristaltic pump cartridge and filter changes. The theoretical operating life of the pumps is between 4000 to 5000 hours, after that the service technician should substitute the pumps. WARNING a) DISPOSABLE GLOVES MUST BE WORN WHEN SERVICING THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WHERE HANDS MAY CONTACT POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED WASTE MATERIALS. b) THE SAFE DISPOSAL OF THE WASTE MATERIALS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. INSURE THAT THE DISPOSAL OF WASTE CONTAINER FLUIDS IS DONE ACCORDING TO ALL APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS. 12-1.6. TROUBLE-SHOOTING TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE SYMPTOMS CORRECTIVE ACTIONS The vacuum pump is silent and "Restart" green LED not lit. Audible alarm of intermittent frequency, some flashing LEDs and the instrument in standby mode. Audible Alarm of intermittent frequency with the LED on the waste probe lit. Damaged Unit Smoke, strange odor or noise Section - XII a) No power to the system. Power cord disconnected. Connect the power cord. b) Blown fuse/s. Replace with appropriate fuses as marked. Indicates vacuum level variation due to leakage in the hydraulic circuit connection/s. Ensure that the waste tubes (blue and black tubes connecting vacuum pump to the analyzer) are firmly connected. During the analyzer operation this phenomenon may be considered normal, as there may be sudden variations in the vacuum level during emptying of the reading cuvettes. External waste container full. Empty the external waste container and press “RESTART” button on the vacuum pump cabinet to continue the operating procedure and to reset the alarm. The unit has suffered severe shock such as being dropped. Do not use the unit. Consult your nearest sales/service office regarding repair. Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect the power supply. Consult your dealer regarding repair. Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 21 ANALYZER Black Tube Blue Tube Vacuum Pump System Power Cord Aspiration Pump Waste Probe Internal Waste Chamber External Waste Container Fluidic Pathway Figure 12-2 DRAIN TUBE CONNECTOR ELECTRIC CABLE LEVEL SENSOR RED LED Waste Probe (P/N. 07-05165-01) Figure 12-3 12-1.7. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE The following is listing of subassemblies and individual parts, which are available for field replacement: PART NO. 06-05161-01 07-05165-01 08-05162-01 15-05085-01 20-05145-01 330.6312 330.6338 330.6400 330.7175 330.9099 DESCRIPTION VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE) FOR BT3000 PLUS WASTE PROBE VACUUM PUMP ASSY VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER (TRANSPARENT GLASS) POWER ENTRY MODULE FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET POWER SUPPLY 3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 21 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 662.0788 & BYPRODUCTS (OBSOLETE) No longer in production 12-2. INTRODUCTION This compact and silent waste suction unit has been specifically designed for use with the BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer where continuous elimination of liquid is required to be automatic removal of waste. The gauge-controlled suction can reach a maximum vacuum of -400 mbar. It produces low-noise level while maintaining strong suction capabilities. It provides for an automatic and safe collection of waste liquids from to the external waste disposal containers in laboratory. Whenever the external waist container is full the waste-probe liquid level sensor activates a low frequency audio/visual alarm and instantly shuts down the peristaltic pump. The vacuum pump stops running, if any of the internal waste collection chamber is full and remains in the standby mode until the waste containers are emptied and the alarm reset. The suction unit cabinet accommodates two inner waste collection chambers of approximately 300ml capacity each. The vacuum to the waste chambers is aspiration of waste liquids from analyzer is provided by the vacuum pump. The waste liquid, aspirated from the analyzer is collected in these waste chambers. Simultaneously, two high throughput peristaltic pumps are used to transfer the waste liquid to the external waste containers through external waste probes, thus preventing secondary contaminant exposure. The peristaltic pump features a removable and disposable cartridge that is pre-loaded with special Pharmed tube. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 21 12-2.1. VACUUM GAUGE The vacuum status is clearly indicated on the front panel vacuum gauge. 12-2.2. VACUUM LEVEL REGULATOR The pump circuit incorporates an automatic vacuum level regulator, which is factory set at -400 mbar (-40 kPa, -300 mm Hg, -11.8 in Hg). The vacuum regulator monitors the vacuum level and automatically adjusts it when the vacuum level rises above the desired point, in the event of clogged filter or any other system occlusion. By using the vacuum regulator the risk of a pump failure due to excessive is eliminated, extending the pump life and ensuring high performance. 12-2.3. HYDROPHOBIC FILTER A disposable hydrophobic filter protects the vacuum pump from contamination If the filter becomes clogged it may be replaced any time. The hydrophobic filter captures superfine particles, bacteria, condensate, and any liquid that may contaminate or damage the pump. 12-2.4. CAUTION! SHIPPING RETAINER FOR THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM To protect the vacuum pump from vibration and impact during shipment, it comes installed with a clamping device. When you unpack your vacuum pump system, make sure to remove two transit screws (colored red) at the bottom of cabinet to release the vacuum pump. Running the pump with the transit screws installed will cause an increased noise level during operation and may damage internal mechanisms. 12-2.5. INSTALLATION PROTOCOL Refer to Figure 12-4 entitled "Vacuum Pump System Installation" before attempting to install the analyzer. Install all electrical cables and tubes as follows: 1) Remove the transit screws at the bottom of the pump cabinet. 2) Connect waste tubing from the right side of the analyzer to the appropriate quick connect connectors on top of the vacuum pump cabinet. 3) Connect the liquid level detector cables and the drain tubes of Waste Probes to the front panel of the vacuum pump. 4) Insert the waste probes in the appropriate external waste containers. 5) Plug one end of the power cord to the power inlet on the vacuum pump cabinet and the other end to the accessory power connectors on the analyzer rear panel. 12-2.6. QUICK START-UP 1) 2) 3) Switch on the analyzer. The vacuum pump will start running. Maximum operating vacuum is preset at –400 mbar ± 10%. The vacuum level during unit's normal standby/operating mode may vary between –100 mbar (-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar (-225 mmHg). In case the vacuum level drops below – 100 mbar then refer to Paragraph 12-2.14. entitled "Trouble-Shooting Guide". Note: The waste probe LED and audible alarms keep you aware of the unit’s status as follows: a) b) c) st 1 alarm (Beep of 1-second frequency): The LED on the waste probe will be lit. The external waste container is full. Empty it. In the mean time vacuum pump continues to function without blocking the analyzer for about 4 minutes as the waste chamber inside vacuum pump system is being used. It is important to press the “RESTART” button on the vacuum pump cabinet to continue the operating procedure and to reset the alarm. nd 2 alarm (Beep of 0.5 second frequency): The LED on the waste probe will be lit: This alarm is activated when the external waste container is not emptied and the waste chamber inside the vacuum pump system is full. A signal is sent to the analyzer to interrupt the operating functions with a "Waste Bottle Full" message. The “Waste Bottle Full” message will stop analyzer function. Once the cause of the message is remedied, the command “Start Another Tray“ can be selected to carry on the operating procedure with the analyzer. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 21 12-2.7. CARE AND MAINTENANCE For this care and maintenance section, refer to Figures 12-5, 12-7, and 12-9. It is highly recommended to replace the Peristaltic Pump Cartridge P/N 330.9088 and the Hydrophobic Filter P/N 662.0807 every 6 months. ! a) b) CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE INSIDE! HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. PUMP WIRING IS LIVE. DISCONNECT INPUT POWER (POWER CORD) BEFORE SERVICING. NEVER OPERATE WITHOUT SECURE GROUND CONNECTION. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY. THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM MUST NOT BE DISMANTLED OR REPAIRED BY ANYONE WHO HAS NOT BEEN QUALIFIED TO DO SO BY THE MANUFACTURER. INCORRECT WORK MAY CAUSE FIRE OR IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM. 12-2.8. FUSE REPLACEMENT FOR MAIN POWER INLET MODULE The main power inlet module has a built-in fuse holder and two fuses of 250 Volt, 2AT (P/N 330.6340) for 230 VAC pump or 250 Volt, 4 AT (P/N 330.6342) for 115 VAC pump. Fuses protect the system against power surges or overload by interrupting power. Replace fuse/s as marked on the rear panel. To replace a fuse proceed as follows: 1) Disconnect the power cord. Remove the fuses by gently extracting the fuse-holder with a tool. The fuse-holder has two grooves on the sides for tool accessibility only. 2) Discard the old fuses and replaces with new fuses that matches the selected voltage rating indicated on the back panel label. Insert the fuse-holder into the compartment and push until the latch snaps back into position. 12-2.9. FILTER REPLACEMENT 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Disconnect the power cable. Loosen the cover screws and remove cover. Remove the filter tubing (blue) from the waste chamber and the vacuum pump quick connects. Discard the filter. Install a new filter by connecting longer tubing (filter outlet) to the quick connect on the vacuum pump. It is important that the arrow indicator (→) on the filter point towards the air intake of the pump. Connect the shorter feed tubing to the quick connect on the waste chamber. Install the cover and tighten screws. NOTE: The hydraulic circuit, inside the pump cabinet, accommodates quick-connect fittings for the reliable connection and the prevention of accidental release. The approved tubing for quick-connect must always be cut clearly at 90° angle. To connect or disconnect observe the following simple steps: a) b) To connect simply push tubing into the collar past the O-ring to the internal tube stops. To disconnect press collar against the fitting body and slide out tubing. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 21 12-2.10. PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT The peristaltic pump features removable cartridge pre-loaded with special Pharmed® tube. To replace cartridge proceed as follows: 1) Remove both ends of the peristaltic tubing with elbow inserts from the quick-connect couplings. Remove elbow inserts. 2) Squeeze the locking catches and remove the defective cartridge and discard it. 3) Introduce elbow inserts into the pump tubing. Place the new cartridge on the drive shaft and gently press to snap fit. 4) Carefully connect the pump tubing to both quick-connect on the front panel. The pump is now ready for operation. NOTE: The disposable cartridge is based on snap-fit principle. As the cartridge is put in place and locked, the three rollers within the cartridge engage the unit's drive shaft. To connect coupling simply plug insert into body. The fitting halves lock in place instantly with an audible "click", which assures a reliable and leak-free connection. To disconnect the fitting halves, simply press the thumb latch (lever) on the coupling body and the coupling halves separate. 12-2.11. VACUUM REGULATION PROCEDURE The vacuum limit valve is located on the internal right waste chamber. This modulating valve protects the pump from “maximum vacuum” (the highest vacuum the pump can attain when the pump inlet is closed). In the event of clogged filter or any system occlusion, the vacuum regulator eliminate possible trouble or burnout caused by tentative overload. The valve maintains a constant predetermined vacuum level and will automatically respond to any rise of vacuum level above the valve setting. The following procedure should be observed when calibrating the vacuum limit valve: 1) Disconnect the power cable. Disconnect the waste tubes with elbow inserts (Blue and Black) from the quick-connect couplings on the right side of analyzer. 2) Loosen the cover screws and remove cover. Turn on vacuum pump system. 3) Loosen the lock nut securing the vacuum regulating cap (this is the vacuum regulator located on the right chamber). 4) Carefully turn the vacuum regulator cap clockwise or counterclockwise until the vacuum gauge needle points to the recommended set point –400 mbar (-40 kPa, -300 mm Hg, 11.8 inch Hg, -5.8 PSI) The preset vacuum level clearly reflects the vacuum level existing in the suction line. NOTE: To reduce the vacuum level, turn the regulator cap counterclockwise. To increase the vacuum level, turn the regulator cap clockwise. When adjusting valve, make no more than one turn of the cap at a time and observe the vacuum level closely to prevent over-shooting the specified setting. As much as 1 minute may be required for the new balance to take place after the adjustment is made. Tighten the lock nut against regulating cap while firmly holding the cap in position. Connect waste tube to the rear of analyzer. Start the Vacuum Pump System and verify proper operation. 12-2.12. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The fluids aspirated from the analyzer are separated according to degree of contamination into 2 separate channels. Basically the blue tube evacuates minimally contaminated fluids while the black tube evacuates highly contaminated fluids. The internal waste chamber receives the fluid and is not emptied by the peristaltic pump until the rising liquid level (few centimeters) actuates the bottom liquid level sensor. The liquid level sensor controls the peristaltic pump until the liquid level returns to the minimum position. The liquid level sensor is used for operating the peristaltic pump when necessary. The liquid level sensor located on the top of waste chamber is for signaling any system error. If the peristaltic pump were to malfunction, the waste chamber would continue to fill up until the liquid overflows into the vacuum pump. To prevent this from happening, the upper liquid level sensor is actuated. This disables the system by turning off the vacuum pump. Instantly an audible alarm is activated, with intermittent acoustic signals of high frequency. The waste probe transfer the liquid ejected from the peristaltic pumps into the external waste containers. For safety reasons each waste probe is equipped with a liquid level sensor which is activated when the external waste container is full. In this situation, the vacuum pump system generates an intermittent audible alarm and a visual red LED would be lit on top of the waste probe is lit. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 21 12-2.13. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION BOARD (15-04541-01) The board 15-04541-01 controls and monitors the whole vacuum pump system. The µC764, in the OTP version, controls all the functions of the system. In addition this micro-controller controls the signals of the liquid level switches, activates the peristaltic pumps and generates acoustic alarms. The J1 connector is used to connect the power supply to obtain 24 VDC. The reduction to 5 VDC voltage is derived from 24 VDC supplied through the U1 voltage regulator (LM7805). The J2 connector is used to connect the circuit to the liquid level sensors inside the two waste chambers. The rising level float switch is connected in OR. When the liquid level inside the waste chambers reaches the high actuation level (upper liquid level switches), the associated liquid level switches from closed to open. In case the liquid level in the waste chamber is below the low actuation level, the bottom float switches from open to closed contacts. The Q1 and Q2 transistors are the power drivers of the peristaltic pumps. The J3 connector permits connection to the main AC power. The vacuum pump is connected to the J4 connector. The J5 connector is used to connect the circuit to the peristaltic pumps, waste probes, and the "Restart" push button. The various gates of the integrated U3 circuit (ULN2803) control the following functions: • The U3A gate activates the red LED (visual alarm) on the Waste Probe-2. • The U3B gate activates the red LED (visual alarm) on the Waste Probe-1. • The U3C gate activates acoustic alarm through BZ1 buzzer. • Gates U3D, U3F, and U3H control the relay K1 to turn off power to the vacuum pump in case of error in the system. The jumpers 1, 2, and 3 allow the utilization of the electronic circuit in the following mode: a) b) c) Jump 1 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products. Jump 2 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products. Jump 3 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 21 12-2.14. TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE SYMPTOMS A 1-second audible with the LED on the waste probe lit. Waste Bottle Full message. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 1. External waste container full. Empty the external waste container and press “RESTART” button to reset. 2. Remedy the causes of alarm and then enter the command “Start Another Tray“ to carry on the operating procedure with the analyzer. NOTE: The vacuum pump continues to function without blocking the analyzer for about 4 minutes as the waste chamber inside vacuum pump system is being used. It is important to press the “RESTART” button on the vacuum pump cabinet to continue the operating procedure and to reset the alarm. A 0.5-second audible with the LED on the waste probe lit. The vacuum level below –100 mbar (-75 mmHg) The external waste container is not emptied and the waste chamber inside the vacuum pump system is full. In this case a signal is sent to the analyzer to interrupt its functions. Empty the external waste container. Press the “RESTART” button to reset the alarm. 1. In the normal operating conditions the vacuum range may vary between -100 mbar (-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar (-225 mmHg). The vacuum level below -100 mbar (-75 mmHg) indicates leakage in the hydraulic circuit. Ensure that the waste tubes (the blue & black tubes connecting vacuum pump to the analyzer) and the exhaust tubes in the analyzer are firmly connected. 2. Partially occluded hydrophobic filter located inside vacuum pump system. Replace with Part No. 662.0807. Caution: Always install filter with the flow (flow directional arrow pointing towards the pump) entering the vacuum pump from the waste chamber side. Damaged Unit The unit has suffered severe shock such as being dropped. Do not use the unit. Consult your dealer regarding repair. Liquid such as water has been Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect sucked into the vacuum pump the power supply. Consult your dealer regarding repair. Smoke, strange odor or noise Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect the power supply. Consult your dealer regarding repair. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 11 of 21 12-2.15. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE The following is listing of subassemblies and individual parts, which are available for field replacement: PART NO. 11-05260-01 11-05339-01 15-04541-01 330.6312 330.6340 330.6342 330.6400 330.7175 330.9088 330.9622 330.9623 330.9624 330.9625 330.9649 330.9659B 662.0777B 662.0777C 662.0788 662.0788A 662.0788B 662.0788E 662.0806 662.0807 662.0808 662.0808A 662.0810 662.0831 662.0831A 662.0831C 662.0831D 662.0831E 662.0831F 662.0831G 662.0831H 662.0832 662.0832A 662.1015 DESCRIPTION ANTI-CONDENSATE KIT (VAC PUMP) VACUUM PUMP ANNUAL SERVICE KIT VAC.PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH FUSES (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) FUSE 250 VOLT, 2 AT ( 230 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM) FUSE 250 VOLT, 4 AT ( 115 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM) MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET POWER SUPPLY (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) CARTRIDGE # PERISTALTIC PUMP (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) COUPLING BODY WITH SHUTOFF VALVE - FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.) ELBOW FITTING FOR PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE(FIG. 12-7.) COUPLING BODY STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.) SINTERED BRONZE SILENCER (FIG. 12-5.) COUPLING INSERT FOR WASTE PROBE - FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.) VACUUM REGULATOR (FIG. 12-5.) VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC WITH FITTINGS (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) VACUUM PUMP 230 VAC WITH FITTINGS (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE SYSTEM WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 230 VAC WASTE PROBE-1 (FIG. 12-8.) WASTE PROBE-2 (FIG. 12-8.) VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE SYSTEM WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 110 VAC "RESTART" PUSH BUTTON (NOT WIRED) HYDROPHOBIC FILTER ASSEMBLY #VAC PUMP (FIG. 12-5.) PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) VACUUM GAUGE ASSY (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.) CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY/BOARD 15-04541 (FIG. 12-9.) CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLIES (FIG. 12-9.) FEMALE FISCHER CONNECTOR KIT (FIG. 12-9.) "RESTART" PUSH BUTTON KIT (FIG. 12-9.) GROUNDING CABLE FOR VAC PUMP (FIG. 12-9.) GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER INLET (FIG. 12-9.) GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY (FIG. 12-9.) GROUNDING CABLE FOR PUMP COVER (FIG. 12-9.) THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-LEFT (FIG. 12-5., 12-6.) THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-RIGHT (FIG. 12-5., 12-6.) VACUUM REGULATOR ASSY (FIG. 12-5, 12-7) IMPORTANT NOTICE: Prior to any internal repairs or transportation, continue pressing the “RESTART” button until the waste chamber inside the cabinet is completely emptied (approximately 30 seconds) and the pump beeps continuously. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 12 of 21 12-2.15.1. ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT P/N 11-05339-01 11 8 8 10 Vacuum Pump System # BT3000 PLUS ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05339-01) #BT3000 PLUS KIT MANUTENZIONE ANNUALE (cod.11-05339-01) # BT3000 PLUS ITEM (POS.) 8 10 11 QTY (QTA) 2 1 2 Section - XII DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE) Pump Cartridge #Vacuum Pump System Silencer #Vacuum Pump System Hydrophobic Filter #Vacuum Pump System Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 13 of 21 12-2.16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Technical Specifications Main Voltage.......................... 230 VAC, 50 Hz or 117 VAC, 60 Hz (As per Clients disposition) AC-DC Power Supply Input Voltage Range:.............. 100-240 VAC, Switched Mode Input Frequency:..................... (AC) 47-63 Hz Output Voltage Range:............ 24VDC ± 10% Operating Temperature 0 to +50°C Vacuum Pump Pump Type:............................ Linear-motor driven free piston, oil-less Rated Voltage:........................ 230VAC 50 Hz or 115VAC 60 Hz (As per Clients disposition) Operating Vacuum ± 10%:...... Varies between -100 mbar (-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar (-225 mmHg). Vacuum Level:....................... Automatically regulated by Vacuum Limit Valve factory set at -400 mbar (-300 mmHg). The valve is located downstream of the Hydrophobic Filter. Attainable Vacuum (Max):....... -800 mbar, -80 kPa, -600 mmHg, -23.6 in. Hg Peristaltic Pump Drive:....................................... Direct Current Motor 24 VDC Motor Speed:.......................... 3000 RPM Flow Rate:............................... 110 ml/min Tube Material and Bore:......... Pharmed; Bore: Ø3.2 mm Transmission:......................... Friction transfer at minimal speed directly onto the rollers. Media:..................................... Analyzer waste Life Expectancy:...................... NOTE: It is recommended that the Pump Cartridge be changed every 6 months. Hi-Lo Level Sensor:.............. Liquid Level Float Switch with hermetically sealed magnetic Reed Switch and permanent magnet. Filter:...................................... Disposable hydrophobic/bacteria filter Life expectancy:...................... NOTE: It is recommended that the filter be changed every 6 months. Dimensions (Approx.) Height:..................................... 310 mm (12.2 inches) Width:...................................... 230 mm (9.1 inches) Depth:...................................... 420 mm (16.54 inches) Weight:.................................... 15 kg (33.1 lbs) EMC:....................................... Meets EN 55011, EN 50082-1 For conducted and radiated emission. Electrical Standards:............. Conforms to Council Directives 98/79/EEC of 27 October 1998. Warranty:................................ 1 year including parts and labor, excluding Consumables The Biotecnica Instruments reserves the right to alter technical specifications without prior notice. Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 14 of 21 12-2.17. CLEANING OF THE HYDROPHOBIC FILTER (Vacuum Pump System #BT3000 PLUS) Normally during the routine maintenance, the hydrophobic filter, located inside the vacuum pump system, is replaced approximately every 12 months. Sometimes the filter may become occluded after a short period of time or suddenly. These occlusions are generally caused by the presence of excessive foam formed in the waste liquid by agitation. This can happen if an excessive amount of surfactant detergent is used in the washing liquid or reagents containing too much surfactant. Even if there is a waste chamber in the vacuum pump system to attenuate the problem, the foam may overflow from the waste chamber into the hydrophobic filter, before the liquid level detector turns off the vacuum pump. Observe the following procedure to resolve this problem: 1) 2) 3) 4) When the external waste container is full, the system generates an audio-visual alarm. The operator must intervene soon to avoid overfilling of internal waste chamber causing foam to overflow into the filter. Regeneration of the filter through cleaning. This operation is possible if the filter is occluded recently and has not exceeded its current operating life. In practice an old filter with membrane occluded by dried up residues, must be substituted. Disconnect the power cable. Remove the cover from the vacuum pump system. Remove the filter tubing from the internal waste chamber and the vacuum pump quick connects (metallic). Turn the filter upside down with the flow arrow indicator (⌦) on the filter (Fig. A) must point upwards. Remove the vent cap (Fig. A) at the bottom of the filter and drain any liquid inside the filter. Use a plastic pipette on the top (opposite to flow arrow indicator) to blow out any liquid or wet residues from the clogged filter membrane. Now about 90% of the filter efficiency must have been restored. Best results can be obtained by using compressed air in place of the pipette. Replace vent cap (Fig. A) and tighten it. Install the filter and the vacuum pump system cover and tighten screws. Apply Plastic Pipette or Compressed Air Figure A Vent Cap Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 15 of 21 TRANSPARENT TUBE ANALYZER H2O BOTTLE BLACK TUBE BLUE TUBE POWER SUPPLY CABLE VACUUM GAUGE REMOVE TRANSIT SCREWS AT BOTTOM BLUE TUBE PERISTALTIC PUMP BLACK TUBE WASTE PROBE 2 EXTERNAL WASTE CONTAINER VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM Installation FIGURE 12-4 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 16 of 21 Coupling Insert P/N 330.9649 Waste Chamber (L) P/N 662.0832 Waste Chamber (R) P/N 662.0832A Hydrophobic Filter P/N 662.0807 Coupling Body with Shut Off Valve P/N 330.9622 Coupling Body Straight Through P/N 330.9624 Power Entry Module P/N 330.6342 Coupling Body with Shut Off Valve P/N 330.9622 Power Supply P/N 330.7175 Restart Push Button Controller Board P/N 15-04541-01 Vacuum Gauge P/N 662.0810 Vacuum Pump P/N 662.0777C (230 Vac) P/N 662.0777B (115 Vac) Silencer P/N 330.9625 Vacuum Regulator P/N 330.9659B Peristaltic Pump - Left P/N 662.0808 Peristaltic Pump - Right P/N 662.0808A Pump Cartridge P/N 330.9088 SPARE PARTS FOR MAINTENANCE & REPAIR Figure 12-5 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 17 of 21 Waste Chamber (Left) P/N 662.0832 Waste Chamber (Right) P/N 662.0832A WASTE CHAMBERS LEFT & RIGHT Figure 12-6 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 18 of 21 POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH FUSES CONTROLLER BOARD P/N 15-04541-01 ELBOW FITTING P/N 330.9623 PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT P/N 662.0808 PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT P/N 662.0808A POWER SUPPLY P/N 330.7175 PUMP CARTRIDGE P/N 330.9088 VACUUM REGULATOR ASSY NOT INCLUDED VACUUM GAUGE P/N 662.0810 VACCUM REGULATOR ASSY P/N 662.1015 VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC P/N 662.0777B VACUUM PUMP 220 VAC P/N 662.0777C DETAILS OF SOME SPARE PARTS Figure 12-7 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 19 of 21 Visual LED Level Detector WASTE PROBE (P/N 662.0788A & B) Figure 12-8 SPARE CABLES FOR VACUUM PUMP Figure 12-9 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 20 of 21 Always connect the tubing to the analyzer. Do not use the Vacuum Pump System and Waste Tube with any other fluid source; direct suction of liquid from any container or cleaning of any laboratory spillages. The unauthorized use may result in serious injury to the user and permanent damage to the Vacuum Pump System. Always unplug the power cord from the unit before performing any installation or maintenance procedure NO NO Remove Transit Screws at the bottom before operating. NO NO Do not ever leave the Waste-Probe on the floor or outside its external Waste Container during the analyzer operation or standby. The Waste-Probe must always be kept on the Waste Container to avoid waste liquid spillages. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WARNINGS! Figure 12-10 Section - XII Vacuum Pump System BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 21 of 21 SECTION - XIII MEASUREMENTS & CALIBRATIONS 13-1. INTRODUCTION The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer has a general diagnostic program exclusively for the technical assistance personnel. The access to this program is protected by a password and it requires absolute familiarity with the analyzer as a prerequisite. The following functions can be performed in this program: 1) Verification of operation and stability of the photometer. 2) Testing hydraulic functions including sampling, washing, and emptying of cuvette. 3) Verification of ISE module operation. 4) Verification and programming of the barcode. 5) Program of stress. 6) Cuvette temperature calibration (manual & automatic). 7) Reagent chamber temperature calibration (fixed or variable). To access the diagnostic program, click on the “Analyzer” button, and then click on the “General Diagnostic” button for displaying the “General Diagnostic” page. Now click on the desired functions. 13-1.1. PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS The calibration consists of amplification adjustments of each channel so that these are appropriate to variables present in the photometer. The interference filters and the semi-reflecting mirrors may have tolerances of ±30%, which must be compensated to avoid saturation of the amplifiers. The calibration procedure for amplifications remains the same whether it is performed with the photometer test box or directly on the analyzer. A photometer supplied by the QC with attached test report, may show different amplification values on the analyzer where it will be installed. This is due to the sum tolerances of the entire optical system: halogen lamp and quartz prism light guide. However, any slight deviation is tolerated if the values are within the specified limits. Optical conditions for calibrations and reading of values are as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Reading station fully tested and electro-mechanically functional Cuvettes calibrated and properly cleaned as per specifications Distilled water, in all the 34 cuvettes (300 to 600µl) Lamps tested as laid down in the specifications (see specification label) Warm up period of at least 5 minutes to allow the system to reach steady state Specifications are valid for the BT3000 PLUS with a reading cycle of 1.5 seconds and 34-cuvette plate. The average value of signal for all the channels is 24,000 points (recommended value for calibration). Limit values of signals for all the channels are from 14,000 to 30,000 points. The reference channel has a wide excursion range of correct value from 3500 points to the 16000 points without any adjustment controls. NOTE: An average value of 24,000 points is recommended as the halogen lamp progressively burns out (exhausts). After about 1,500 hours of burning the lamp may reach a minimum acceptable value limit of 14,000 points. The acceptable minimum and maximum values have the following implications: ● Below 14,000 points the photometric resolution tends to reduce progressively to about 2,200 points of optical density. ● Beyond 30,000, towards 35,000 points, the amplifiers tend to saturate and disturb the linearity of photometer also at lower values of optical density. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 8 13-1.2. PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Select a pair of sequential filters (i.e. 340nm/380nm) using diagnostic program. Execute a reading of the 34-cuvette plate and observe the values of integration. If necessary, adjust the trimmer corresponding to each channel, clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease the measured values. At each adjustment perform reading of the 34-cuvette plate for verification. Select the next pair of interference filters, (i.e. 405/436nm) and repeat the preceding operations. Continue this until terminating with the last pair of 630nm/700nm filters. The calibrations can also be performed in the random mode. 13-1.3. VERIFICATION OF EVENTUAL PROBLEMS DURING THE READINGS The verification of the photometer requires the following; selection of filters 1 and 2, the filling of one or more cuvettes, the gain reading of the amplifier of desired channel, the reading of offsets of all the channels, the reading of the absorbance in mono and bi-chromatic modes, zeroing the absorbance of all the cuvettes, sample one cuvette using the reagent number 1 and serums number 1 and then read its absorbance value. 1) 2) 3) 4) Click on the “Select Filter” and select the 2 filters. Click on the "Read zero filter" to have the transmission values in the dark of channel 1 & channel 2 amplifiers. The values should be between 0 and 390. Values higher than that may cause problems in the photometer electronics or produce an incorrect mechanical calibration of cuvette tray (i.e.: light passage in the cuvette during reading in the dark). Fill all the cuvettes with water by first clicking the "Cuvette" button and then the "Wash and fill up" button. It is possible to perform additional controls after the cuvettes have been filled. It is possible to read the absorbance and the relevant values of the amplifiers on all the cuvettes by simply clicking the "Read" button. The sequence of the values has the following meaning: Cuvette 1st Chan. 2nd chan. mAbs x 1 mAbs x 2 # cuv. rel. gain rel. gain abs (filter 1) abs (F1-F2) Es.1 18,000 18,900 300 100 Selected Filters: 340nm/630nm The above example shows that the cuvette #1 (with H2O) has an absorbance of 300 mABS at 340nm and an absorbance of 100 mABS in bi-chromatic reading at (340-630nm). The relative gains of the channels #1 and #2 should have the values between 14,000 and 28,000 when all the cuvettes are filled up with distilled water. If the zeroing of the absorbance is desired then click on "Zeroing" button, if necessary click a couple of times. When performing the a sample and read process using reagent in position #1 and sample in position #1, click on the "Sampling" button and select the appropriate method "Normal Sample" or "Sample Starter". In the "Normal Sample" mode a sequential sampling is carried out with the same needle, first reagent and then serum. The volume of the reagent is fixed at 300µl, while the volume of the sample is selectable from 0 to 27ml. Take into consideration that the instrument restores the stoicometric ratio when the volume of the sample has been selected. If 3µl of serum is chosen, then the reagent volume becomes 297µl. After the sampling, it is possible to read the absorbance values of the sample directly in the mono or bi-chromatic mode using previously mentioned commands. The "Sample Starter" mode is similar to the preceding method except the sample, which is dispensed subsequently by the second sampling arm. The sampling test is always carried out in cuvette #1. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 8 13-2. CUVETTES SPECS CALIBRATION AND TEMP. CONTROL The calibration involves adjustment of the temperature sensor to manufactures specifications. A LM35 chip, with tolerance of ±1°C, is used as the sensing element and is located inside a metallic housing. Operative conditions for correct temperature calibration inside the cuvettes are as follows: ● ● ● ● Ambient Temperature: 18°C to 32°C Analyzer turned on for at least 20 minutes to reach steady state All 34 cuvettes filled with 300µl to 600µl volume of distilled water A certified electronic thermometer with micro-probe with at least 0.1°C resolution Keep in mind that a thermometer probe of 2 to 3 mm diameters, equipped with a K type thermocouple, when immersed in the cuvette, produces an instantaneous temperature drop of about 0.2°C. We advise against the use of thermometers of medium to large dimensions to avoid incorrect measurements because of difficulty of inserting the probe and for the necessity of performing measurements quickly. Do not perform measurements or calibrations if the cuvettes have been filled with distilled water without waiting for necessaryl 20 minutes warm-up period 13-2.1. CUVETTE TEMP. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Prior to proceeding with calibrations, set the cuvette temperature at 37ºC in "ANALYZER SETUP" page. Manual temperature calibration The manual temperature calibration adjustments are made through trimmer located on the "MASTER LOGIC BOARD" (on the rear lower part of the reading station). Automatic temperature calibration is possible in the software version 7.2 onwards, refer to instructions. Enter the service page and select the icon "Check Temperature". The cuvettes plate stops temporarily. Immerse the temperature measurement probe in an easily accessible cuvette. Gently shake the probe with rotational movement (for mixing) at the bottom of the cuvette to quicken the measurement. After measuring and noting the correct and stable value, stop the operation. Do not exceed 45 seconds of measurement time to avoid that irregular heating underneath affect the temperature of the rotating plate. The temperature monitoring system functions correctly, only when the metallic mass of the cuvettes rotor makes cyclical motion. After making a correct measurement, note down the measurement value, remove probe from the cuvette and click on the button, which appeared previously "Push Button...". The plate starts rotating clockwise and counterclockwise in the alternative manner, instantly the temperature is displayed in real time just below the commands line. The displayed temperature value should be identical with previous value measured with the probe. If necessary, adjust the TR1 trimmer on the Master Logic Board (15-04211-01) to match the value measured by the thermometer probe. Make this adjustment in the shortest time possible. The value of temperature measurement should not be necessarily 37°C as it is automatically corrected when exiting the service page. For example, the measurement of cuvette temperature by thermometer in a motionless plate is equal to 35.9°C. The measurement displayed on the monitor in the "Check Temp" function with plate rotating alternatively between clockwise and counter clockwise directions is 36.5°C. Adjust the trimmer TR1 until the temperature of 35.9°C is displayed on the monitor. Exit service page of "Check Temp". After the settling time of a few minutes, the monitor should display the correct temperature with fluctuation of ±0.2°C. Automatic temperature calibration, only with software 7.2 onwards. An appropriate thermometer is necessary (as indicated previously) to perform a valid calibration. With the instrument in steady state condition and the cuvettes filled with water, enter the diagnostic page (Analyzer > Diagnostic > General Diagnostic > Mechanics). Select "Mechanics" and click "SET TEMPERATURE". Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 8 Select "Temperature Calibration" in the next window. This is a step by step guided procedure. Insert the certified thermometer probe tip into the cuvette and after 45 seconds read the measurement value. Write the exact temperature measurement value (including decimals) by using mouse and the keyboard. After this operation is terminated the instrument will assume the set value after couple of minutes. It is possible to view on the display the measurement value of temperature in the cuvette. Some times one can observe the temperature fluctuations of +/-0,2°C, caused by the automatic corrections of feedback circuit. However the real variations in the cuvette are much less because of the considerable mass of the cuvette system components. NOTE: Verify the following parameters for an accurate calibration: 1) The water must be poured into the cuvette at least 10 minutes before the calibration. 2) The ideal ambient temperature should be between 20ºC and 26ºC. 3) The precision thermometer probe must be of miniature size. The instruments for measuring temperature such as thermometer having glass tube with mercury or alcohol are not suitable for this purpose. 4) The trimmer used in manual calibration adjustments is not required in the automatic calibrations. Therefore this trimmer must not be adjusted during or after the automatic calibration. 13-3. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SPECS The thermostatic control system of the reagent chamber consists of a refrigeration system based upon Peltier modules, which are affixed underneath the circular aluminum chamber. This system maintains reagents at low temperature. The system has refrigeration limits when the ambient temperature exceeds 28ºC, consequently the reagent chamber temperature increases beyond the preset temperature. The electronics of the temperature regulation is inside the "REAGENT CONTROLLER" board. A reagent controller board was produced up to July 2004, which had fixed regulation of temperature. The controller used an approximate value of 5ºC as reference. After 15th July 2004, a new controller board was introduced in the production, giving the user a facility to select temperature between 5ºC and 15ºC. 13-3.1. REAGENT CONTROLLER P/N.15-04313-03 (OBSOLETE) Unadjustable temperature at 5°C (installed prior to July 2004) The control is realized by varying the Peltier supply voltage from 16 to 28 volt approximately through a feedback system between the temperature sensor LM35 (located under the aluminum chamber) and the 400 Watt power supply. The comparator (chip U6B) changes the state, when by system fault a temperature exceeding 43ºC is read. In this case the switch (MOSFET Q2) interrupts voltage to the Peltier modules. If one desires to interrupt the refrigeration through Setup Analyzer then the same MOSFET disconnects the system through software. When the ambient conditions exceed the extreme operating conditions (18ºC and 32ºC) the system limits are evident. Particularly, the ice formation in the reagent chamber is possible below 18ºC and beyond 28ºC the preset temperature value of 5ºC starts rising. 13-3.2. REAGENT CONTROLLER BOARD P/N 15-05211-0 Temp. adjustable from 5°C to 15°C. (installed from July 2004 onwards). This electronic circuit as compared to the previous circuit allows the refrigeration chamber to reach lower temperatures (below 10ºC). In addition the user can select the desired operating temperature in the setup. The real value of the selected temperature will be displayed on the analyzer display. The temperature sensor is read by the µC U3 767, which in turn proportionally regulates the voltage of the 400W power supply. Because of the limited excursion of the regulation under a certain temperature value, the µC 767 interrupts the operation of the cross blower fan to avoid excessive decrease in temperature. The final regulation is optimized between 8°C to 28°C (+/1,5°C) of ambient. When the room temperature exceeds the 40ºC, this circuit also interrupts the system for defect. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 8 A supplementary safety circuit consisting of a NTC (NTC1), located near the power connector J2, completely cuts off voltage to the Peltiers. The purpose of the circuit is to detect temperatures higher than 75ºC on the printed circuit, possibly caused by the false contacts in the connections. This circuit also functions with the analyzer in the sleep mode, thus assuring the selected temperature. 13-4. BARCODE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS The calibration involves the aligning of the barcode scanner beam in the precise direction corresponding to the reagent bottle and the sample tube in the serum plate. The mechanical adjustment should be performed with the aid of the diagnostic program. The barcode module should also be programmed for the special reading of up to five types of barcode labels. 13-4.1. PROGRAMMING OF SERUM/REAGENT BARCODE Click on "Mechanics" button to access the barcode diagnostics program. The available functions allow the user to verify and optically align the scanner beam on the reagent and sample barcode labels. It is also possible to read the information of the barcode label if it is present. The mechanical alignment can be carried out by repeatedly clicking on the desired sample or reagent barcode button. It is possible to precisely align the scanner beam on the barcode label after loosening the mounting screws. The barcode controller can also be programmed in the diagnostics program by using a specific floppy disk available upon request. 13-4.2. BARCODE - MECHANICAL CALIBRATION In the same "Mechanics" page, select the desired barcode scanner to be calibrated mechanically. Click the desired function laser scan command button "Read Barcode on Reagent" or "Read Barcode on Serum". Verify that the scanner beam is precisely centered on the barcode label of the reagent bottle or the sample tube in the serum plate. It is possible to correctly align the barcode modules by loosening the mounting screws. After the alignment, fasten the screws. Refer to Paragraph 13-6. entitled "Primary Tube Sensor Calibration and Specifications" for the final verification of the correct operation of the barcode module. 13-5. ISE MODULE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS The calibration involves the adjustment of sensibility threshold of bubble sensor and the verification of correct operation of the hydraulic circuit and electronics. The bubble sensor calibration should be performed by measuring the voltage of the electronic photo-switch with an empty and a full fluid tube inside. The difference between the two measurement values must be of at least 0.5 Volts. The diagnostic program for the I.S.E module, allows verification of the drift of the electrodes, the efficiency of the hydraulic circuit and the bubble sensor. It does not allow the calculation of slope and therefore the real efficiency of the electrodes. The commands are as follows: "ISE Module Prime", "Read ISE", "Fill Up ISE", "Empty Out ISE", and "Read Sensors". The first command "ISE Module Prime" is essential for setting bubble sensor sensitivity threshold, when accessing the diagnostic program for the first time. The command, “Read ISE” reads potentials of all the electrodes in mV. The potential of the REF electrode is displayed separately in the upper section of the screen. The clicking of the “Fill up ISE” button performs a baseline sampling followed by a reading. Reading repeatedly with “Read ISE” it is possible to observe the potential and therefore the drift. The expected values should be between +500mV and -500mV. The REF should have a value between 2.2 Volt to 2.9 Volt. The values other than the expected values may indicate an improper flow in the electrodes or in the worst case a defective electronic circuit. A typical example of electrodes malfunction is encountered when handling the electrodes during the maintenance. One can inadvertently touch the gold-coated contact pin of the electrode, causing an electrostatic charge in the electrode. In this case, it is possible to observe the continuously changing values of the potential. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 8 To verify the efficiency of the bubble sensor, click on "Read Sensors" button to display the fluid tube "Full Value" and "Empty Value" in volts. The difference between the two values should be higher than 0.5 Volts for the correct operation of the sensor. A difference of less than 0.5 Volt indicates that the optical sensor has not detected sufficient variation between air and liquid. This may be due to fluid being stationary in the segment of tube across bubble sensor or the tube has lost its original transparency. Finally, the command "Empty ISE" is a useful option for emptying the ISE mixing funnel. 13-5.1. ISE BUBBLE SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE To calibrate the ISE bubble sensor, proceed with the following: a) Click "Analyzer". b) Click "Diagnostic". c) Click "General Diagnostic". d) Click "ISE MODULE". Place a bottle containing Baseline on the small tray in the ISE module and click "ISE Module Prime" and wait for the termination of prime cycle. e) Click "Read Sensor", and wait for the values (Full Value and Empty Value) to appear automatically on the screen. The difference between the two values should be more than 0.5 Volt. NOTE: The measurement value generated by sensor for tube filled with Baseline (Full Value), must be between 3 Volts (minimum) and 4.2 Volts maximum. If otherwise, then lift out the ISE module from its track rail (even with the analyzer turned on) and turn the TR1 trimmer adjustment screw clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the voltage. See Figure 1. THE TRIMMER TR1 IS LOCATED ON THE REAR OF ISE MODULE, JUST BEHIND THE BUBBLE SENSOR ISE MODULE Figure 1 f) g) Put back the module in its place and press the key F5 to perform a general reset. Repeat the preceding steps (for tube filled with liquid) until the desired values are obtained. NOTE: In case the delta results are below the threshold of 0.5 Volts, this may be due to incorrect observation of calibration procedure, or malfunction of hydraulic circuit or photo-switch. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 8 13-5.2. ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION It is very important to control the flow of liquids in the hydraulic circuit. During the prime function, the Baseline must completely fill up the Reference electrode, thus keeping the hydraulic circuit full and without air bubbles - starting from the "Y"-connector to the ground electrode. CAUTION! Any interruption in the flow of liquid causes air bubbles and affects measurement of potentials of all the electrodes. Enter the "Utility" page and click on the icon "Prime ISE". After the prime function terminates, gently lift out the ISE module and observe if the hydraulic circuit is full. Put back in place the ISE module and press F5 to reset. 13-5.3. ISE ELECTRODES POTENTIAL VERIFICATION It is possible to make a precise measurement of the electrodes potential through Diagnostic program. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Prior to verification, the ISE system must be primed. After entering the diagnostic page concerning the ISE, click "Fill Up". In this operation the Reference Solution fills up all the electrodes including the reference electrode. After the sampling read the potentials by clicking on the "Read ISE". After some seconds the monitor displays the mV measurement values of 4 selected electrodes. The electrode potential is expressed in Volts and is displayed on the upper part of the screen. The expected values for Ref, Na, K, Cl and CO2 electrodes should be within the range -400mV to +400mV. If the values do not correspond then there is a probability that a hydraulic circuit problem did not let the solution correctly fill up the electrodes. Note that, if the electrodes are empty, they can assume any potential value. It is also possible that only the REF electrode is empty. In this case, it will affect the level of the other electrodes. Verify the correct operation of peristaltic pump for emptying and the pinch-valve tubing. Other situations that may cause a malfunction of ISE module are as follows: 1) One or more electrodes out of range because they were subjected to electrostatic discharge during handling 2) Defective preamplifier 3) Incorrect reference solution NOTE: The reading of potential does not indicate any exhaustion or expiration of an electrode. The electrode's efficiency is verified only through the SLOPE performed by a calibration and the performance characteristics listed in the package insert. For additional details refer to ISE troubleshooting. 13-6. ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION The calibration consists of sensitivity threshold adjustment of electro-optical system (LED and photodiode). The optical element exploits the principle of reflection. The infrared light beam emitted by LED is reflected back from the primary tube and received by the photodiode sensor element. One can proceed with calibration after placing three 10mm diameter primary tubes with appropriate adapter in a triangular configuration (i.e.: in positions 02, 03, 29 on the serum plate.) There are two primary tube sensors. The one on the left of serum chamber detects the presence or absence of primary tubes appropriate to the left sampling arm. The one located on the right of serum chamber detects the presence or absence of tubes pertaining to the right sampling arm used for aspiration of serum for ISE, starter and dilution. The sensitivity threshold should be adjusted in such a way that the primary tube sensor detects only the primary tube and not the interference from the adjacent tubes. A green LED located on top of the detecting circuit provide the user with a visual indication of the sensitivity threshold monitoring for distinguishing the primary tube. The removal of front casing is necessary for making any adjustment or service. As a first step use unlabelled 10mm tubes for calibrating in worst conditions. Manually rotate the serum plate with slow motion so that the three primary tubes #02, 03, and 29 sequentially move past the primary tube sensor. Bear in mind that the waste funnel is the reference point of the sensor located on the same axis. Observe that with each primary tube moving past the primary tube sensor turns on and off the green LED. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 8 A sensor with an excessive sensibility does not distinguish the spacing between the primary tubes and on the contrary it may not detect the presence of a tube particularly the one located on the inner circle further away. The sensitivity is adjusted through trimmers TR1 located on the boards 15-04280-01 and 1504278-01. Turning the trimmer adjusting screw clockwise increases the sensitivity and turning it counterclockwise decreases the sensitivity. Keep in mind that the analyzer must always function with labeled tubes therefore it is preferable to adjust calibration to lower sensitivity rather than to higher sensitivity. The final test is performed by fully scanning the serum plate and by inserting at least six tubes with barcode labels. Placing three tubes in triangle formation in positions #02, 03, and 29. Now place three tubes in positions #15, 16, and 42. Once completed, go to the "Patient Entry" page and enter "Options" to start "Scan Tray-All". At the end of scanning, if the primary tube sensor has correctly tracked the presence of all the six tubes, then their barcode numbers should be visible in the patient page. This means that the primary tube sensor and the barcode scanner have functioned properly. If scanning problems occur, the following two types of error messages may appear: a) b) 13-7. "Label Not Found in Pos.28": all primary tubes have been detected. The barcode scanner has not read the barcode label correctly because it is defective. Barcode numbers of 5 primary tubes displayed, instead of 6 tubes. The primary sensor has not detected the remaining one primary tube. Verify the mechanical calibration of the serum plate and ultimately the sensitivity of the optical detection circuit. ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION This program performs a limitless cycle of mechanical stress on the analyzer. Generally this program is used for verifying the efficiency of replaced mechanical devices after service and repair. Section - XIII Measurements & Calibrations BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 8 SECTION - XIV TROUBLE - SHOOTING 14-1. INTRODUCTION Any investigation of malfunction, which might occur, must begin with verification of power supply and the ambient conditions. During troubleshooting the following parameters for correct analyzer operation must be verified: Power Supply: Ambient Temperature: Relative Humidity: 100 – 240~, 50/60 Hz 18°-32°C 10% - 90% RH non-condensating In case the parameters do not correspond to the indicated range of values, then observe the following procedures and the appropriate corrective actions. Prior to servicing the BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer, switch off the instrument and disconnect the power cordset. 14-1.1. TROUBLE-SHOOTING CUVETTE TEMPERATURE CUVETTE TEMPERATURE SYMPTOMS CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Cuvettes do not reach operating temperature of 30°, 32° and 37°C or unstable temperature. 1) 2) 3) 14-1.2. Ambient temperature out of limits. Reenter ambient temperature limits 18°- 32°C. Defective electronic circuit causing unstable temperature or for temperature to exceed maximum limits. Replace the temperature sensor or the master power board or the chip µC764. Refer to "Measurement and Calibration" procedures for the reading station outlined in the Section XIII to find out the defective device. After replacing the temperature sensor, there may be temperature fluctuation of ± 0.5°C. In this case make adjustments as per calibration procedure. A defective Peltier module will cause temperatures to be lower or near ambient temperature. Check if there are one or more defective Peltiers. Even one defective Peltier can stop the temperature monitoring system. TROUBLE-SHOOTING REAGENT CHAMBER TEMP. REAGENTS CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SYMPTOMS The base of the reagent chamber does not reach the set lower temperatures (5°-15°C) or some times seems to be heating. In some cases excessive cooling with ice formation. Section - XIV CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 1) 2) 3) Defective Cross-flow blower causing high temperature. Verify and replace if necessary. Interrupted Peltier causing refrigeration failure. Verify and replace defective Peltier. Defective temperature sensor or reagent control board causing overheat or ice formation. Verify and replace the defective part. Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 11 14-1.3. TROUBLE-SHOOTING POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS SYMPTOMS 1) The analyzer turns off suddenly without any apparent reason. The vacuum pump system makes unusual noises. 2) UPS (if installed) generates continuous alarms. 3) The analyzer generates random resets of mechanical devices or the software. 14-1.4. CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 1) 2) 3) Power supply problems: defective main power, power cord not properly connected, UPS connected incorrectly. Get your main power line checked and repaired by a competent electrician. Connect power cord correctly. Main power line generating high surge voltage due to lack of ground connection. Request your electric company to verify and repair the line if necessary. Defective UPS or discharged batteries. Disconnect UPS temporarily to verify if it is causing the problem If necessary substitute with new UPS. Try to recharge the batteries or substitute them. Bear in mind that the UPS supplied with the instrument is universal type and it cannot be used in extremely critical situations where the electrical lines are subject to large surges. In such cases it is recommended to use a more sophisticated UPS (i.e. NOBREAK, etc.) TROUBLE-SHOOTING POWER UP PROBLEMS POWER UP PROBLEMS SYMPTOMS After turning analyzer, happens. CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS on the nothing 1) No power due to various causes. The monitor is off; only the After turning on, the program loading (bootstrap) by the computer is interrupted and the computer blocks. Turning off the computer with the push button becomes necessary. 1) The analyzer has been turned off incorrectly through main The instrument or one of its peripheral devices does not turn on Section - XIV refrigerator fan can be heard. Verify all the connections and the correct operation of the UPS. 2) The computer has not been turned on through its push button. Press push button to turn on the computer. 3) Hardware problem: defective motherboard or power supply. After verifying, repair or replace. switch or sudden main power line interruption with consequent damaging of some files. Wait for the disks verification to be performed automatically by the system. Verify any errors in the hard disk. Contact the service engineer for any problems. 2) Hardware conflict between the system peripheral devices or damaged peripheral device. The peripheral device must be reconfigured or substituted in case of damage. Contact service engineer. Verify that the UPS group is turned on, the electrical cables are correctly connected and check the fuses. If fuses need replacement then observe the following procedure: 1) Turn off the instrument by pressing the main switch on the rear panel and unplug power cord. 2) Extract the fuse-holder (located above the main switch on the rear panel) by gently opening the latch with a tool. Discard the old fuses and replace with new fuses, which match the selected voltage rating indicated on the rear panel label. Insert the fuse-holder into the compartment and push until its latch snaps back into the position (see Fig. 3, Chapter B). Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 11 14-1.5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD THE MOUSE & KEYBOARD SYMPTOMS The system performs the boot correctly, the analyzer logo appears and seems to be ready, but the cordless keyboard and mouse do not work. 14-1.6. CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 1) 2) The RF Receiver cable disconnected from the rear panel. Check and correctly connect the cable. Exhausted batteries in the keyboard or the mouse. Substitute the batteries with the analyzer power on; press the devices button to put them in communication (setup). The sequence is: RF Receiver, keyboard and the mouse. TROUBLE-SHOOTING RESET ERRORS Reset Errors: Serum Plate/Reagent Tray/Diluter/Arm SYMPTOMS The analyzer after routine boot displays an error message about one of the following modules: • Reset error of serum plate • Reset error of reagent tray • Reset error of diluter • Reset error sampling arm etc. Diluter blocked: Diluter functions but does not reset: Section - XIV CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 1) 2) Inadvertent accidental blockage by operator of one or more modules. For correct operation perform a general reset (F5 or Reset Icon). If the problem persists the problem may lie in the mechanics or electronics of one of the modules. The defective module seems to be operating but an error message appears. NOTE: To diagnose a mechanical or electronic problem is quite simple. Generally speaking a mechanical defect produces a partial movement in the device and careful observation of the mechanism during operation one can easily identify the problem. The electronic problems are related to motor drivers and the position sensors. In case the device is functional but does not stop in correct position, the problem in the reset sensor. Depending upon the module it may be a photo-switch or Hall sensor. These specified problems might associate to diluter, reagent tray, serum plate, cuvettes plate, and the washing piston. If the device makes no movement then there is a defective circuit of the power driver or a defective motor. Consideration should be given to the fact that all modules have the same basic structure: motor, driver, position sensor and the micro-controller. The service operations for resolving the problem are deliberately confined to the substitution of the defective devices already mentioned. In case the service engineer is unable to resolve the problem, the whole electronic circuit of the module can be substituted. It is important to verify that the devices are properly connected and that the cables and connectors are free of defects. It is also important to try to distinguish the hydraulic problems from those of electronics as regards analyzer malfunctions. Any improper evaluation of problems may lead to inadmissible loss of time. Outlined below are some procedures for quickly locating the problems. DILUTER Defective motor, driver, micro-controller, connecting cable, or PCB. Repair or replace. Defective photo-switch, micro-controller, connecting cables, or PCB. Repair or replace. In case the Diluter is damaged or defective then it should be completely substituted. Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 11 Reset Errors: Serum Plate/Reagent Tray/Diluter/Arm SYMPTOMS CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Sampling arm moves vertically without resetting: SAMPLING ARM Defective Hall sensor or positioned incorrectly. Repair or Replace Sampling Arm blocked: Defective driver or interrupted motor. Bear in mind that the arm does not make angular (swivel) motion until after the vertical reset. To verify the correct functioning of the three arm sensors (Hall sensor for UP/DOWN motion, Liquid Sensor, Photo-switch for angular motion) observe the three corresponding LEDs located on a small PVC bracket near the arm shaft. If the arm is moved up/down manually, the upper LED lights to indicate the correct functioning of the Hall sensor. The touching with a finger of the arm needle will light the middle LED. Swiveling the arm to the left or right will light and switch off the lower LED. Repair or replace defective motor or driver. Zero position calibration of the sampling arm not maintained in successive resets: The upper part of the arm (needle head) has loose screws and is not secured to shaft properly. Dirt in the Zero position photoswitch or the photo-switch shutter. Tighten the screws. Clean with a brush the photo-switch or the shutter. The arm needle holder does not heat up: Interrupted heater circuit inside the sampling arm, in this case the liquid sensor functions as the LED lights up just by the bare touch of the finger. On the other hand if the LED does not light up then the electrical circuit is interrupted at the source. Verify the power supply starting from the source, the Master Power Board 15-04209-01. If the arm is damaged or defective then it is recommended to substitute it completely. The serum plate rotates during reset and stops at an incorrect position with a screen message "Reset Error...": The tray does not stop at the container number 1 position and issues an error message "Reset Error...": Section - XIV SERUM PLATE Most likely the Hall sensor malfunction. The magnet on the upper rim of the serum plate is not properly aligned with the Hall sensor. Defective Hall sensor or connecting circuit interrupted. No rubber mat over the rotating serum base. In the absence of rubber mat the magnet position is displaces a few millimeters downwards thus causing misalignment with the Hall sensor. Other various causes: Magnet detached from the plate or defective electronic circuit (Board 15-04282-01 & Board 1504422-01). The serum plate resets correctly but does not respect the positions and the sampling needle descends in the wrong positions. Most likely the serum plate slips on the rubber mat during rotation. Remove and wash the rubber mat with a neutral soap and water. If the problem persists then the causes may be as follows: Transmission problem with one of the following devices: Timing Belt, motor, driver and Control Board (15-04422-01). 1) 2) REAGENT TRAY Defective Hall sensor or the sensor out of range from magnet. Repair or replace. Defective belt drive, stepping motor, driver, or Control Board 15-05211-01. Repair or replace. Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 11 14-2. COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE-SHOOTING The diagnosis of computer system malfunction should be quite simple, as the problem generally occurs during the powering up of the analyzer. The most frequent problems are generally the loss of files or a hard disk malfunction. Statistically these problems almost always are caused by incorrect operations as follows: Turning off the analyzer incorrectly, using back-up disks that is infected with a virus, incorrect use of the computer, etc. 14-2.1. TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE COMPUTER MODULE COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING SYMPTOMS CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS The analyzer starts up but no LCD display. 1. Probably a defective VGA driver or incorrect connection of the LCD display. Check on the rear of display that the lamp is lit. Check that the VGA board is properly inserted into the slot of mainboard. Make sure that all the cables of display including the inverter cables are properly connected. If necessary replace VGA Board. 2. The inverter of the display lamp power supply defective or incorrectly connected. Check that the inverter cable is correctly connected. If necessary replace inverter. NOTE: It is also possible to connect an external CRT monitor to identify the problem. The touch-screen functions now and then only in some zones of the screen. Dirty screen, defective touch-screen driver, or defective serial port where the driver is connected. Gently clean the LCD display screen with a soft lint free cloth moistened with an appropriate neutral detergent and delicately wipe to dry up. Check that the flat cable of touch-screen is properly connected to the driver. If necessary replace driver or serial port. After loading Windows, the loading of the process program starts and is visible on the progression bar. The progression bar inactive, followed by an error message "Impossible to Reset Analyzer". All electromechanical devices remain motionless. 1. No communication between the computer and the process electronics. Check that the flat cable across IBM and the Main Logic Board (on the rear of the reading station) is properly connected. 2. Defective RS-232 serial communication port of the computer or the micro-controller. Check and replace if necessary. 3. Defective Main Logic Board. Verify and replace if necessary. No communication between the analyzer and the host computer. Defective relevant serial ports or interrupted connecting cable. Verify and replace serial port. Check that the interface cable is correctly connected. NOTE: If the interface with the host computer is done for the first time then there may be a software problem. To avoid software problems, use specific software protocols for verification of communications. Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 11 14-2.1.1. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for a computer's hard-drive. 14-2.2. TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE BOOTSTRAP BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING SYMPTOMS CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS After turning on the computer the bootstrap process interrupts and displays an error message: “NTLDR not found press any key to restart". There is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive of the computer. Remove floppy disk and press any key. During the bootstrap process, an error message appears on the screen: “Disk boot failure, insert System Disk and press Enter" 1. Hard disk cable disconnected. Connect the hard disk cable properly. 2. Damaged or unformatted hard disk. If necessary, replace the hard disk. Format the hard disk. 3. Incorrect configuration in BIOS setup. Verify the STANDARD CMOS SETUP and particularly the configuration of the Hard Disk. NOTE: Guidelines for installation of the operative system or the application programs on the BT3000 PLUS (complete reinstallation and/or substitution of hard disk and/or replacement of motherboard) is required for motherboards of new generation. 4. Configure the startup sequence in BIOS setup with CD-ROM drive as the first peripheral, the hard disk as second peripheral and the floppy disk drive as the third peripheral. Caution! After installation of the Windows® 2000 PRO operative system, restore the original BOOT configuration. 5. Install Windows 2000 PRO by starting the computer with the CD and carefully select FAT32 as file system. Insert the user name, organization name and the password: <<administrator enzo>>. 6. Enter Control Panel - System - Hardware and then Device Manager to verify the correct installation of all the devices. Eventually remedy the causes of any conflicts and if necessary, install an appropriate updated driver for any unidentified device (Audio, additional serial port, and touchscreen etc.). 7. Install application software of the external peripherals (i.e. printer, UPS, etc.) 8. Install application software of BT 3000 PLUS. Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 11 BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING SYMPTOMS CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS After power on and during the bootstrap process, password request window appears on the display. Enter Control Panel - Users and Passwords – remove the "X" mark from the box corresponding to the <<User must enter name and password to use this computer, and to change passwords and other settings>>. Possible problems during reinstallation of hardware devices (i.e. additional serial boards, touchscreen etc.) Correct drivers have not been installed. Previously a board by another manufacturer was installed and is still present in the system even if physically disconnected. 14-3. Note: In the case of serial board, two new gates COM3 and COM4 are assigned to replace COM5 and COM6. In such a case it is necessary to enter the Advanced Settings of the appropriate serial communication port and modify it manually. UNRELIABLE RESULTS OF ANALYSES General Considerations: Any errors by the operator in application of method, use of appropriate reagent, or a sample of unknown origin are excluded a priori. 14-4. METHOD FOR VERIFICATION OF PHOTOMETRIC INSTABILITY It is possible to make quick verification of photometric stability by using the general diagnostic program, excluding sampling problems. Fill up (in "Photometer" mode) all the cuvettes with H2O through appropriate command. In case of hydraulic defects, manually fill the cuvettes. Select a pair of interference filters, where 700nm filter is always selected as the second filter. Perform a zeroing and then the consecutive readings, while observing the stability of absorbances of all the cuvettes (last column on the right). Normally the values should be around +/- 1 point. Repeat a few times after short interval of some minute to insure long-term stability of readings. If considerable variations are observed in a short period of time, then instability in the photometric lamp is to blame. If the instability regards one or more cuvettes, then it is likely that there are foreign debris or moving corpuscles inside. In this case remove the foreign debris or corpuscles by using the aspiration tube of the washing piston plunger (located on the upper end of the piston plunger). To verify the photometric instability (relevant only to the photometer), execute the command "Reading" followed by "read zero filter". The offset values of all the channels will be displayed. The values should be stable and within the range of 0 to 150 points. If otherwise then one should suspect the infiltration of water in the photometer caused by a defect in the hydraulic circuit. In this case one should assume that the water might also have seeped into the cuvette rotor. In this case it will be necessary to completely remove the cuvette plate and rotor, and then thoroughly dry the whole system including the cuvettes. 14-5. VERIFICATION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION The hydraulic circuit consists of the diluter, peristaltic pumps, and pinch valves. The instrument detects any malfunction of the preceding devices during power on. Appropriate alarms indicate the type of problem: dilutor reset error, collapsed or sticking tube in pinch-valve, water lacking etc. The messages are generated during test runs for lack of water and the dilutor reset error. Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 11 The poor reproduction of results is generally caused by an imprecise aspiration of sample or reagent, insufficient vacuum level for the reading cuvette washing and drying. In the first case verify the correct operation of the dilutor, correct alternating motion of the piston and the absence of air bubble in the exposed hydraulic circuit. As regards the cuvette washing and drying phase, verify the water consumption necessary for the washing of 34 cuvettes. To verify the water consumption place the water intake tube (from the external water supply container) in a graduated beaker or cylinder filled with at least 500 ml of distilled water and launch the function "Wash Cuvette". At the end one should observe a water consumption of at least 150 ml, which is equivalent to 4,5 ml per cuvette. Any lack in amount of water consumption may depend on scarce vacuum level or a partial occlusion in the washing piston. A frequently neglected additional cause of photometric instability is due to the poor overall maintenance of the analyzer. Particularly the irregular routine washing of the cuvettes may cause a progressive contamination the cuvettes through deposits, which are difficult to eliminate. Just consider a gradual stratification of reagents on the inner surfaces of the reading cuvette, their gradual release during tests and the possible consequences. In such cases it is of utmost importance to perform a thorough washing by using hydrochloric acid 0,1N (instead of routine washing solution) and leaving it inside the cuvette for at least 5 minutes. Then follow up with a standard H2O wash. After having given consideration to the preceding circumstances, an error may emerge during the photometric zeroing phase caused by variable conditions of transparencies of cuvettes during the washing progression. Therefore perform a "SETLAMP" to restore the reference conditions and then a "Zeroing " or "Photometer zeroing". 14-6. ISE TROUBLESHOOTING If the routine maintenance is performed regularly, the ISE module functions correctly. The most common problems encountered in the ISE Module are as follows: a) b) c) a) Calibration errors. Unreliable sample results with flags. Error messages of air bubbles. CALIBRATION ERRORS The causes may be due to various reasons and can be diagnosed through close examination of mV values of slopes. Typical values of calibration potentials in mV: std low = std high = -8 mV +22 mV Na std low = std high = -10 mV + 5 mV difference 15mV (slope 63 mV) Cl std low = std high = +6 mV -4 mV difference 10mV (slope 50 mV) CO2 std low = std high = +4 mV -6 mV difference 10mV (slope 32mV) K difference 30 mV (slope 57 mV) The above-mentioned values are indicative and may deviate due to the wear and tear of the electrodes. A positional error or an incorrect concentration of reagents may determine a considerable variation of potentials and slopes. The mV values (in brackets) in the calibrations printout can give additional indications, which are useful for the diagnostics. For example: Std low -8mV Std high +22mV (-208 -200) (-178 -200) One can observe in the above example the Baseline value (-200), which must be always included between two Std values. In fact the value -200 is between the two values -208 and -178. Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 11 Various combinations of error ► ► Inversion of Buffer / Baseline Considerable increase of potentials (up to 100mV), decrement of slopes. Insertion of identical reagents: Buffer / Buffer or Baseline / Baseline. The potentials are almost within norms but there is considerable decrement of slopes. In the above items, the Baseline values shown in the preceding example shall not be coherent. b) OBSTRUCTIONS CAUSED BY PROTEINS IN ELECTRODES CL &CO2 After approximately 150 to 200 samples, the Cl & CO2 electrodes may be periodically obstructed. In this case, one observes an increase in the slopes of K & Na, and decrement in the slopes of Cl & CO2. Follow the instructions for the cleaning of electrodes. A partially occluded Ground electrode may also cause a similar error. Generally, the obstructions are caused by the foreign matter and not by protein. Carefully observe the cleaning procedures as outlined in the Figures 14-1 and 14-2 on the ensuing pages. NOTE: A prolonged obstruction of the Cl electrode may progressively obstruct the electrodes below it (CO2 and Bypass). For cleaning these electrodes, use syringe for the CO2 and the cleaning tool on the Bypass as shown in the Figure 14-2. c) BAD RESULTS OF SAMPLES: Generally, this phenomenon occurs during sampling but it may take place afterwards. Observe the above-mentioned diagnostic procedures. d) ERROR MESSAGES, AIR BUBBLES, FLAGS During a calibration or a run an error message "Air bubbles" may appear. The error may be momentary and not appear afterwards. In this case, it means a casual formation of bubbles. If it persists then it may be due to problems of hydraulic nature. a) ISE funnel takes long time to empty. It may be caused by defective or worn peristaltic pump for draining or an obstruction in the electrodes stack. Repair or replace. b) Prime operation failure. The Prime also calibrates the bubble sensor. Check that prime is performed properly. c) Collapsed tube in the ISE pinch-valve. The Baseline solution doesn't enter the Reference electrode and the funnel doesn't empty. The Reference electrode is filled during the prime. Check and correct. e) RESULTS WITH FLAG "D" During the reading, the flag "D" on one or more electrodes indicates a drift of potential greater than 2 mV. The phenomenon may be determined by one of the following causes: ● ● ● ● ● ● Defective electrode. Electrode to be reconditioned. Partial occlusion of the electrode. Incorrect reagents. No washing after a consistent run. Correlation with general problems already explained. Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 11 NOTICE CHLORIDE ELECTRODE NEEDLE TOOL P/N 03254 It is often possible to extend the life of a chloride electrode by using the supplied CHLORIDE ELECTRODE NEEDLE TOOL. 1) Grasp the NEEDLE TOOL as shown. Gently insert the tip of the needle tool into either end of electrode. Keeping your fingers off the opposite end of electrode, slowly but firmly push the needle straight through the electrode's inner core until the needle tip appears at the other end of the electrode (be careful not to bend the needle inside the electrode). Wipe off any debris on the needle tip and gently pull the needle back out of the electrode. Wipe off the needle and remove any debris or moisture from the electrode surface. CHLORIDE ELECTRODE NEEDLE TOOL 2) Reinstall the electrode into the electrode housing in the correct order. 3) Install the electrode housing into the analyzer. Connect tubing and prime the ISE module completely. If the electrode's performance does not improve, contact your local Technical Support. WARNING NEEDLE TOOL can damage all other electrodes (K, Na, CO2, REF). Do not use! Chloride Electrode Cleaning Procedure Figure 14-1 Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 11 NOTE: FOR CONVENIENCE SAKE, IT IS IMPORTANT TO DETACH THESE ELECTRODES IN SMALL GROUPS FROM THE REST TO AVOID POSSIBLE ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE WHEN HANDLING A LONG STRING OF ELECTRODES. OBSERVE THE CLEANING PROCEDURE OUTLINED HERE FOR OTHER ELECTRODES. GND Electrode REF Reference Electrode BI-DISTILLED WATER CLEANING TOOL, P/N 03254 REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS IN THE FIGURE 1 REFERENCE SOLUTION Cl Na Sodium Chloride Electrode Electrode CO2 CLEANING PROCEDURE Carbon Dioxide 1) Carefully insert the tip of 5ml - 10 ml syringe filled with appropriate solution onto the top duct of electrode assembly as shown. 2) Inject solution until all the solution is forced through interconnecting bores of the electrodes and flows out from the bottom electrode, thus thoroughly removing any contamination. K REF Reference Electrode WARNING a) PUSH THE PLUNGER ONLY TO EJECT THE SOLUTION. DO NOT PULL THE PLUNGER TO ASPIRATE THE SOLUTION INSIDE ELECTRODES. THIS WILL CAUSE IRREPARABLE DAMAGE AND CONTAMINATION TO THE POTASSIUM ELECTRODE WITH Cl OR CO2 PARTICLES. b) DO NOT USE PLASTIC STRING FOR CLEANING THE REFERENCE OR Na ELECTRODES AS IT MAY DAMAGE THE ELECTRODES INTERNALLY ISE ELECTRODES CLEANING PROCEDURE Figure 14-2 Section - XIV Troubleshooting BT3000 PLUS-Service Potassium Electrode Page 11 of 11 SECTION XV BT 3000 PLUS SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE THE FOLLOWING IS LISTING OF SUBASSEMBLIES AND INDIVIDUAL PARTS, WHICH ARE AVAILABLE FOR FIELD REPLACEMENT. INDIVIDUAL PARTS OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED SUCH AS MECHANICAL PARTS, FASTENERS ETC. ARE PROVIDED ONLY AS PART OF SUBASSEMBLY. THIS WIDE SELECTION OF SPARE PARTS ALLOW THE SERVICE ENGINEER TO TAILOR CONFIGURATIONS TO SPECIFIC REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TO PROVIDE REPAIR FLEXIBILITY. PLEASE ASK IF YOU REQUIRE OTHER ITEMS NOT LISTED HERE, AS THIS MAY BE POSSIBLE. 15-1. READING STATION MODULE SPARE PARTS PART NO. DESCRIPTION 02634 READING CUVETTE 02765 LAMP RETAINING SPRING CLIP 03-04442-05 READING STATION - BT3000 PLUS 06-04433-01 MASTER LOGIC MODULE 07-04334-03 CUVETTE ROTOR HUB ASSY 08-04347-01 TEMPERATURE & HALL SENSOR ASSY 08-04533-01 CUVETTE MOTOR ASSY 08-04695-01 QUARTZ PRISM WITH LENS ASSY 08-04981-02 PELTIER FAN ASSY 08-05132-01 REFERENCE DIODE 11-04779-01 CUVETTE PLATE WITH 34 CUVETTES 11-05083-01 CUVETTE FAN KIT 11-05136-01 MASTER POWER BOARD KIT 11-05137-01 MASTER POWER MODULE (ex 06-04434-01) 11-05209-01 CARTUCCIA POMPA PERISTALTICA (ex 330.9072) 15-04270-01 P.C.B. - READING TRAY INTERFACE 30-04570-01 CUVETTE PELTIER - A 30-04570-02 CUVETTE PELTIER - B 330.5708 "O"-RING FOR CUVETTE 330.8688 TIMING BELT 150 TEETH FOR CUVETTE MOTOR 330.9321 TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP 12V, 35 WATTS, 9° 330.9334 SOCKET FOR HALOGEN LAMP Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 1 of 10 WASHING MODULE PART NO. DESCRIPTION 07-04850-01 WASHING MODULE ASSY 08-04405-01 WASHER PINCH VALVE ASSY (N.C.) 08-04569-01 PERISTALTIC PUMP ASSY FOR DILUTER 08-04572-01 FLUID CHAMBER PUMP 08-04573-01 STEPPING LINEAR ACTUATOR WASHING SYSTEM 08-04574-01 SAMPLING PINCH VALVE ASSY (N.C.) 08-04929-01 LIQUID SENSOR #WASHING STATION 11-04778-01 WASHING PISTON&PLUNGER ASSY 11-05046-01 DILUTER PUMP KIT (EX 08-04568-01) 15-04651-01 P.C.B. - OPTOCOUPLER 330.5664A PISTON SEAL 330.5703 O-RING FOR DILUTER 662.0610 WASHING PISTON KIT (ex 02586) PHOTOMETER PART NO. DESCRIPTION 04051 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 700 NM 330.9336 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 340 NM 330.9337B INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 380 NM 330.9338 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 405 NM 330.9339 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 436 NM 330.9340 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 478 NM 330.9342 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 510 NM 330.9344 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 546 NM 330.9345 INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 578 NM 330.9347B INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 630 NM 662.1017 FLAT CABLE 16-16C FOR PREAMPLIFIER 06-05133-01 PHOTOMETER – COMPLETE (ex 662.1018) Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 2 of 10 15-2. REAGENT/REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SPARE PART NO. DESCRIPTION 03275 REAGENT PULLEY WITH MAGNET 06-04435-03 REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE 08-04537-01 CROSS BLOWER FAN ASSY 08-04633-01 REAGENT MOTOR ASSY 08-04699-01 REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 1-8) 08-04699-02 REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 9-16) 08-04699-03 REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 17-24) 08-04699-04 REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 25-32) 08-04699-05 REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 33-40) 11-04892-01 REAGENT BELT/PULLEY KIT (EX 330.8668) 11-05043-01 REAGENT HALL/TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT (EX 08-04539-02, 08-04540-03) 11-05155-01 REAGENTS REFRIGERATION ASSY 11-05227-01 REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE BOARD KIT (ex 15-04680-01) 12-04578-01 REAGENT CABLE 12-04711-01 REAGENT CONTROLLER CABLE 330.4605 PELTIER MODULE FOR REAGENTS 330.5709 "O"-RING Ø50.47 X 2.62 330.9351 BARCODE READER 15-3. SERUM MODULE SPARE PARTS PART NO. DESCRIPTION 02350 SERUM PULLEY 02444 ANTISKID MAT FOR SERUM PLATE 04-04445-04 SERUM MODULE COMPLETE 06-04486-01 SERUM CONTROLLER MODULE 07-04893-01 SERUM PLATE WITH TUBE ADAPTERS 08-04349-01 SERUM MOTOR ASSY 08-04490-01 TENSION PULLEY SERUM 08-04681-01 SERUM PLATE COVER Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 3 of 10 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 11-05044-01 WASHING FUNNEL 11-05152-01 FUNNEL CAP WITH O-RING 12-04536-01 FLAT CABLE FOR PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "RIGHT" 12-04538-01 FLAT CABLE FOR PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "LEFT" 12-04714-02 SERUM CONTROLLER CABLE 15-04278-01 PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (RIGHT) 15-04280-01 PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (LEFT) 15-04282-01 HALL SENSOR ASSY #SERUM 15-04408-01 MOTOR DRIVER BOARD 20-04249-01 SERUM CHAMBER 20-04962-01 TUBE ADAPTER BUSHING #SERUM PLATE 20-04985-01 BOTTOM TUBE SPACER FOR SERUM PLATE 90-05201-01 FUNNEL CAP OPENER (TOOL) 330.8665 TIMING BELT 400 TEETH FOR SERUM PLATE DRIVE PULLEY 330.9351 BARCODE READER WITH CABLE 15-4. SAMPLER ARM SPARE PARTS PART NO. DESCRIPTION 03196A DAMPER KIT 06-04436-03 LEFT SAMPLING ARM COMPLETE WITH ENCODER 06-04437-03 RIGHT ISE ARM COMPLETE WITH ENCODER 06-04872-01 LEFT SAMPLING ARM (WITH ENCODER) WITHOUT ARM HEAD 06-04873-01 RIGHT SAMPLING ARM (WITH ENCODER) WITHOUT ARM HEAD 07-04438-02 ARM HEAD WITH HEATER ASSY 08-04733-01 ARM SWIVEL MOTOR ASSY 08-04891-01 ARM UP/DOWN MOTOR ASSY 11-05248-01 ARM CONTROLLER BOARD "L" 15-04765-01 KIT 15-04408-01 MOTOR DRIVER BOARD 15-04765-01 P.C.B. - ARM CONTROLLER (LEFT ARM) 15-04765-02 P.C.B. - ARM CONTROLLER (RIGHT ARM) 15-04767-01 P.C.B. - ENCODER 20-04148-01 THUMB SCREW FOR NEEDLE 330.8694 TIMING BELT 80 330.8695 TIMING BELT 150 662.0629A CLEANING TOOL FOR ARM NEEDLE 662.1011 SAMPLING NEEDLE Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 4 of 10 15-5. ISE MODULE SPARE PARTS PART NO. DESCRIPTION 03011 ISE PERISTALTIC PUMP ROTOR #08-04658-01 03254 CLEANING TOOL FOR CHLORIDE ELECTRODE 06-04655-01 ISE MODULE WITH ELECTRODES 07-04665-01 PREAMPLIFIER MODULE 08-04358-01 RESET SENSOR 08-04574-01 ISE DILUTER PINCH-VALVE ASSY (NC) 08-04656-01 ISE 2-WAY PINCH-VALVE ASSY 08-04657-01 DILUTER PERISTALTIC PUMP 08-04658-01 ISE PUMP MOTOR 08-04659-01 ISE LAMP ASSY 08-04760-02 ISE PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBE #03011 08-04978-01 FLUID DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD 11-05046-01 ISE DILUTER PUMP KIT (EX 08-04568-01) 11-05135-01 ISE CONTROLLER BOARD KIT 12-04713-01 ISE INTERFACE CABLE 12-05045-01 EXTENSION CABLE FOR ISE DILUTER 15-04408-02 MOTORS DRIVER BOARD #ISE 15-04503-01 ISE INTERFACE BOARD 20-04483-01 ISE FUNNEL 20-04484-01 PLATE FOR REAGENT BOTTLE 30-04763-01 ISE FILTER ASSY 330.5703 O-RING FOR DILUTER 330.9072 CARTRIDGE FOR DILUTER PERISTALTIC PUMP #08-04657-01 662.0705 ISE GROUND ELECTRODE 662.0710 REFERENCE ELECTRODE 662.0711 SODIUM (Na) ELECTRODE 662.0712 POTASSIUM (K) ELECTRODE 662.0713 CHLORIDE (Cl) ELECTRODE 662.0716 CO2 ELECTRODE 662.1024 ISE DISCHARGE ASSY Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 5 of 10 15-6. COMPUTER BOX PART NO. DESCRIPTION 06-04379-02 COMPUTER MODULE 06-04379-03 COMPUTER MODULE 07-04487-01 MAINBOARD IBM PENTIUM WITH RAM, PROCESSOR AND FAN 07-04487-03 INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD (MOTHERBOARD) 08-04594-01 IBM COOLING FAN 08-04738-02 LCD DISPLAY MODULE COMPLETE WITH TOUCH SCREEN 08-04738-03 LCD DISPLAY MODULE COMPLETE WITH TOUCH SCREEN 11-05030-01 POWER SUPPLY 300W WITH BRACKET for Pentium IV board only 12-04584-01 IBM SUPPLY CABLE 12-04593-01 ON/OFF PUSHBUTTON ASSY 12-04740-01 POWER SUPPLY CABLE #TOUCH SCREEN 12-04741-01 CABLE FOR TOUCH SCREEN 12-04877-01 EXTENSION CABLE FOR TOUCH SCREEN 330.2144 HARD DISK DRIVE 330.2150 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 3.5" 1.44 MB 330.2153 DVD/CD-ROM PLAYER 330.2167B FLAT CABLE 40-40-40 (for connecting DVD/CD ROM Player and Hard Disk to Mother Board) 330.7172 IBM POWER SUPPLY FORTRON 200W for Pentium III board only (old) 330.7173 POWER SUPPLY FORTRON 300W for Pentium IV board only 330.7235A CPU COOLING FAN for Pentium III board only (old) 330.7260 DIMM 128 Mb (RAM) for Pentium III board only (old) 330.7281 DDR 256 Mb (RAM) for Pentium IV board only 330.9390 TOUCH SCREEN 330.9390A CONTROLLER FOR TOUCH SCREEN 330.9391 LCD DISPLAY 12.1" 330.9391A INVERTER FOR LCD DISPLAY 330.9391B CABLE FOR LCD INVERTER 330.9393 TOUCH SCREEN 330.9393A CONTROLLER FOR TOUCH SCREEN Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 6 of 10 15-7. CONSUMABLES PART NO. 392 393 943 944 947 DESCRIPTION SURFACTANT WASH CONCENTRATE 2X50 ml CUVETTE WASHING SOLUTION 1 LITER ISE LOW CALIBRATOR 2 x 20 ml ISE HIGH CALIBRATOR 2 x 20 ml ISE STARTER KIT - 600 TESTS: Buffer Conc., Reference Conc., Washing Solution, Enzymatic Solution, ISE Calibrator Low, ISE Calibrator High 03254 11-05209-01 11-05219-01 CLEANING TOOL FOR CHLORIDE ELECTRODE PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE (ex 330.9072) SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES) (For analyzer with new Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01/02/03) 11-05220-01 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES) (For analyzer with new Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01/02/03) 11-05337-01 11-05338-01 330.5703 330.5810 330.5811 330.5820 330.5823 330.9321 330.9614 330.9615 662.1002 SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (The Current Kit ) ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (The Current Kit ) O-RING FOR DILUTER ELBOW FITTING 2.38mm (READING STATION) ELBOW FITTING 3.2mm (READING STATION) STRAIGHT FITTING 2.24mm (READING STATION) ELBOW FITTING 1.58mm (READING STATION) HALOGEN LAMP 12V/35W FOR PHOTOMETER TUBULAR FILTER FOR H2O TUBE H2O FILTER FOR WATER PUMP (REAR OF READING STATION) SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES) (For analyzer with Vacuum Pump System - "OBSOLETE" P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F) 662.1009 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES) (For analyzer with Vacuum Pump System - "OBSOLETE" P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F) 662.1010 662.1011 662.1016 667.1040 667.1080 667.1083 667.1084 667.1085 667.1086 WASTE CONTAINER (10 LITERS CUBITAINER) SAMPLING NEEDLE BIMONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (ISE TUBING) SERUM CUP 2 ml 50 ml BOTTLE WITH SCREW CAP REAGENT CONTAINER 80 ml REAGENT CONTAINER 50 ml REAGENT BOTTLE 20 ml REAGENT BOTTLE 10 ml Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 7 of 10 15-8. ELECTRONICS HARDWARE PART NO. DESCRIPTION 08-04546-01 LAMP FAN ASSY 08-04747-01 FLUID DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD (REAR PANEL) 12-04712-01 I2CBUS CABLE 15-04431-01 PERIPHERAL INHIBITION BOARD 15-04661-01 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE BOARD 330.2057 CORDLESS KEYBOARD/MOUSE KIT 330.2132 UPS 1100 VA 330.2165 PRINTER CABLE 330.2172 PRINTER FOR BT 3000 PLUS 330.6338 FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT 330.6340 FUSE 250 VOLT, 2AT 330.6342B FUSE 250 VOLT, 8AT 330.6391 POWER CORD 330.6400 POWER CORD FOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES 330.6450 POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH SWITCH 330.7171 LAMBDA POWER SUPPLY (400W) 330.7220A MAGNET FOR HALL SENSOR 330.7235A CPU COOLING FAN 330.9321 TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP 12V, 35 WATTS, 9° 15-9. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM SPARE PARTS (REFER TO SECTION XII FOR PRODUCT ILLUSTRATIONS)) VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01/02/03 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 06-05161-01 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE) FOR BT3000 PLUS 07-05165-01 WASTE PROBE 08-05162-01 VACUUM PUMP ASSY 15-05085-01 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD 20-05145-01 INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER (TRANSPARENT GLASS) 330.6312 POWER ENTRY MODULE 330.6338 FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT 330.6400 MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET 330.7175 POWER SUPPLY 330.9099 3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 8 of 10 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F (OBSOLETE) PART NO. 08-04716-01 08-04734-01 08-04735-01 11-05260-01 11-05339-01 15-04541-02 330.6312 330.6340 330.6342 330.6400 330.7175 330.9088 330.9614 330.9622 330.9623 330.9624 330.9625 330.9649 330.9659B 662.0777B 662.0777C 662.0788 662.0788A 662.0788B 662.0788E 662.0806 662.0807 662.0808 662.0808A 662.0810 662.0831 662.0831A 662.0831C 662.0831D 662.0831E 662.0831F 662.0831G 662.0831H 662.0832 662.0832A DESCRIPTION H2O TUBE WITH FILTER BLUE TUBE FOR WASTE BLACK TUBE FOR WASTE ANTI-CONDENSATE KIT (VAC PUMP) VACUUM PUMP ANNUAL SERVICE KIT VAC.PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH FUSES FUSE 250 VOLT, 2 AT (230 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM) FUSE 250 VOLT, 4 AT (115 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM) MAINS POWER SUPPLY CORDSET POWER SUPPLY CARTRIDGE # PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBULAR FILTER FOR H2O TUBE COUPLING BODY WITH SHUTOFF VALVE - FRONT PANEL ELBOW FITTING FOR PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE COUPLING BODY STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT PANEL SINTERED BRONZE SILENCER COUPLING INSERT FOR WASTE PROBE - FRONT PANEL VACUUM REGULATOR VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC WITH FITTINGS VACUUM PUMP 230 VAC WITH FITTINGS VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 230 VAC) WASTE PROBE-1 WASTE PROBE-2 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 110 VAC) "RESTART" PUSH BUTTON (NOT WIRED) HYDROPHOBIC FILTER ASSEMBLY PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT VACUUM GAUGE ASSY CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY/BOARD 15-04541-02 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLIES FEMALE FISCHER CONNECTOR KIT "RESTART" PUSH BUTTON KIT GROUNDING CABLE FOR VAC PUMP GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER INLET GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY GROUNDING CABLE FOR PUMP COVER THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-LEFT THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-RIGHT (Schematics on the Last Pages of this Manual) Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 9 of 10 15-10. ORDERING INFORMATION Please contact Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for any configuration or special requirement not covered in this manual. For technical or ordering assistance start w ith our convenient ordering check list located in the above paragraph. For further assistance, don't hesitate to call the Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. or your local sales/representative office. To obtain accessories/spare parts, address order or enquiry to your Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. sales/service representative or to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. and supply the follow ing Informations: a) Instrument Model and Serial Number b) Quantity of parts desired c) Part Number d) Description Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. Phone: +39 06 411 2316 Via Licenza,18 Fax: +39 06 410 3079 00155 - Rome (ITALY) E-mail: bt@biotecnica.it NOTE: DUE TO IMPROVEMENTS IN DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS, PRODUCTS MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE PREVIOUS DESCRIPTION. SOME IMPORTANT NOTICE: THE BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES IN DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT NOTICE. EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO PROVIDE ACCURATE TECHNICAL AND PRODUCT INFORMATION. THE BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. DISCLAIMS RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY ERROR OR OMISSION REGARDING TECHNICAL AND PRODUCT INFORMATION PRESENTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL. © 2003 BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A., ROME, ITALY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HEREIN AND NO PORTION OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL MAY BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE PRIOR CONSENT IN WRITING OF THE BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Section XV Spare Parts BT3000 PLUS-Service Page 10 of 10 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04209-01--F-- MASTER POWER-(BT3K+) .vcd 1/31/2005 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04211-01--D--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 C:\Documents and Settings\Fabio\Documenti\Documenti Preliminari\Piani Montaggio PM\15-04211-01--E--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).VCD 7/22/2005 E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04211-01--F--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).vcd 4/10/2006 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04270-01--D--READING PLATE INTERFACE.vcd 5/25/2004 C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04278-01--E--SERUM VACUTAINER-R-(BT3K+).VCD 2/24/2005 C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04280-01--E--SERUM VACUTAINER-L-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 2/24/2005 MONTARE IL SENSORE A FILO CON IL BLOCCHETTO PVC E RIEMPIRE IL FORO CON COLLA BICOMPONENTE. J:\Piani montaggio\15-04282-01--C--SERUM HALL SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04313-03--B--REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04320-01--C--ISE CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04422-01--B--SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04431-01--B--PERIPHERALS DISABLE(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04440-01--A--ISE PREAMPLIFIER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04503-01--B--ISE INTERFACE-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04541-01--B--VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04649-01--C--PREAMPLIFIER.VCD 7/8/2004 E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04649-01--D--PREAMPLIFIER.VCD 11/21/2006 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04651-01--A--PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04661-01--B--POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04680-01--B--REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04765-01--C--ARM L CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04765-02--C--ARM R CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04767-01--A--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-04902-01--B--LIQUID SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-05021-01--A--DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004 E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05021-01--B--DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/26/2006 C:\Documenti\Documenti Preliminari\Piani Montaggio PM\15-05023-01--B--ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 11/4/2004 J:\Piani montaggio\15-05085-01--D--VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER.vcs.VCD 10/11/2004 C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05211-01--B--REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER(BT3K+).VCD 3/31/2005 J:\Piani montaggio\15-05234-01--A--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER(BT1K-2K-3K+).vcd 1/27/2005 C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05234-01--B--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER(BT1K-2K-3K+).VCD 2/28/2006 C5 470u/35V F2 3A +5VP + R2 2K7 +5VD R3 330 VFB 12 TP5 0.22u L1 C7 R6 10K C8 220p C40 C13 R4 330 C11 1u TEMP TEMP C14 + R16 + +5VD 0.1u R63 27K R8 16K9 C41 JP1 ON 4K7 +5VD +5VD +5VP DGND PGND PGND DGND VPP C32 0.47u +5VP +5VD R10 560 +5VP R9 560 R53 10K 27 U2 TLP2630 MOTOR A C28 + 47u/16V U15 TLP2630 CLK A 24 CLK B 20 R49 560 7 2 PTC8 0.9A CLK L2 R70 4K7 4 6 STRB B 19 3 STRB B R36 100 +5VD RST DGND VPP PTC6 1.2 2 J8 DILUTER VALVE 1 1 2 VD1 AMP 2/D R43 10K 8 1 7 DATA B 21 R A 4 5 16 +5VD DATA STRB A C35 0.47u 15-04408-01 8 9 10 MOTOR B 11 R39 10K 24 20 STRB B 19 D4 C.C. C.C. 1 2 R18 120/3W PTC1 1.2 4 PS 3 PD 2 RST P16 P17 R40 10K AMP 2/D PGND 10 D2 C.C. C21 VCC 15 XT2 7 XT1 6 GND 5 0.1u J10 DGND Y1 18.432MHz V1 SCL SDA RST C.SEN CLK DATA STRB A L.SENS C22 22p C23 22p STRB B TEMP DGND AGND C/F C/T INH/T PS LIV. C17 10n DGND 13 25 12 24 11 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 19 6 18 5 17 4 16 3 15 2 14 1 R38 560 D25 M/90° PGND R60 4K7 J12 R61 1 2 +D +E D E R37 560 8 7 MASTER LOGIC DGND +5VD C25 + 47u/16V U17 TLP2630 ARM LIQUID SENSOR t R67 N.M. R68 N.M. +5VP R B CLK B P00 P01 P02 P03 87LPC764 Q4 N.M. R47 2.2 1/2W CLK A U18 N.M. 3 +5VD D3 J13 +5VD 3 R46 1.2 1/2W J11 +5VD 1 20 19 18 LIQUID SENSOR AMP 4/D TIP127 R22 68/6W SCL 6 STRB A 25 4 5 6 MOTOR A 7 4 2 1 DATA A 23 PTC7 N.M. N.M. P11 P04 P10 1 R44 10K 1 2 3 4 2 15 22 R66 R41 560 t 14 R42 560 2 28 C24 + 47u/16V U16 TLP2630 P14 11 17 12 P05 P06 P07 + +5VP C34 0.47u PGND 2 1 2 3 4 AMP 2/D t DGND 9 U12 VD 8 C27 47u/35V 1 CUVETTE CUVETTE CUVETTE CUVETTE 1 R59 4K7 DILUTER PUMP 1 2 DGND C20 22p 17 SCL 12 A 2 R45 1.2 1/2W MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE J7 PD t Q2 L3 FD1 J3/1 J3/2 J3/9 J3/10 PGND PTC5 1.2 2 SDA DGND Q5 BC237 S GND 18 26 C36 0.1u R48 2.2 1/2W 1 Q3 IRF540 C19 22p R35 100 Q6 IRF540 5 C37 0.1u 13 R65 4K7 VPP DGND 27 REFIL PUMP 1 2 J9 PGND PGND J6 PS VPP +5VP 1 MOTOR B 10 3 C43 0.1u FUNNEL PUMP 1 2 R29 560 8 9 11 + J5 AMP 2/D PTC4 1.2 AMP 2/D PGND 1= ALL. WASHER MOTOR 100 AMP 2/D VD2 9 ULN2003A PTC3 0.9A PINCH VALVE 1 1 2 V1 t 1 8 C26 47u/35V PGND C15 1u +5VD PGND DGND + J4 PTC2 1.2 2 DGND SDA AMP 4X2/D K 1 2 16 VPP GND OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 16 15 14 PS 13 PS 12 PD 11 10 PS 16 14 13 WASHER PUMP 8 2 R50 10K R B R69 10 C44 10n 15 13 11 9 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 PGND t R28 10K J14 LIV. PUMP LED PUMP DGND AUX K1 E1 K2 E2 K3 E3 K4 E4 U10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +5VD 15-04408-01 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PD 2 4 6 V1 8 V1 V2 PS PS PD VD PS C33 0.47u VPP R20 N.M. A1 C1 A2 C2 A3 C3 A4 C4 16 14 12 10 AR2 4K7 C/T +5VP 7 R24 220 1 3 5 7 INH/T 6 R25 4K7 PGND 5 5 DGND +5VD 1K VPP +5VP TLP521-4 R64 N.M. STRB A 3 5 AMP 4X2/D WASTE PROBE R23 4 RH 1W 1 DILUTER 1 R62 6 STRB A 25 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R19 4K7 PGND DS2890 TR1 6 4 3 U11 7 3 DATA U13 TLP521-1 R12 10K R21 4K7 + 4 2 2 C/F R15 10K C16 47u/16V 8 2 1 R55 1.8 1/2W J2 R51 560 8 7 DATA B 21 R A 2 FD1 R52 560 3 R17 1K AR1 1K t R54 10K DATA A 23 R56 1.8 1/2W R57 220 MOLEX 2X8/90° t C42 0.1u 14 15 22 28 PGND R58 15K R14 10K 1 C29 + 47u/16V U14 TLP2630 1 Q1 TIP122 R31 5K6 C38 0.47u 47u/35V A 1 4 R11 4K7 +5VD F3 3A R13 390 U6 VPP GREEN 1 DL3 YELLOW PGND +5VD READING PLATE INTERFACE 2 DL2 ORANGE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TLP521-1 DL1 C30 + MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE AGND TEMP.CUV. AGND OUT TEMP.CUV. + TEMP.CUV. +5VD +VENT.PELT. VPP PELTIER PELTIER J3/9 MOTORE CUVETTE J3/10 MOTORE CUVETTE DGND HALL CUV. DGND OUT HALL CUV. + HALL CUV. +5VD GND VENT.PELT. PGND PELTIER PELTIER 8 1 16 VPP 4K3 SB540 C9 22n 4 6 R7 47K + J3 J3/1 J3/2 9 K1 RT42 D1 C10 1u + TP6 13 11 SS INH 5.1V OUT OUT 2 3 + 2n2 MOLEX 5X2/90° 9 R32 C31 47u/16V + C12 BOOT 3x100u/35V TP4 VPP SDA SCL C6 47u 35V + PGND VPP +5VD VCC OSC L4973-3V3 17 DGND RST U3 CMP PGND 1 2 3 4 5 +24V 6 +24V 7 +5V 8 9 10 1 R5 22K VCC 10 C4 47u 16V + C3 0.1u 8 SYNC 7 3A 16 C2 0.1u F1 11 J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE + C1 100u 35V TP3 VPP 3 GND GND GND GND GND GND TP2 +5VP VO 2 TP1 E.G. VI 4 5 6 13 14 15 1 150 3W C39 10n 18 U1 L4931CV50 R1 1 GND VPP E1 220 CLK DGND 1 2 3 4 WASHER RESET AMP 4/D 4 6 3 STRB B 5 AMP 4/D S GND 18 3 26 12 PGND 17 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE E.M. A3 1189 DATE MASTER POWER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04209-01 November 23, 2004 H SHEET 1/1 5V1 R10 J1 DGND R11 100 P13 P12 P11 P10 L.SENS I/O I/O STRB B LAV. 59 56 32 29 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH1 45 54 30 27 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH2 20 66 70 VF1 VF2 VFR A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 WR RD CSROM CSRAM RDRAM A15 ALE PSEN 38 48 33 39 34 17 47 31 70LJ84 ISPE SDI SDO U11 LM79L12CZ OUT IN C33 0.1u OUT IN U12 L4931CZ120 7 -VOUT 5 0V 6 +VOUT 8 SYNCOUT 14 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 36 VSS 37 VSS AVDD +AVREF 61 59 EW AVSS -AVREF 6 60 58 + + C12 0.1u 1u DGND R20 1K AGND U10 LM385 2.5V 1 R3 3K9 2 3 U8A MAX 492 AGND TEMP +2.5V R4 3K9 + TP4 DGND A(0..14) C17 10u C23 R7 2M2 C30 0.1u AGND 0.1u D(0..7) SP1 R5 3K9 A15 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 U5 55C256 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 /CE /OE /WE VDD 20 22 27 28 VSS 14 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 DGND O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 28 VDD A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 14 VSS CE OE VPP +5VD +5VD C10 0.1u 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 C11 0.1u DGND RS232 TR1 2K +2.5V C31 + 0.1u R8 15K A(0..14) A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FLAT 10/90° C19 +5VD AGND 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 27 20 22 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 7 6 5 U8B MAX 492 + R6 3K9 R9 2M2 AGND 4 3 2 1 5Psi +2.5V AGND +5VD T. AMB. R17 68 U6 27C256 C26 0.1u + OUT U9 - C7 22uF LM35CZ + C27 1u 2 AGND SYNCIN DCPO20515DP PASQUALINI DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREAMPLIFIER DGND 22uF DRAWN BY J2 FLAT 16/D 4 C2+ C15 22uF CTS RTS C16 0.1u C+ P3.7 J4 TX RX DSR 1 31 C2- 5 UP552 1 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 R2OUT T2IN V- 3 P3.6 P5.0 P5.1 P5.2 P5.3 P5.4 P5.5 P5.6 P5.7 R2IN T2OUT GND 8 7 15 C1- 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 30 PWM1 PWMO C14 2 13 14 1 + 0V U4 D(0..7) +5VD VS RST DGND 23 25 44 42 61 1 22 43 64 GND GND GND GND SCLK MODE PAL1032 DGND VDD 15 5 4 V+ R1IN T1OUT 4 21 65 41 INT 37 11 58 69 35 12 28 57 F0 F1 F2 F3 VCC VCC DGND D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 U2 U3 +5VD 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SMD C4 2u2/10V (SMD) 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C34 2u2 10V + DZ1 5V1 2 9 10 6 VCC RIOUT T1IN 8 55 50 51 52 + CUV. +5VD XT1 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 C.SENS CLK DATA STRB A CLK SENS STB DIR 26 60 46 FLT MOT STP 36 14 16 13 35 CTS RTS PSEN STADC EA U1 87LPC764 +5VD C32 0.1u L2 C9 22p DGND R21 10K C5 10uF C6 10uF C20 10uF DGND P04 P05 P06 P07 17 16 14 13 C3 22p 16 12 11 RX TX 24 25 26 27 28 29 47 3 49 5 Y1 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 Y2 ALE C2 22p + XT2 48 VSS 14.7456MHz 22p DGND L1 C8 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 R19 2 X 560 R22 560 34 DGND L4 +5VD P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 XTL1 6 DGND + XTL2 7 - TP3 R18 C28 22uF + 15 0.1u P00 P01 P02 P03 DGND L3 C13 22uF - VDD + P14 P15 P16 P17 R15 100 DGND +5VD + 1 20 19 18 DGND 10n C/T R12 100 U7 MAX232 18.432MHz C29 10n 10n INH/T +5VD C1 8 4 3 2 C24 C/F R2 1K R13 100 TP1 C25 R1 1K 100 DGND R16 100 R14 4K7 9 10 11 12 C22 22p 1N4148 + D25 F/90° C21 22p +5VD + 13 25 12 SCL 24 SDA 11 RST 23 C.SEN 10 CLK 22 DATA STRB A 9 21 L.SEN 8 20 STRB B 7 TEMP 19 6 AGND 18 C/F 5 C/T 17 INH/T TP2 PS 4 +5VD 16 3 15 2 C18 + 14 1 22uF MASTER POWER D1 DZ2 V1 PROGRAMMER J3 N.M. BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE E.M. A3 1168 DATE DRAWING NUMBER MASTER LOGIC REV. SE-04211-01 June 01, 2004 F SHEET 1/1 R2 1K INH/T C/T DGND R13 100 R11 100 P13 P12 P11 P10 TP1 DGND LAV. 59 56 32 29 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH1 45 54 30 27 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH2 20 66 70 VF1 VF2 VFR DGND D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 WR RD CSROM CSRAM RDRAM A15 ALE PSEN 38 48 33 39 34 17 47 31 U2 70LJ84 ISPE SDI SDO P3.6 UP552 31 P3.7 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 36 VSS 37 VSS C6 10uF L2 C33 0.1u OUT + + +12V +5VD IN U12 L4931CZ120 -VOUT 5 0V 6 +VOUT 8 SYNCOUT 14 VS 6 60 58 C12 0.1u 1u A(0..14) DGND 4 C2- C2+ AGND R3 3K9 AD822 1 U8A U10 DZA 5V1 LM385 2.5V TP4 2 3 +2.5V R4 3K9 + +12V AGND AGND TEMP C17 10u C23 R7 330K 0.1u AGND 0.1u D(0..7) A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 U5 55C256 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 /CE /OE /WE VDD 20 22 27 28 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 14 DGND O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 28 VDD A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 14 VSS CE OE VPP +5VD +5VD C10 0.1u 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 C11 0.1u DGND 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 27 20 22 1 AD822 7 U8B A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 SP1 R5 3K9 6 5 + R6 3K9 DZB 5V1 R9 330K AGND 4 3 2 1 5Psi AGND +2.5V +12V AGND +5VD T. AMB. R17 68 U6 27C256 + OUT U9 C26 0.1u - + LM35CZ C27 1u C7 22uF 2 AGND SYNCIN DCPO20515DP BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY PASQUALINI F. DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREAMPLIFIER DGND R20 1K DRAWN BY J2 FLAT 16/D RS232 TR1 2K +2.5V C31 + 0.1u R8 15K 1 + 0V EW AVSS -AVREF C30 +5VD U3 7 61 59 DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FLAT 10/90° C19 +5VD A(0..14) U11 LM79L12CZ OUT IN C32 0.1u AVDD +AVREF C15 22uF CTS RTS C16 0.1u 22uF AGND VSS C5 10uF 1 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 D(0..7) DGND L1 P5.0 P5.1 P5.2 P5.3 P5.4 P5.5 P5.6 P5.7 R2OUT T2IN V- C+ 30 PWM1 PWMO R2IN T2OUT GND 8 7 15 J4 TX RX DSR 1 U4 DGND 23 25 44 42 61 GND GND GND GND SCLK MODE PAL1032 DGND RST C14 2 13 14 4 21 65 41 INT 37 11 58 69 35 12 28 57 F0 F1 F2 F3 VCC VCC 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 CUV. 1 22 43 64 C4 2u2/10V (SMD) VDD 15 5 4 V+ R1IN T1OUT 8 SMD 2 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 L.SENS I/O I/O STRB B + D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 XT1 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 55 50 51 52 CLK SENS STB DIR 26 60 STP 46 DGND C.SENS CLK DATA STRB A +5VD C34 2u2 10V + DZ1 5V1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 U1 87LPC764 +5VD 36 14 16 13 35 9 10 6 VCC RIOUT T1IN C1- C9 22p DGND R21 10K FLT MOT DGND C20 10uF DGND P04 P05 P06 P07 17 16 14 13 10n C3 22p CTS RTS PSEN STADC EA 5 Y1 Y2 16 12 11 RX TX 24 25 26 27 28 29 47 3 49 C2 22p P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 3 22p + XT2 P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 34 ALE VSS 14.7456MHz 48 C8 P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 R22 560 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 P00 P01 P02 P03 TP3 R19 2 X 560 +5VD + XTL1 6 DGND - XTL2 7 + 15 0.1u R15 100 10n C28 22uF - VDD + 1 20 19 18 DGND C24 C13 22uF + P14 P15 P16 P17 18.432MHz C29 10n R18 U7 MAX232 +5VD C1 8 4 3 2 R16 100 +5VD R12 100 9 10 11 12 C22 22p C25 L4 R1 1K 100 DGND L3 R14 4K7 + D25 F/90° C21 22p 1N4148 + 13 25 12 SCL 24 SDA 11 RST 23 C.SEN 10 CLK 22 DATA STRB A 9 21 L.SEN 8 20 STRB B 7 TEMP 19 6 AGND 18 C/F 5 C/T 17 INH/T TP2 PS 4 +5VD 16 3 15 2 C18 + 14 1 22uF +5VD C/F 5V1 R10 J1 MASTER POWER D1 DZ2 V1 J3 N.M. PROGRAMMER THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI V. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. 01221 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER MASTER LOGIC REV. SE-04211-01 July 22, 2005 G SHEET 1/1 D1 DZ2 +5VD V1 C/F 5V1 1N4148 R10 J1 C21 22p C/T R13 100 R11 100 +5VD R12 100 9 10 11 12 DGND P13 P12 P11 P10 C22 22p TP1 U7 MAX232 +5VD DGND 10n L.SENS I/O I/O STRB B 21 65 41 INT 35 12 28 57 37 11 58 69 F0 F1 F2 F3 VCC VCC 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 DGND D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 WR RD CSROM CSRAM RDRAM A15 ALE PSEN 38 48 33 39 34 17 47 31 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 CUV. LAV. U2 70LJ84 59 56 32 29 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH1 45 54 30 27 F0 F1 F2 F3 CH2 20 66 70 VF1 VF2 VFR ISPE SDI SDO DGND P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 36 VSS 37 VSS DGND C33 0.1u C6 10uF L2 + + OUT IN +12V U12 L4931CZ120 -VOUT 5 0V 6 +VOUT 8 SYNCOUT 14 VS 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 C2+ C2- C+ 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RS232 FLAT 10/90° C19 0.1u DGND +5VD C12 0.1u TR1 2K R8 15K R20 1K AGND +2.5V C31 + 1u R3 3K9 AD822 1 U8A U10 DZ3 5V1 LM385 2.5V 2 3 AGND TEMP +12V R4 3K9 + TP4 A(0..14) DGND C17 10u C23 R7 330K 0.1u AGND 0.1u D(0..7) SP1 R5 3K9 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 /CE /OE /WE VDD 20 22 27 28 U5 55C256 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 14 DGND O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 28 VDD A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 14 VSS CE OE VPP +5VD +5VD C10 0.1u 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 C11 0.1u DGND 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2 26 27 20 22 1 AD822 7 U8B A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 6 5 + R6 3K9 DZ4 5V1 R9 330K 4 3 2 1 5Psi AGND +12V AGND AGND +5VD T. AMB. R17 68 U6 27C256 + OUT U9 C26 0.1u 1 + - + 0V DGND 22uF C30 +5VD U3 7 CTS RTS C16 0.1u C15 22uF A(0..14) U11 LM79L12CZ OUT IN C32 0.1u 6 60 58 R2IN T2OUT GND 8 7 15 TX RX DSR AGND VSS C5 10uF EW AVSS -AVREF C14 AGND DGND L1 61 59 2 13 14 D(0..7) 23 25 44 42 61 GND GND GND GND SCLK MODE PAL1032 1 22 43 64 C4 2u2/10V (SMD) 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 AVDD +AVREF UP552 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 55 50 51 52 I.CLK SENS STB I.DATA 26 60 C.SENS O.CLK O.DATA STRB A + P3.7 1 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 R19 2 X 560 36 14 16 13 FLT MOT STP 46 DGND R18 SMD +5VD 31 P5.0 P5.1 P5.2 P5.3 P5.4 P5.5 P5.6 P5.7 R2OUT T2IN V- J4 V+ R1IN T1OUT 4 R21 10K D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C34 2u2 10V + DZ1 5V1 PWM1 PWMO U4 P3.6 4 5 C24 DGND RST 30 U1 87LPC764 TP3 VDD 15 5 4 VCC RIOUT T1IN 8 P04 P05 P06 P07 DGND 2 9 10 6 PSEN STADC EA +5VD XT1 CTS RTS 47 3 49 DGND 35 16 12 11 RX TX 24 25 26 27 28 29 + 17 16 14 13 C3 22p ALE VSS R15 100 5 C9 22p C20 10uF Y1 C2 22p Y2 48 P00 P01 P02 P03 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 C1- 22p + XT2 3 34 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 1 20 19 18 DGND 14.7456MHz P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 C8 +5VD P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 XTL1 6 R22 560 DGND 0.1u + XTL2 7 - 15 + VDD 18.432MHz C29 10n 10n C28 22uF - P14 P15 P16 P17 + 8 4 3 2 R16 100 C13 22uF + C1 C25 L4 R2 1K 100 DGND L3 R1 1K INH/T D25 F/90° MASTER POWER R14 4K7 + 13 25 12 SCL 24 SDA 11 RST 23 C.SEN 10 CLK 22 DATA STRB A 9 21 L.SEN 8 20 STRB B 7 TEMP 19 6 AGND 18 C/F 5 C/T 17 INH/T TP2 PS 4 +5VD 16 3 15 2 C18 + 14 1 22uF LM35CZ C27 1u C7 22uF 2 AGND SYNCIN DCPO20515DP +5VD DRAWN BY PASQUALINI F. J3 N.M. MENCHINELLI V. PROGRAMMER THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. MASTER LOGIC SIZE APPROVED PREAMPLIFIER BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DGND J2 FLAT 16/D 01242 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04211-01 April 11, 2006 H SHEET 1/1 MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE AGND TEMP. CUV. OUT TEMP. CUV. + TEMP. CUV. + VENT. PELT. PELTIER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER POWER MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE DGND HALL CUV. OUT HALL CUV. + HALL CUV. GND VENT. PELT. PELTIER MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE MOTORE CUVETTE R1 68 NTC1 N.M. 1 2 1 2 FAN PELT. R4 1 C1 1u C2 0.1u + TEMP. CUV. + HALL CUV. OUT TEMP. CUV. OUT HALL CUV. GND TEMP CUV. GND HALL CUV. C3 0.1u + VENT. PELT. GND VENT. PELT. 1 2 FAN PELT. J6 1 2 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TEMP. - HALL SENSORS E1 D2 N.M. + VENT. PELT. GND VENT. PELT. DL1 AMP 2/D FAN PELT. MOTOR AMP 4X2/D AMP 2/D J5 1 2 3 4 AMP 4/D MOLEX 2X8/90° J4 J2 t + J1 HOT/COLD RED/GREEN + VENT. PELT. GND VENT. PELT. AMP 2/D E2 D1 N.M. E3 E4 R2 560 E5 E6 J7 ARM LIQUID SENSOR 1 2 VPP PGND R3 100 5W AMP 2/D DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE E.M. A4 1161 DATE READING PLATE INTERFACE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04270-01 May 06, 2004 D SHEET 1/1 TP1 +5VD J2 LED SIERI 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 HALL SIERI VACU. "R" R1 220 DGND VACU. "R" 12 TP2 DGND U1F 74HC14 14 U2B 13 7 + 5 - 6 LM 358 7 R7 47K U2A 1 1N4148 LM 358 DGND +5VD 3 +5VD FLAT 14/90° EM1 LD274 U1B 4 DGND TP3 VCT 2KHz 3 R9 5K6 74HC14 U1C 6 5 74HC14 J3 VACUTAINER "R" LED 1 2 R3 10K C3 4u7 + U1D 8 R4 2K2 U1A DGND 2 1 74HC14 9 C5 0.1u 74HC14 AMP2/90° DGND SERUM VACUTAINER " L " 10n DGND R2 22K +5VD C4 2 RI1 PT380F DGND DGND R8 56 1 DGND 3 D1 DGND R6 C.C. R5 N.M. DGND 1 FLAT 10/D TR1 1M 1 2 + C1 0.1u 8 HALL SIERI LED SIERI VACU. " L" C2 0.1u 4 DGND C6 47u VACU. "L" + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 +5VD 0.65A - +5V J1 SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER F1 U1E 10 DGND DGND 11 74HC14 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI MENCHINELLI E.M. 1201 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER SERUM VACUTAINER " R " REV. SE-04278-01 February 24, 2005 D SHEET 1/1 +5VD 1 R8 56 C2 0.1u 3 DGND U1F +5VD 12 DGND U2B 7 13 74HC14 R5 N.M. 8 C1 0.1u D1 + 5 - 6 U2A 1 1N4148 LM 358 LM 358 TP1 +5VD +5VD 2 3 DGND 10n RI1 PT380F EM1 LD274 DGND U1C R10 5K6 5 74HC14 2KHz U1B U1D TP3 VCT R2 22K SERUM HALL SENSOR FLAT 6/90° DGND C4 DGND DGND 1 LED SIERI 2 3 OUT HALL SIERI DGND 4 5 6 7 6 1 +5VD +5VD 1 U1A 74HC14 VACU. " L" J2 R9 4K7 14 DGND 2 4 FLAT 14/90° HALL SIERI R7 47K R6 C.C. + SERUM VACUTAINER " R " LED SIERI - 1 DGND 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TR1 1M 2 R1 220 J1 8 9 4 74HC14 3 1 74HC14 + C6 47u C5 0.1u U1E R3 10K R4 2K2 + 10 C3 4u7 11 DGND 74HC14 1 TP2 DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND J3 VACUTAINER "L" LED 1 2 AMP2/90° DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI MENCHINELLI E.M. 1201 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER SERUM VACUTAINER " L " REV. SE-04280-01 February 24, 2005 D SHEET 1/1 TP1 +5VD 1 +5VD LED SIERI J1 RED HALL SIERI R1 220 1 2 3 4 5 6 GREEN R2 4K7 +5VD LED SIERI OUT HALL SIERI GND HALL SIERI TRANSIZ.6 DL2 U1 C1 0.1u VCC OUT GND A3121EU TP2 DGND 1 SERUM VACUTAINER " L " DL1 DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE E.M. DATE A4 SERUM HALL SENSOR DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04282-01 March 14, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 A1 + C3 0.1u + C4 0.1u R7 330 DL1 DL2 ORANGE YELLOW C5 47u/16V +5VD +5VD R8 330 +5VP R28 47u/16V 10K R31 560 R32 560 1 2 4 3 DL3 GREEN 22 R29 10K C11 + U3 A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 23 DATA A 7 6 21 DATA B 25 STRB A DGND SCL 18,432MHz 7 XT2 L1 L2 XT1 C10 22p 2 3 P0.3 P0.7 P1.4 18 13 8 DGND 8 + PGND C15 10n +5VD C19 22u Q1 BC237 11 12 T1IN R1OUT T1OUT R1IN 14 13 10 9 T2IN R2OUT T2OUT R2IN 7 8 R18 3 15 GND V- 6 1 TP9 GND 2K2 + R19 MAX232 C18 22u R23 N.M. C26 N.M. DGND C31 1u +5 C14 0.1u +24RP A1 K1 A2 K2 C1 E1 C2 E2 8 7 6 5 DGND 1N4148 7 R26 1K 6 5 U6B MAX492 DGND Q3 BD680A DZ2 18V R24 1K R25 22K TEMP. SENSOR PELTIERS AIR BLOWER MOLEX 6X2/90° Q2 BUZ111S TLP521-2 + F4 5A 1 2 3 4 AUX N.M. J7 +TEMP.REAG. OUT TEMP.REAG. 1 2 GND TEMP.REAG. 3 +VENT.TANG. 4 GND VENT.TANG. 5 6 7 8 +PELT. 9 +PELT. 10 -PELT. 11 -PELT. 12 D1 U7 R27 1K 1 2 3 C27 N.M. 68 2K2 +24RP +5VD REAGENT BARCODE J6 +24VRP DGND R34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AMP 4X2/90° 22u R35 100 C25 47u/16V C17 J5 +5VD + R21 22K 1 COM 6 C29 0.1u TP8 (0.4V) DGND +24VRP MOLEX 4X2/90° F5 5A 8 VCC +5VD CTS DGND DGND RX TX SGND RTS + + 2 OUT R22 1K8 1 U6A MAX492 R15 3K3 C28 0.1u IN V+ C21 22u DGND 16 1 R17 100K 1 8 R16 10K 4 2 R13 10K 0=COLD 1=HOT C23 0.1u + 1 R14 1K - POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE +SENSE 1 CONTROL1 2 -SENSE 3 4 GND 5 GND 6 +24rp 7 +24rp 8 C24 1u + J2 TP7 (20mV) +5 U8 78L05 +5 R12 12K JP1 OFF C22 47u/35V +5VD C20 0.1u 22u U5 DGND - + AMP 3/90° C16 R20 2K2 REAGENT HALL SENSOR DGND 0= ALL.TEMP. HI. PELT. 0=INH. PELT. 1 R36 12K J4 OUT HALL REAG. + HALL REAG. 1 GND HALL REAG. 2 3 DGND 1 +24VRP +5VD R11 4K7 +24VRP F3 0.65A 47u/35V 26 R9 10K 2 +24RP + C13 18 S GND 3 C30 10n TP6 (16-29V) 28 R10 100 Y1 C9 22p DGND P1.7 P1.6 6 TLP2630 P0.6 P0.5 P1.1 P1.0 DGND VPP + RST 1.2 1/2W 5 4 19 17 20 1 14 16 11 12 C1 47u/16V + R5 AMP 4/90° +5VD DGND 0.65A 1.2 1/2W 20 CLK B C2- GND 24 CLK A 7 6 C1- 5 A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 3 F2 P0.2 P0.4 P0.1 PO.O VCC U4 R4 1 4 1 15 C8 0.1u C12 + C2+ TP4 1 2 4 3 87LPC764 15-04408-01 C+ +5VD +5VD MOLEX 5X2/90° U2 REAGENT MOTOR - 3A DGND R33 560 1 2 3 4 2 R30 47u/16V 10K 5 DGND 9 F1 SDA VPP DGND C7 22p R3 100 10 1 PGND C6 22p R2 100 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TP3 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL J3 27 R A +5VP 1 +5VD + 1 PGND TP2 J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE PGND REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI 5 TLP2630 PGND TP1 MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE 4 MOTOR A 5 6 7 - C2 47u/35V R6 2K7 VOUT GND 330 2W +5VP 8 VIN VPP + +5VP U1 L4931CV50 R1 1 TP5 VPP DRAWN BY PASQUALINI DZ1 15V CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1120 A3 DATE REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04313-03 July 07, 2003 B SHEET 1/1 TP5 P/O AR4 470 U3 1 A1 2 K1 O1 4 A2 O2 3 K2 C6 C5 47u/16V R4 2K7 R5 330 R6 330 TLP2630 TP2 PGND DGND +5VD +5VP P1.1 P0.4 P1.0 1 FORCH. DILUITORE P1.7 P1.4 2 POMPA DILUITORE 8 VALVOLA DILUITORE 8 470 L2 C33 22p DGND Y1 C32 22p 3 13 14 16 P/O AR4 470 U5 1 2 4 3 +5VD A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 +5VD C30 10u R33 470 + 5 18,432MHz R34 470 DGND C26 22p DGND +5VD 20 1 STRB B VALVOLA ISE GND P0.7 P0.2 13 19 OPZIONALE P1.0 P1.4 12 8 E1 E2 E3 E4 15 13 11 9 4 RST P0.6 P0.5 14 16 7 XT2 P1.1 P1.7 11 2 6 XT1 C23 0.1u R32 100 PGND DGND 1 20 21 22 SCLK DRDY DOUT DIN R31 100 U12 + OUT C24 N.M. N.M. C22 22p 2 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 GND C11 10n 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 CD POMPA DILUITORE AIN3 AIN2 AIN1 AIN6 AIN4 AIN5 TP8 CL TP9 REF TP10 CO2 9 8 7 17 10 16 U13 C42 C41 C40 C39 C38 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u +5VD IN R25 1 REFIN+ 15 4 U10 LM385Z-2.5 R28 10K C19 47u + DGND R29 10K C20 0.1u +VOUT 6 C18 GND OUT 0.1u 2 GND IN -VOUT 1 5 VIN 78L05 R26 10K C15 0.1u 7 IN DCP020515DP DRAWN BY U14 1 2 ISE VALVE AMP 2/90° R41 1 J2 C37 10n N.M. 1 2 AUX TP11 GND J3 K 9 NA 7 CL 10 REF 8 CO2 6 +2.5V (GND) ISE PREAMPLIFIER +5Va 2 -5Va 5 1 AGND 3 + 4 C14 PIN STRIP 2x5 M/D 1u/T. R27 10K + C16 1u/T. OUT 79L05 DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> AGND AGND AGND PASQUALINI CHECKED DGND DGND J1 PGND OUT C17 0.1u AGND ISE INTERFACE U9 MCLKOUT AD7714 TP7 NA ISE INTERFACE DIN32M/90° DIN32M/90° PGND TP6 K PD 3A 3C P/O J5 C13 10n PGND R30 2K2 DGND PGND P/O J5 2 VD 4A 4C C12 10n VPP AR3 9X100 Y2 3 R24 1 PGND VALVOLA DILUITORE ULN2803A +5VD MCLKIN C21 22p DGND 0 = IMBUTO VUOTO E2 t PTC1 1.2 C43 0.1u +5VD +5VD DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4X4K7 AR2 U8 CLK B DATA B GND R36 1 PGND 4 5 6 11 12 13 23 P0.1 PO.O E1 ISE LAMP K1 K2 K3 K4 PGND VCC Y3 C25 22p 2 4 6 8 87LPC767 DGND 47u/35V VPP VALVOLA DILUITORE REFINAGND CS C27 0.1u 16 14 12 10 14 18 19 TR1 1K C9 + TLP2630 POL SYNC RESET STANDBY AVDD BUFFER DVDD 15 C1 C2 C3 C4 GND SCL AMP 4/90° + U7 24 U11 A1 A2 A3 A4 2.45MHz DGND +5VD 9 DGND 2,6V NO LIQUID 3,6V WHIT LIQUID 10 22p P/O AR5 10K VPP 1 28 14 15 C8 POMPA DILUITORE 1 3 5 7 R37 100 P1.6 P0.3 P0.4 R35 1K +D 1 +E 2 D 3 E 4 22p R38 100 1.8 1/2W 16 47u/35V +5VP TLP521-4 3 18 17 J4 BUBBLES SENSOR PHOTOSWITCH C28 DGND SDA +5VD C44 10n C29 R18 ISE INTERFACE DIN32M/90° 7 6 U6 R39 10K 1.8 1/2W 1 AR1 4X1K DGND R40 10K 17 C10 + - P1.6 P0.7 P0.6 P0.5 12 R17 9C 8C 11C 10C 1 XT1 P/O AR4 1.8 1/2W 1 6 C31 0.1u 26 P/O AR5 47u/16V 10K 13 R16 ISE INTERFACE P/O J5 27 2 15C 7A 13C 7C 12C 6A 11A 8A DIN32M/90° DGND 1.8 1/2W 5 18,432MHz L1 3 +5VP ISE ISE ISE ISE G XT2 POMPA POMPA POMPA POMPA P/O J5 1 7 + PO.O DGND DGND MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE R14 15K FD 1 RST DILUITORE DILUITORE DILUITORE DILUITORE 1 4 R B CLK A CLK B DATA B STRB B 18 S GND P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 E.G. + TLP2630 20 19 18 C1 47u/16V DATA A STRB A CLK A +5VD DGND 0.65A 11 17 12 MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE 1 GND 24 20 21 19 7 6 8 F2 DIN 32M/90° VCC 5 C34 0.1u 1 +5VD 15 87LPC764 8 +5VD TP4 VPP U2 P/O AR5 10K + + 3A DGND C7 - DGND P/O AR4 470 U4 1 A1 2 K1 O1 4 A2 O2 3 K2 R A 5 F1 22p P/O AR4 470 10 11 8 9 R15 15-04408-02 P/O AR5 10K 47u/16V R3 100 9 22p R2 100 10 C35 SCL DGND C36 SDA VPP 1 PGND TP3 1 TP12 25 STRB A MOTOR B PGND 1 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V DGND +5V SDA SCL DGND MOTOR A 23 DATA A 7 6 4 5 6 7 G + C4 0.1u R13 220 22 P/O AR5 10K + 8 P/O AR4 470 PGND 1 ISE INTERFACE P/O AR5 47u/16V 10K - C3 0.1u TP1 2A 2C 10A 12A 14C 1A 1C 14A 16C 13A 15A 16A 5A 6C 9A 5C +5VP + GND + +5VD DL3 GREEN VOUT 220 2W C2 47u/35V DL1 DL2 ORANGE YELLOW +5VD A1 +5VD 5 VIN P/O J5 +5VP U1 L4931CV50 R1 +5VP 1 VPP VPP APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1158 A3 DATE ISE CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04320-01 May 05, 2004 F SHEET 1/1 JACK MALE J1 J1 1 2 P1 J7 A1 SE-04270-01 READING PLATE INTERFACE PELTIER J4 P1 RED J2 P1 J3 P1 J5 P1 J6 P1 E6- BLACK E5+ RED PELT.3 2 1 E4 - 2 1 E3 + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PELTIER E2 - 4 3 2 1 E1 + 2 1 PELT.1 BLACK + RED E3 PELT.2 - BLACK FAN PELTIER + E2 - - E1 FAN + FAN M1 ST1 SH1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> MOTOR TEMP. & HALL SENSORS APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE READING PLATE ASSY DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04334-02 March 19, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 REF. PHOTOD. P1 JACK MALE J1 J1 1 2 P1 J7 A1 SE-04270-01 READING PLATE INTERFACE PELTIER J4 P1 RED J2 P1 J3 P1 J5 P1 J6 P1 E6- BLACK E5+ RED PELT.3 2 1 E4 - 2 1 E3 + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PELTIER E2 - 4 3 2 1 E1 + 2 1 PELT.1 BLACK + RED E3 PELT.2 - BLACK FAN PELTIER + E2 - - FAN E1 + FAN M1 ST1 SH1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> MOTOR TEMP. & HALL SENSORS <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE DRAWING NUMBER READING PLATE ASSY REV. SE-04334-03 July 08, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 DL1 GREEN VACUTAINER R DL1 GREEN VACUTAINER L P1 P1 J3 P2 12-04536-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J2 P2 P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SERUM VACUTAINER " R " SE-04278-01 J1 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 12-04538-01 2 1 2 1 06-04486-01 J3 P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SERUM VACUTAINER " L " SE-04280-01 J1 J2 J1 SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER SE-04422-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 P1 J5 SERUM MOTOR ASSY 08-04349-01 P1 J4 1 2 3 4 J1 SERUM HALL SENSOR SE-04282-01 J3 BARCODE DRAWN BY BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY PASQUALINI F. CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI V. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. 1201 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER SERUM PLATE ASSY REV. SE-04348-02 February 25, 2005 B SHEET 1/1 SPEAKERS UPS HOST PRINTER MODEM KEYBOARD USB X 2 MOUSE TO PERIPHERALS DISABLE MOTHER BOARD ASSY 07-04487-01 USB BOARD ASUS FLEX AUDIO COM2 COM1 PARALL. USB2 USB1 PS/2 PS/2 08-04594-01 IBM FAN INPUT AC COM 3 1 2 3 4 5 RED ORANGE CHA-FAN CPU FAN SERIAL BOARD LCD P1 LCD INTERFACE LCD INVERTER CPU-FAN P1 1 2 3 CPU IBM POWER SUPPLY 200W CN1 COM4 DIMM MASTER LOGIC FLEX USB CONTROLLER TUOCHSCREEN 8WIRE P1 12-04877-01 P2 P1 PWR-SW +12V ATX POWER 12-04741-01 SECONDARY IDE PRIMARY IDE FLOPPY TOUCH-SCREEN HARD DISK CDROM P2 ON/OFF PUSHBUTTON 12-04593-01 N.O. N.O. P3 FLOPPY DISK P4 P1 12-04584-01 P1 TO POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE 1 2 12-04740-01 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE BOX COMPUTER ASSY DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04379-02 July 04, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 LAN1 LAN2 AUX UPS HOST AUX PRINTER AUX AUX SPEAKERS KEYBOARD MOUSE CRT TO PERIPHERALS DISABLE MOTHER BOARD ASSY J1 J2 COM3 COM2 COM1 LPT1 USB2/3 USB2/2 USB1/1 USB1/0 AUDIO 1 KB1 MS1 VGA1 INPUT AC IBM FAN LCD INVERTER J8 LCD CPU-FAN CHA-FAN CPU FAN P1 1 2 3 CPU IBM POWER SUPPLY 200W J7 CN1 DIMM MASTER LOGIC COM4 ATX POWER USB CONTROLLER TUOCHSCREEN PWR-SW J3 13/15 8WIRE PRIMARY IDE SECONDARY IDE FLOPPY TOUCH-SCREEN DVD P2 ON/OFF PUSHBUTTON N.O. N.O. FLOPPY DISK HARD DISK P3 P4 P1 TO POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE P1 1 2 DRAWN BY BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI MENCHINELLI E.M. 01237 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER BOX COMPUTER ASSY REV. SE-04379-03 February 16, 2006 - SHEET 1/1 VPP VIN VOUT + C2 47u/35V C3 0.1u R21 330 DL2 YELLOW DL1 ORANGE DL3 GREEN PGND PGND VPP DGND VPP DGND TP3 VPP 1 PGND PGND + C8 47u/35V F1 C9 47u/35V + 1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL +5VD R20 330 C5 47u/16V TP2 DGND 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 + C4 0.1u TP1 PGND J1 +5VP R19 2K7 GND 270 2W VPP 1 R1 TP5 +5VP +5VP U1 L4931CV50 +5VD 3A MOLEX 5X2/D TP4 +5VD +5VD R4 560 1 F2 R5 560 U5 TLP2630 8 1 0.65A C1 47u/16V PGND +5VP C6 47u 16V + 1 28 R7 10K 15 MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE 4 5 6 7 MOTOR A 23 DATA A J4 SIERI SIERI 1 2 SIERI SIERI 3 4 J5 4 6 DGND 25 STRB A 3 8 9 MOTOR B 10 11 1 2 3 4 J2 DGND R8 560 R17 100 C22 10n C20 22p DGND C24 SCL C14 22u 4 11 12 T2OUT R2IN T2IN R2OUT 10 9 GND 15 C+ 1 3 V- V+ 18 13 8 3 P0.3 P0.7 P1.4 P1.6 12 11 P1.0 P1.1 MAX232 16 14 P0.5 P0.6 87LPC764 DGND R11 10K 13 R B 16 R14 1.8 1/2W R15 1.8 1/2W 20 CLK B 19 STRB B S GND 18 26 12 17 4 3 19 17 20 1 P1.7 2 VCC 15 GND 5 +5VD C10 0.1u DGND Y1 18,432MHz + C15 22u 1.2 1/2W PGND P0.2 P0.4 P0.1 PO.O 2 XT2 T1IN R1OUT C13 22u 7 T1OUT R1IN 6 C16 22u C2+ VCC 14 13 7 8 AMP 4X2/D 5 16 C1- DGND C2- U3 DGND + +5VD CTS DGND DGND RX TX SGND RTS + SERUM BARCODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C17 0.1u + J3 C18 + 22u 9 U2 R3 100 +5VD R13 2 24 CLK A 6 3 5 DGND + R A 4 DGND R2 100 C7 47u 16V 7 10n DGND C21 10n +5VD U4 TLP2630 8 1 R10 10K RST R16 100 DGND R9 560 1.2 1/2W 27 +5VP 2 C19 22p SDA DGND XT1 FLAT10/D +5VD C23 10n R12 6 SERUM VACUTAINER " R " DGND DGND DGND +5V +5V HALL SIERI LED SIERI VACU."L" DGND VACU."R" DGND 15-04408-01 L2 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AUX N.M. 5 R18 100 SERUM MOTOR AMP 4/D 21 DATA B 2 L1 14 22 7 + PGND A1 R6 10K C12 22p C11 22p DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI DGND BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1178 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER REV. SE-04422-01 September 17, 2004 D SHEET 1/1 K1 J1 GND +12V 2 1 POWER SUPPLY 400W +12V 4 3 + MOLEX 2/D P1 2 F1 1 OUTLET 3A E9 N E8 E.G. E7 L S1 C R 0.1u EMI FILTER E1 L E2 E.G. E3 N 100 L E4 E.G. E5 N E6 E10 E.G. INPUT AC/DC POWER SUPPLY 400W IBM POWER SUPPLY 200W J2 L N 1 2 3 4 IBM POWER SUPPLY 200W MOLEX 2X2/D DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED <VISTO> E.M. PERIPHERALS DISABLE SIZE 1136 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04431-01 November 10, 2003 B SHEET 1/1 ARM " L " SE-04872-01 J1 ARM WITH HEATER SE-04438-02 JACK P1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED <VISTO> E.M. 1110 SIZE A4 DATE ARM " L " ASSY DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04436-03 April 28, 2003 B SHEET 1/1 ARM " R " SE-04873-01 J1 ARM WITH HEATER SE-04438-02 JACK P1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED E.M. SIZE <VISTO> A4 1110 DATE ARM " R " ASSY DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04437-03 April 28, 2003 B SHEET 1/1 JACK P1 E3 E2 ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER SE-05023-01 E1 E.G. NEEDLE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED E.M. SIZE <VISTO> A4 1110 DATE ARM WITH HEATER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04438-02 April 28, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 IBM POWER SUPPLY SW1 1 2 3 4 P2 P/0 12-04710-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MASTER POWER N E.G. N L E.G. N L 24V 24V 0V SLOT2 +24V 0V L E4 N E6 E.G. E5 P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 J3 LAMP SOCKET POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE + SE-04661-01 - P5 1 2 ___ INH TRIPLE OUTLET PERIPHERALS DISABLE SE-04431-01 J1 0V + S. - S. E1 E3 E2 SLOT1 P1 +12V J2 P9 12V 12V 0V P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8A INPUT AC LAMP FAN 08-04546-01 0V P1 1 2 J4 P6 1 2 12-04715-01 P/0 12-04712-01 +24RP 0V P7 P2 4 4 3 2 1 12-04718-01 2 12-04710-01 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 E.G. SLOT3 0V J2 P2 CONTROL1 24V P1 L 1 12-04770-01 LOAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F2 + S. - S. 24V P1 8A 2 1 12-04711-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 LINE E1 P2 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER P4 POWER SUPPLY 400W 12-04578-01 1 2 F1 12-04775-01 AIR BLOWER P1 08-04537-01 P8 P2 12-04713-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ISE INTERFACE P2 ARM CONTROLLER " R " 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12-04712-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P1 P1 J6 J5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P1 P1 J7 J8 12-04712-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12-04714-01 L P2 E.G. P11 ARM CONTROLLER " L " COM 4 SERIAL BOARD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P/0 12-04710-01 N P10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 IBM POWER SUPPLY 200W 2P+T MASTER LOGIC P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE WIRED CASE A3 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04439-01 June 28, 2002 C SHEET 1/1 +5Va U1B OPA2111 K 5 + 6 - AGND 7 4 1K 1/8W 8 R1 C2 470n R2 NA 1K 1/8W C1 470n U1A OPA2111 - 5Va 3 + 2 - AGND 1 J1 +5Va U2B OPA2111 CL 5 + 6 - +5Va AGND + 2.5V (GND) 7 AGND 4 1K 1/8W 8 R3 C4 470n R4 REF 1K 1/8W CL K REF NA CO2 - 5Va 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISE CONTROLLER 2X5 F/D C3 470n U2A OPA2111 - 5Va 3 + 2 - AGND 1 +5Va 3 + 2 - AGND 6 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI 4 1K 1/8W 7 R5 CO2 C6 470n U3 AD795 + 2.5V (GND) CHECKED DESCRIPTION ISE PREAMPLIFIER GND C5 470n - 5Va AGND APPROVED SIZE A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER SE-04440-01 March 15, 2002 REV. A SHEET 1/1 A1 A4 MASTER LOGIC MODULE P/O WASHING ASSY PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE WASHER MOTOR ASSY S2 COM 4 SERIAL BOARD VALVE ASSY M3 DILUTER PUMP ASSY V3 M2 J4 E.G. OPTICAL MODULE J2 P1 P1 P1 P1 A2 J12 J1 A4 P1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M1 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 1 PREAMPLIFIER SE-04649-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DILUTER ASSY MASTER LOGIC SE-04211-01 P2 4 3 2 1 P1 J1 4 3 2 1 A5 J11 J8 J7 MASTER POWER MODULE J2 J10 P/O WASHING ASSY J14 E.G. LIQUID SENSOR ASSY P1 1 2 3 4 S1 J9 P1 1 2 REFIL PUMP ASSY A3 MASTER POWER SE-04209-01 J6 P2 P1 1 2 M4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J4 E.G. VALVE ASSY J5 P1 1 2 J13 J1 J3 J1 READING PLATE INTERFACE SE-04270-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 V1 READING PLATE ASSY P1 E.G. HEATER WIRE ASSY J1 JACK MALE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE READING STATION DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04442-04 December 06, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 A1 MASTER LOGIC MODULE A4 P/O WASHING ASSY PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE WASHER MOTOR ASSY S2 COM 4 SERIAL BOARD VALVE ASSY M3 DILUTER PUMP ASSY V3 M2 J4 E.G. TO REFERENCE PHOTODIODE OPTICAL MODULE MASTER LOGIC SE-04211-01 M1 J2 P1 P1 P1 P1 A2 J12 J1 J11 J8 J7 MASTER POWER MODULE J2 J10 P/O WASHING ASSY J14 E.G. LIQUID SENSOR ASSY P1 1 2 3 4 S1 J9 P1 1 2 REFIL PUMP ASSY A3 MASTER POWER SE-04209-01 J6 P2 P1 1 2 M4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J4 E.G. J5 VALVE ASSY P1 V1 1 2 READING PLATE ASSY J13 J1 J3 J1 READING PLATE INTERFACE SE-04270-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A4 P1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 1 PREAMPLIFIER SE-04649-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DILUTER ASSY 2 1 JP1 P2 4 3 2 1 P1 J1 4 3 2 1 P1 3 2 1 A5 P1 E.G. HEATER WIRE ASSY J1 JACK MALE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE DRAWING NUMBER READING STATION REV. SE-04442-05 July 08, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 PELT.1 A1 REAGENTS CONTROLLER MODULE P2 4 3 2 1 P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J7 P1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ASSY 4 3 2 1 15-04680-01 S1 E2 P3 AIR BLOWER 1 2 E3 P4 1 2 3 4 P1 1 2 3 4 E4 CN1/2 CN1/3 E5 E6 J6 P1 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER SE-04313-03 J3 REAGENTS MOTOR ASSY E18 1 2 3 4 M1 E19 E21 J1 P1 REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE PELT.4 E8 SE-8244 E9 E10 E22 REAGENTS HALL SENSOR ASSY 1 2 3 E7 E17 E20 J4 PELT.3 CN1/7 CN1/8 J2 PELT.2 E1 S2 PELT.5 E11 E12 E13 E14 J5 BARCODE PELT.6 E15 E16 PELT.7 E.G. PELT.8 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1101 A3 DATE REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04443-02 March 10, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 COM4 SERIAL BOARD IBM POWER SUPPLY IBM POWER SUPPLY J2 PERIPHERALS DISABLE J4 MASTER LOGIC J2 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J4 J1 MASTER POWER WIRED CASE BOX COMPUTER ASSY P1 AIR BLOWER J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J3 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE READING STATION J13 MASTER POWER POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J6 J7 READING PLATE INTERFACE J1 J1 J1 ARM CONTROLLER " L " ARM CONTROLLER " R " J7 J2 J1 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER SERUM PLATE CONROLLER POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J8 J5 J7 J1 ISE INTERFACE REAGENTS PLATE ASSY ISE UNIT ARM WITH HEATER P1 ARM WITH HEATER P1 SERUM MODULE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE BT3000 PLUS DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04444-04 March 31, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 COM4 SERIAL BOARD IBM POWER SUPPLY IBM POWER SUPPLY J2 PERIPHERALS DISABLE J2 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE BOX COMPUTER ASSY J4 MASTER LOGIC POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J4 J1 MASTER POWER WIRED CASE P1 AIR BLOWER J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J3 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE READING STATION J13 MASTER POWER POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE READING PLATE INTERFACE J1 J1 J1 ARM CONTROLLER " R " POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J5 J7 ARM CONTROLLER " L " J2 J1 J7 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER J7 SERUM PLATE CONROLLER J8 J6 J1 ISE INTERFACE ISE UNIT REAGENTS PLATE ASSY ARM WITH HEATER P1 ARM WITH HEATER P1 SERUM MODULE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE DRAWING NUMBER BT3000 PLUS REV. SE-04444-05 July 08, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 ARM " L " ASSY ARM " L " SE-04872-01 J1 ARM WITH HEATER SE-04438-02 JACK P1 SERUM PLATE ASSY ARM " R " ASSY ARM " R " SE-04873-01 J1 ARM WITH HEATER SE-04438-02 JACK P1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE SERUM MODULE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04445-04 September 18, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 ISE MODULE 06-04655-01 TWO WAY VALVE ASSY 08-04656-01 ISE PUMP ASSY 08-04657-01 P1 P1 1 2 J1 J1 J2 1 2 E.G. VALVE ASSY 08-04574-01 P1 SENSOR ASSY 08-04358-01 J5 P1 1 2 3 4 J4 ISE CONTROLLER SE-04320-01 ISE LAMP ASSY 08-04659-01 1 2 1 2 J5 J6 ISE INTERFACE SE-04503-01 P1 J3 E1 ISE MOTOR PUMP ASSY 08-04658-01 1 2 3 4 E2 P1 AUX J2 J4 J3 ISE PREAMPLIFIER SE-04440-01 J1 DILUTER ASSY 08-04568-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E.G. DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE ISE UNIT A3 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04446-01 April 05, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 ISE MODULE ISE PUMP ASSY 08-04657-01 P1 J1 J1 J2 1 2 E.G. VALVE ASSY 08-04574-01 P1 J5 1 2 J4 ISE CONTROLLER SE-04320-01 ISE LAMP ASSY 08-04659-01 1 2 J5 J6 ISE INTERFACE SE-04503-01 J3 E1 E2 P1 AUX J2 J4 J3 DILUTER ASSY 08-04568-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E.G. DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED <CONTROLLATO> SIZE APPROVED <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE ISE UNIT WITHOUT ISE MODULE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04446-03 April 30, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 J1 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE MOLEX 5X2/D J6 J2 1 2 DILUTER PUMP 2A 2C 10A 12A 14C 1A 1C 16C 13A 15A 14A 16A 3A 3C 9C 8C 11C 10C 5A 5C 15C 7A 13C 7C 12C 6A 11A 8A 4A 4C 6C 9A VPP PD AMP 2/D J3 1 2 3 4 ISE PUMP MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE AMP 4/D J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ISE DILUTER MOTORE FD MOTORE MOTORE DGND MOTORE DGND AMP 4X2/D J5 DILUTER VALVE ISE CONTROLLER DIN 32 F/D 1 2 VPP VD E.G. AMP 2/D DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1163 A4 DATE ISE INTERFACE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04503-01 May 12, 2004 B SHEET 1/1 TP1 +5V U1 LM7805CV JP3 + C1 100u 35V 1 2 3 4 POWER SUPPLY MOLEX 2X2 90° C3 0.1u + C2 100u 35V PGND 1 VOUT GND VIN 100/3W C7 4n7 C4 0.1u TP2 DGND + C5 100u 16V U4 1 EARTH GND R1 J1 +5V 1 C6 4n7 +24V DGND ON 2 N.M. 1 8 2 7 3 6 +24V E1 EARTH GND 4 + EARTH GND +5V +5V BZ1 5 JP2 1 ON 2 DGND - +5V R5 4K7 ON JP1 R4 4K7 DGND 0= WASTE FULL 2 C8 2.2u 16V TOP TOP BOTTOM 2 DGND 0= NO LIQUID BOTTOM 1 0= NO LIQUID 8 3 15 U2 87LPC764 R13 4K7 R14 220 R15 220 R16 4K7 +24V 16 PUMP 1 PUMP 2 P1.0 P0.5 12 16 PROBE 2 PROBE 2 P1.1 P0.6 11 14 P0.7 13 LED EXHAU.CARTR. RST 4 PO.O 1 P1.4 P1.6 VCC GND J5 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 + LAMP 12 13 14 K LED EXHA. CARTR. 15 16 R18 Q1 IRF540 PUMP 1 PUMP 2 PROBE 2 PROBE 2 PROBE 2 PROBE 1 PROBE 1 PROBE 1 RESET 1 PGND Q2 IRF540 PROBE 1 PROBE 1 R19 RESET XT1 XT2 SDA SCL 5 DGND R12 4K7 17 P0.3 P0.2 C9 0.1u DGND R11 1K 1 P0.4 P1.7 +5V AMP 4X2 90° R10 220 U3C R17 PGND 220 U3A 1 CA 470n 6 7 9 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHES (INTERNAL WASTE) R9 4K7 3 J2 + R8 4K7 20 R3 4K7 R7 4K7 2 P0.1 R2 1K 1 R6 4K7 18 PROBE 1 PROBE 2 PUSH BUTTON EXH. CART. LED PERISTALTIC 1 PERISTALTIC 2 AMP 8X2 90° R20 +5V SMD 220 U3B 2 17 DGND CR1 100 J3 7 R21 12 100 3A 13 MOLEX 2 90° 9 4 8 J4 VACUUM PUMP 0.1u F1 2 1 INPUT AC U3G 2 1 +5V 11 +24V R24 4K7 6 1 16 +5V R22 8K2 C11 0.1u C12 0.1u DGND +5V K1 MOLEX 2 90° +24V R23 4K7 U3F 13 U3D 6 15 U3H 4 10 11 C10 10u 16V + DGND 8 ULN2803A 9 PGND DRAWN BY U3E 5 PASQUALINI 14 CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1094 A3 DATE VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04541-01 January 21, 2003 B SHEET 1/1 C2 10p C4 10p C6 10p C8 10p C10 10p R2 50-100M R4 50-100M R6 50-100M R8 50-100M R10 50-100M C1 10p 7 - 8 2 4 8 8 6 + U5A AD648 1 -12Va P10 10K C19 0.1u R20 2K 2 AGND C9 10p R7 50-100M R9 50-100M U4B AD648 7 P5 10K 5 + 6 - U5B AD648 7 P7 10K D7 VTB8441B R15 2K 5 + 6 - 7 P9 10K D9 VTB8441 R17 2K AGND R19 2K AGND AGND AGND -12Va L2 C22 220u/T 17 16 15 14 + AGND S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 A0 A1 A2 A3 +5VD DG406 +5VD D 28 EN S16 18 4 V+ 1 +5VD +12Va C25 0.1u S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 V- 9 8 7 6 5 27 GND 12 U8 PAL110 -12Va 11 1 OUT 2 C23 0.1u 12 8 AR1 4X4K7 U10A 14 6 AGND DGND 17 16 15 14 A0 A1 A2 A3 D 28 EN S16 18 4 V+ 1 +12VA C24 0.1u S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 V- 9 8 7 6 5 27 GND 12 C27 0.1u DGND AGND 1 9 74LS132 U10C DZ1 5V 8 10 3 + REF. PHOT. CABLE AGND 74LS132 12 OUT 8 IN 4 10 14 6 13 JP1 2 11 U10D 2 5 C29 10u 12 DGND 11 R21 2K 6 DGND 7 1 -12Va 74LS132 4 74LS132 13 U9 PAL110 U10B 3 +12Va U7 DG406 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 C28 0.1u 2 10 AGND +12Va 1 IN 4 13 DGND 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11 10 +5VD 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11 10 C21 220u/T 7 U6 FLAT16/D + R18 2K C7 10p D5 VTB8441 R13 2K P8 10K 3 +12Va + MASTER LOGIC 5 AGND L1 J1 -12Va U3B AD648 D3 VTB8441B AGND 1 C17 0.1u R5 4M7 P3 10K 2 2 R11 2K - AGND AGND 2 D1 VTB8441B 6 1 1 P1 10K + R16 2K 1 - 5 - U4A AD648 D10 VTB8441B C5 47p U2B AD648 7 2 AGND R3 50-100M U1B AD648 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C15 0.1u C3 10p R1 50-100M 6 R14 2K AGND + P6 10K + D8 VTB8441B 2 C13 0.1u AGND 5 -12Va D6 VTB8441B 2 2 R12 2K 1 3 2 D4 VTB8441B C11 0.1u - AGND 1 P4 10K 2 U3A AD648 2 -12Va + C20 0.1u 1 1 3 4 - AGND 1 P2 10K 2 U2A AD648 +12Va 2 1 -12Va D2 VTB8441B + +12Va C18 0.1u 1 1 3 +12Va C16 0.1u 4 - AGND 4 2 U1A AD648 1 + 4 3 8 8 AGND +12Va C14 0.1u 1 +12Va C12 0.1u +12Va DRAWN BY C26 0.1u 7 DGND AGND PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1109 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER PREAMPLIFIER REV. SE-04649-01 March 07, 2003 C SHEET 1/1 2 - 1 P2 10K -12Va - P4 10K C13 0.1u R14 2K AGND 3 + 2 - 1 -12Va P6 10K U4A AD648 AGND AGND R16 2K 3 + 2 - 1 -12Va P8 10K D8 VTB8441B C15 0.1u 8 8 8 2 U3A AD648 D6 VTB8441B 2 2 R12 2K + 1 D4 VTB8441B C11 0.1u 3 2 D2 VTB8441B AGND U5A AD648 1 -12Va P10 10K C19 0.1u R20 2K D10 VTB8441B C17 0.1u 2 1 -12Va U2A AD648 C20 0.1u 4 + 4 8 3 +12Va C18 0.1u 1 - AGND 4 2 U1A AD648 R10 100M +12Va C16 0.1u 1 + 4 3 R8 51M +12Va C14 0.1u 8 C12 0.1u AGND R6 51M +12Va C10 10p 1 R4 51M +12Va C8 22p 4 R2 51M C6 22p 2 C4 22p 1 C2 22p AGND R18 2K AGND AGND AGND C1 22p C3 22p C5 47p C7 22p C9 10p R3 51M R5 3M3 R7 51M R9 100M R1 51M - + 6 - 7 P3 10K U4B AD648 D3 VTB8441B P5 10K 6 - U5B AD648 R15 2K 5 + 6 - 7 P7 10K D7 VTB8441B 2 2 + 7 D5 VTB8441 R13 2K 5 7 1 R11 2K D1 VTB8441B 6 U3B AD648 5 P9 10K R19 2K D9 VTB8441 R17 2K 2 P1 10K + 1 1 - 5 2 U2B AD648 7 2 6 + 1 5 1 U1B AD648 AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND +12Va L1 AGND -12Va L2 17 16 15 14 + AGND J1 MASTER LOGIC C22 220u/T 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FLAT16/D S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 A0 A1 A2 A3 +5VD DG406 +5VD D 28 EN S16 18 4 V+ 1 +12Va 11 +12Va 1 -12Va C25 0.1u S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 VGND 12 C23 0.1u 12 AR1 4X4K7 OUT 2 9 8 7 6 5 27 +5VD U8 PAL110 +5VD U10A 8 C28 0.1u 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11 10 C21 220u/T U10B 1 74LS132 R21 2K 4 3 IN 6 2 4 10 5 14 JP1 +12Va 1 74LS132 7 U6 + 6 2 3 + DGND 13 C29 10u 7 AGND 12 DGND 9 11 DGND REF. PHOT. CABLE DZ1 5V 8 13 AGND 10 U7 DG406 AGND DGND 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11 10 17 16 15 14 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 A0 A1 A2 A3 D 28 EN S16 18 4 V+ 1 U10D 11 1 +12VA GND 12 74LS132 OUT 8 +12Va C24 0.1u 9 8 7 6 5 27 U10C 12 -12Va 2 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 V- 74LS132 U9 PAL110 IN 4 10 14 6 DRAWN BY C27 0.1u C26 0.1u 13 PASQUALINI 7 MENCHINELLI AGND DGND AGND MENCHINELLI E.M. PREAMPLIFIER SIZE APPROVED DGND BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED 1256 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04649-01 November 21, 2006 D SHEET 1/1 +D +E +E +D U1 H21A1 E E D D DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04651-01 March 15, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 J5 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL +SENSE CONTROL1 -SENSE GND GND +24RP +24RP MOLEX 4X2/D JP2 ON 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 J1 SHIELD MOLEX 5X2/D EARTH GROUND J6 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL 2 J2 JP1 1 DGND 1 DGND 2 PGND 3 PGND 4 5 -SENSE 6 CONTROL1 7 +SENSE 8 INH/RST 9 +5V 10 +24V 11 +24V 12 +24RP 13 +24RP 14 GND 15 GND 16 SHIELD J7 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL J3 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL J8 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL J4 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MOLEX 5X2/D MOLEX 5X2/D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MOLEX 5X2/D MOLEX 8X2/D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MOLEX 5X2/D DRAWN BY PASQUALINI MOLEX 5X2/D CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. B SE-04661-01 June 27, 2002 SHEET 1/1 PELT.1 E18 + PELT. PELT.3 E17 - PELT. PELT.5 PELT.7 + E1 + E3 - E2 - E4 + E5 + E7 - E6 - E8 + E9 + E11 - E10 - E12 + E13 + E15 - E14 - E16 PELT.2 PELT.4 PELT.6 PELT.8 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1088 A4 DATE REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04680-01 November 25, 2002 B SHEET 1/1 VPP + C13 47u/35V TP5 GND + + C4 0.1u C3 0.1u C5 47u/16V A1 + 7 2 PGND C11 47u 16V 28 14 1 2 3 4 15 22 1 U3 TLP2630 8 1 J2 PGND 1 C C2 47u/35V AR2 470 C 270 2W +5VP +5VP 1 VOUT PGND 5 4 3 2 VIN +5VD 5 4 3 2 +5VP U1 L4931CV50 R1 1 VPP C14 47u/35V + AR1 10K 4 5 6 7 MOTOR A 23 DATA A AMP 4/D 21 DATA B J3 4 6 25 STRB A 3 8 9 MOTOR B 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 VPP +5VP R4 2K7 R5 330 +5VD ANGULAR MOTOR AMP 4/D 15-04408-01 +5VP R6 330 UP/DW MOTOR R12 1.2 1/2W R13 1.2 1/2W 27 R A +5VD 2 DL1 ORANGE DL2 YELLOW PGND DL3 GREEN PGND C20 470n DGND U4 TLP2630 8 1 C12 47u 16V 13 R B 24 CLK A 7 2 + 16 R14 1.8 1/2W DATA CS CS R15 1.8 1/2W CLK 20 CLK B 4 6 3 5 1 26 12 17 R2 C7 100 22p DGND U2 87LPC764 +5VD TP4 +5VD VCC 5 GND C8 0.1u F2 DGND + DGND L1 L2 C9 22p DGND 4 RST 7 XT2 6 XT1 P1.1 P0.4 P1.0 PO.O 12 1 P0.1 P0.2 P0.5 P0.6 P1.6 P1.7 Y1 C10 22p VCC GND 11 17 20 19 16 14 3 2 A3121EU DGND +5VD R11 100 C16 10n R9 1K DGND R10 47 U6 RECEIVER DL5 RED P1.4 P0.7 P0.3 O.65A C1 47u/16V 15 U5 OUT 8 13 18 MOLEX 5X2/D PGND SCL 3A DGND C19 0.1u UP DL4 RED 9 F1 R3 100 SDA 1 C6 22p 18.432MHz DGND VPP 10 TP3 PGND 1 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL R8 1K R7 4K7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER DGND +5VD TP2 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FLAT10/D S GND 18 3 TP1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE 19 STRB B J4 VCC OUT R16 100 DGND C18 47u + GND IS1U60 C15 10n + C17 22u DGND DGND DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1178 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER ARM L CONTROLLER REV. SE-04765-01 September 17, 2004 E SHEET 1/1 VPP + C13 47u/35V TP5 GND + + C4 0.1u C3 0.1u C5 47u/16V A1 + 7 2 PGND C11 47u 16V 28 14 1 2 3 4 15 22 1 U3 TLP2630 8 1 J2 PGND 1 C C2 47u/35V AR2 470 C 270 2W +5VP +5VP 1 VOUT PGND 5 4 3 2 VIN +5VD 5 4 3 2 +5VP U1 L4931CV50 R1 1 VPP C14 47u/35V + AR1 10K 4 5 6 7 MOTOR A 23 DATA A AMP 4/D 21 DATA B J3 4 6 25 STRB A 3 8 9 MOTOR B 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 VPP +5VP R4 2K7 R5 330 +5VD ANGULAR MOTOR AMP 4/D 15-04408-01 +5VP R6 330 UP/DW MOTOR R12 1.2 1/2W R13 1.2 1/2W 27 R A +5VD 2 DL1 ORANGE DL2 YELLOW PGND DL3 GREEN PGND C20 470n DGND U4 TLP2630 8 1 C12 47u 16V 13 R B 24 CLK A 7 2 + 16 R14 1.8 1/2W DATA CS CS R15 1.8 1/2W CLK 20 CLK B 4 6 3 5 1 26 12 17 R2 C7 100 22p DGND U2 87LPC764 +5VD TP4 +5VD VCC 5 GND C8 0.1u F2 DGND + DGND L1 L2 C9 22p DGND 4 RST 7 XT2 6 XT1 P1.1 P0.4 P1.0 PO.O 12 1 P0.1 P0.2 P0.5 P0.6 P1.6 P1.7 Y1 C10 22p VCC GND 11 17 20 19 16 14 3 2 A3121EU DGND +5VD R11 100 C16 10n R9 1K DGND R10 47 U6 RECEIVER DL5 RED P1.4 P0.7 P0.3 O.65A C1 47u/16V 15 U5 OUT 8 13 18 MOLEX 5X2/D PGND SCL 3A DGND C19 0.1u UP DL4 RED 9 F1 R3 100 SDA 1 C6 22p 18.432MHz DGND VPP 10 TP3 PGND 1 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL R8 1K R7 4K7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER DGND +5VD TP2 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FLAT10/D S GND 18 3 TP1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE 19 STRB B J4 VCC OUT R16 100 DGND C18 47u + GND IS1U60 C15 10n + C17 22u DGND DGND DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1178 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER ARM R CONTROLLER REV. SE-04765-02 September 17, 2004 E SHEET 1/1 VDD U1 SMD 2 +5VD DATA PROG 4 7 PD/CS NC 5 8 CLK NC 6 3 +5VD J1 DATA CS CS C1 2.2u/10V SMD + C2 2.2u/10V SMD AS5020 DGND CLK +5VD U2 SMD VDD DGND 2 TRANSIZ. 10 DATA PROG 4 7 PD/CS NC 5 8 CLK NC 6 VSS 1 3 ARM CONTROLLER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 + VSS 1 AS5020 DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04767-01 June 12, 2002 A SHEET 1/1 UP/DW MOTOR 08-04891-01 P1 J2 J1 ANGULAR MOTOR 08-04733-01 P1 ARM CONTROLLER SE-04765-01 J3 1 2 3 4 J4 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE 1 2 3 4 P1 ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER SE-05234-01 J1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED MENCHINELLI MENCHINELLI E.M. ARM " L " SIZE APPROVED 1196 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04872-01 December 20, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 UP/DW MOTOR 08-04891-01 P1 J2 J1 ANGULAR MOTOR 08-04733-01 P1 ARM CONTROLLER SE-04765-02 J3 1 2 3 4 J4 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE 1 2 3 4 P1 ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER SE-05234-01 J1 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED MENCHINELLI MENCHINELLI E.M. ARM " R " SIZE APPROVED 1196 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04873-01 December 20, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 +5VD R2 1K DL1 GIALLO 1 +5VD P/O D1 E1 0.3V Q1 P0102BL (NO H20) + 1 +5VD Y1 VX3E-500 5MHz OUT 3 4 - C1 22n 2 E2 E3 OUT BAS70-04 P/O D1 C5 100p C2 C3 1n 470p C4 22n TR1 N.M. R1 6K8 1 DGND 1 1 DGND E4 E5 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. 1159 A4 DATE LIQUID SENSOR DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-04902-01 May 05, 2004 B SHEET 1/1 +E +D U1 TLP814 J1 4 3 2 1 C1 22n DILUTER MOTOR AMP4 90° E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 GRIGIO MARRONE ARANCIO BLU ROSSO GIALLO E7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 E8 NERO D VERDE E P1 AMP 4X2FV DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05021-01 April 08, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 +E +D J1 U1 SG-211V 4 3 2 1 C1 22n DILUTER MOTOR AMP4 90° E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 MARRONE GRIGIO ARANCIO BLU ROSSO GIALLO E7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 E8 VERDE D NERO E P1 AMP 4X2FV DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED MENCHINELLI THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. MENCHINELLI E.M. DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR SIZE APPROVED 01245 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05021-01 May 26, 2006 B SHEET 1/1 U1 LM2931BD50 C5 10u 5 E2 VOUT 1 GND ARM WIRE VIN INH 8 E3 +5V +5V C7 470n 2,3,6,7 R2 33 GND DL1 LD274 U2 87LPC764 6 RES1 8MHz C1 D3 E1 470p RA DA 100K 1/8W BAT48 SDA SCL P1.1 P1.0 9 10 11 12 7 XT2 D1 BAT48 16 P0.5 P1.4 P0.7 P0.6 P0.3 P0.2 P0.1 8 13 14 18 19 20 VCC 15 BAS216 C2 1n 17 R1 100K R5 1M C4 10V 2.2u C6 P0.4 PO.O P1.7 P1.6 RST D2 BAS216 + R4 1M +5V + GND C3 2u2/10V 5 GND 1 2 3 4 NEEDLE WIRE GND XT1 RES2 8MHz DL2 RED R3 N.M. E.G. 1n GND E.G. DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE E.M. DATE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> 1188 A4 DRAWING NUMBER ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER REV. SE-05023-01 October 29, 2004 D SHEET 1/1 COM4 SERIAL BOARD IBM POWER SUPPLY IBM POWER SUPPLY J2 PERIPHERALS DISABLE J2 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J4 MASTER LOGIC POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE BOX COMPUTER ASSY J4 J1 MASTER POWER WIRED CASE P1 AIR BLOWER J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J3 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE READING STATION J13 MASTER POWER POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE READING PLATE INTERFACE J1 J1 J1 ARM CONTROLLER " R " POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE J5 J7 ARM CONTROLLER " L " J2 J1 J7 REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER J7 SERUM PLATE CONROLLER J8 J6 J1 ISE INTERFACE ISE UNIT REAGENTS PLATE ASSY ARM WITH HEATER P1 ARM WITH HEATER P1 SERUM MODULE DRAWN BY PASQUALINI BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED <CONTROLLATO> SIZE APPROVED <VISTO> E.M. A3 <P.d.V.> DATE BT3000 PLUS ( WHITOUT ISE) DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05050-01 April 30, 2003 A SHEET 1/1 TP1 +5V U1 L4931CV50 POWER SUPPLY 24V 1 2 3 4 MOLEX 2X2/D + C2 100u 35V VOUT GND VIN 330/2W + C1 100u 35V C3 0.1u PGND C4 0.1u + C5 100u 16V TP2 DGND 1 R1 J1 +5V 1 +24V DGND +24V F1 3A + 5V + 5V +5V + R2 10K JP1 2 DGND P0.1 DZA 12V 9 10 SDA SCL 7 6 XT2 XT1 +5V J7 1 2 VCC P1.4 P0.2 8 19 P1.0 P1.6 12 3 P1.1 PO.O 11 1 P0.7 13 RST 4 C8 0.1u N.M. 1 5 TR2 10K GND P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 AUX 15 P1.7 2 DGND R4 330 DL2 YELLOW DL1 GREEN NORMAL PRESSURE R15 330 R5 330 R6 10K R7 680 C14 0.1u J2 R9 10 DL3 RED MOLEX 2/D J3 MOLEX 2/D Q1 SPP47N10L R18 100K PGND RESET PGND PROBE LED PROBE CONT. PROBE GND U2 87LPC767 DGND J4 1 2 3 4 PROBE AMP 4/D J5 3 +5V C6 0.1u 0.68u +5V R16 +12V 820K 8 DGND R17 820K DGND DGND R14 R10 10K 1K R19 330 1 U4A AD822AN R11 C13 0.1u + DGND AMP 4/D TLP521-2 1 8 2 7 3 6 C15 2u2/10V (SMD) C11 0.1u + C12 10u 16V 100 4 5 SW1 RESTART 1,2 1 2 R8 DGND + Q2 2 TIP122 3K9 - DGND PGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI LOW PRESSURE ALARM RED= <16mbar LOW PRESSURE YELLOW= 16-30mbar NORMAL PRESSURE GREEN= > 30mbar SOLENOID VALVE AMP 2/D GREEN 3,4 DGND J6 3 3K9 U3 ANALYZER (DOS) 1 3 4 R13 2 + C9 0.1u 3K9 - VCC + GND - R12 C7 0.1u 1 2 3 4 +12V +5V SP1 CONT. GND 0.2V a 16mbar C10 1 2 3 4 PUMP2 DX 1 2 LOW PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE ALARM ANALYZER ANALYZER DGND SENS. PRESS. PUMP1 SX 1 2 18 17 16 14 2 R3 330 - 20 1 BZ1 SMA-21 BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. 1191 A3 DATE VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05085-01 November 29, 2004 E SHEET 1/1 DL1 NORMAL PRESSURE DL2 LOW PRESSURE DL3 LOW PRESSURE ALARM SW1 RESTART 1 2 J5 J6 1 2 3 4 1 2 P1 1 2 12-05168-01 SOLENOID VALVE EARTH GROUND VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER SE-05085-01 P2 1 TO WASTE PROBE SE-05165-01 12-05164-01 3 2 P1 J4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J3 1 2 P1 + 1 2 - PUMP 2 (DX) EARTH GROUND F1 0.5A/250V L J7 12-05169-01 J2 1 2 LINE 95-240VAC 1 2 P1 + 1 2 - N F2 PUMP 1 (SX) EARTH GROUND 0.5A/250V J1 1 2 3 4 L N AL1 1 2 3 4 EARTH GROUND P1 AC/DC FG EARTH GROUND 24VDC + - 12-05171-01 DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE VACUUM SYSTEM DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05161-01 April 29, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 J1 1 3 2 LV1 2 FISHER 3 DL1 1= WASTE FULL 1 RED WASTE FULL DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE <CONTROLLATO> <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE WASTE PROBE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05165-01 April 29, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 + R1 1K 5VDC + 0.1u 0V + +5VD +5VDX +5VDX +5VP R9 47u/16V 10K +V 24VDC C4 10u/35V +5VP R2 1K 5VDC GND C5 R3 2K7 C6 + 0.1u 0V R4 330 R5 330 DL1 DL2 ORANGE YELLOW 10u/16V R6 330 DL3 GREEN R7 560 R8 560 1 2 4 3 DL4 RED 22 C17 + R10 10K U4 23 DATA A A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 7 6 21 DATA B 25 STRB A DGND PGND TLP2630 PGND TP1 PGND DGND DGND 1 TP2 +5VDX R A +5VP + PGND +5VDX TP4 15 1 MOLEX 5X2/90° C7 47u/35V +5VD F2 5 GND 4 RST 18,432MHz 6 C15 22p 28 + C19 8 18 S GND 3 47u/35V 26 8 13 3 P1.4 P0.7 P1.6 +5VD C25 7 T1IN R1OUT T1OUT R1IN 14 13 10 9 T2IN R2OUT T2OUT R2IN 7 8 15 GND V- 6 NTC1 10K 2 C22 10n RH GND +24VRP 0.1u GND DZ1 3.9V 8 C31 C27 22u R18 0.1u U7A MAX492 U9 6N136 +24VRP 100 R19 3 1K C30 4,7u/16V + R20 1K DL5 WHITE R41 8K2 PTC1 6 1 2 t +24VRP C37 4 U11 TLP521-1 U8 TLP521-1 DGND AMP2/90° 10n R40 10 J7 +TEMP.REAG. OUT TEMP.REAG. 1 GND TEMP.REAG. 2 3 +VENT.TANG. 4 GND VENT.TANG. 5 6 7 8 +PELT. 9 +PELT. 10 -PELT. 11 -PELT. 12 TEMP. SENSOR PELTIERS AIR BLOWER MOLEX 6X2/90° Q1 BUZ111S Q2 BUZ111S 4 3 2 2 3 E TP8 1 C35 47u/35V R22 10K 1 C Q3 TIP122 B + R23 560 ACCESS SENSOR C29 0.1u DGND +5VDX R37 22K J6 +5VDX DGND +5VDX R36 560 AMP 4X2/90° C23 10n 2 REAGENT BARCODE 1 2 DGND MOLEX 4X2/90° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DGND DGND RX TX SGND R17 4K7 DGND R21 10K 1 3 TP7 (16-26V) 3 1 2 5 MAX232 DGND J5 +5VD +5VDX + C32 0.1u 7 6 1W C28 + C21 22u 22u 8 PD2 R24 560 DGND 1 GND GND +24rp +24rp C34 0.1u PD1 1W C33 R38 4K7 +5VD C36 10n R35 10K 1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE +SENSE CONTROL1 -SENSE RH R25 10K + +5VDX 4 0=COLD 1=HOT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C13 4.7u R39 15K R26 100 J2 +5VDX AMP 3/90° REAGENT HALL SENSOR DGND DGND 2 +24VRP R27 12K R28 10K t DGND DGND + U10 TLP521-1 C1- C9 10n 3 C+ 4 V+ 5 U7B MAX492 5 C2- 11 12 - 1 LINE ON C2+ VCC +5VDX 2 6 DGND 16 1 R29 10K U6 C24 0.1u 22u 4 C26 22u 1K J4 OUT HALL REAG. + HALL REAG. 1 GND HALL REAG. 2 3 R34 10K DGND DGND R33 0.1u +5VDX C16 10n + R30 1K C20 PGND + DGND +5VDX R16 4K7 R15 100 XT2 XT1 VPP 20 CLK B 2 18 P1.7 P0.3 Y1 C14 22p 7 6 + +5VDX L2 1.2 1/2W 1 24 CLK A A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 TLP2630 PO.O P0.6 P1.1 P1.0 L1 R12 10K 1 14 11 12 DGND 7 15-04408-01 C18 + U5 R14 AMP 4/90° DLA GREEN DGND + C8 47u/16V 1 2 4 3 19 17 20 16 P0.2 P0.4 P0.1 P0.5 VCC + C12 2u2/10V (SMD) 0.65A +5VD SCL 3A U3 87LPC767 1.2 1/2W + DGND R13 - DGND 10 F1 R11 560 REAGENT MOTOR 27 5 VPP DGND C10 22p R31 100 9 PGND R32 C11 100 22p SDA TP3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL 1 2 3 4 2 47u/16V 1 J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE PGND J3 REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI 5 PGND MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE 4 MOTOR A 5 6 7 - GND C2 A1 VPP 8 VIN C3 10u/16V +5VP 1 1 U2 NME2405S +V 24VDC C1 10u/35V TP6 VPP + VIN +5VDX + TP5 U1 NME2405S - VPP DRAWN BY DZ2 15V EGND THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY PASQUALINI F. CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI V. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. 01206 A3 DATE REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05211-01 March 31, 2005 B SHEET 1/1 TP5 TP6 A1 VPP U2 NME2405S R1 1K C2 R2 1K + C5 R5 330 R6 330 R7 560 22 C17 + R8 560 U4 DL1 DL2 ORANGE YELLOW 10u/16V DL3 GREEN 1 2 4 3 DL4 RED 0V R10 10K 23 DATA A A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 7 6 J3 21 DATA B 25 STRB A DGND PGND TLP2630 PGND TP1 PGND DGND 1 DGND TP2 +5VDX +5VP R13 1.2 1/2W R14 1.2 1/2W R32 C11 100 22p C10 22p C18 + R11 560 U5 C7 47u/35V +5VDX TP4 15 1 + +5VD C12 2u2/10V (SMD) F2 GND + C8 47u/16V 4 RST 18,432MHz 7 L2 C14 22p C15 22p + 47u/35V 3 26 +5VDX R16 4K7 8 13 3 P1.4 P0.7 P1.6 DGND 0.1u C16 10n +5VD AMP 3/90° R34 10K DGND C25 C24 0.1u 1 16 T1OUT R1IN 14 13 10 9 T2IN R2OUT T2OUT R2IN 7 8 t DGND DGND 15 GND V- 6 + R38 4K7 R24 390 GND 8 2 GND DZ1 3.9V R21 10K 1 3 5 8 0.1u U7A MAX492 U9 6N136 TP7 (16-26V) R19 2 DGND 3 1K C29 0.1u DGND C30 4,7u/16V + R20 1K WHITE R41 8K2 PTC1 6 1 2 t +5VDX +24VRP 1 +24VRP +5VDX C37 10n R40 10 MOLEX 4X2/90° R37 22K R23 560 C R36 560 ACCESS SENSOR AMP2/90° +5VDX DGND +24VRP J6 1 2 DL5 GND GND +24rp +24rp 100 DGND 4 C34 0.1u R18 DGND 7 6 1W AMP 4X2/90° C23 10n + POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE +SENSE CONTROL1 -SENSE PD2 RH 1W REAGENT BARCODE R17 4K7 DGND - PD1 RH C27 22u 0.1u C32 0.1u C33 R25 10K R28 10K DGND 22u C31 R26 100 MAX232 + C13 4.7u R39 15K R27 12K 3 1 C28 +5VDX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DGND DGND RX TX SGND +5VDX + +5VDX 0=COLD 1=HOT DGND 2 +24VRP C1- NTC1 10K 2 C22 10n C+ C9 10n 3 U10 TLP521-1 J5 +5VD + C21 22u 1 4 5 VCC T1IN R1OUT V+ +5VD C36 10n R35 10K C2- + +5VDX LINE ON 5 DGND 11 12 2 1K 4 U6 C2+ C26 22u R29 10K 6 U7B MAX492 REAGENT HALL SENSOR DGND 7 DGND R33 J4 OUT HALL REAG. + HALL REAG. 1 GND HALL REAG. 2 3 +5VDX 22u R30 1K C20 PGND + +5VDX + C19 18 S GND R15 100 XT2 XT1 28 20 CLK B 2 18 P1.7 P0.3 Y1 6 TLP2630 PO.O P0.6 P1.1 P1.0 L1 7 6 1 14 11 12 DGND 24 CLK A A1 K1 O1 A2 O2 K2 DLA GREEN DGND 0.65A +5VD 5 19 17 20 16 P0.2 P0.4 P0.1 P0.5 VCC 1 2 4 3 1 - + SCL 3A U3 87LPC767 R12 10K 5 DGND 9 DGND SDA F1 10 DGND VPP 15-04408-01 R31 100 8 VPP 1 PGND MOLEX 5X2/90° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AMP 4/90° 2 47u/16V TP3 PGND J2 REAGENT MOTOR 27 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PGND PGND DGND DGND RST +24V +24V +5V SDA SCL 1 2 3 4 R A J1 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE PGND REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI REAGENTI 5 PGND MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE MOTORE 4 MOTOR A 5 6 7 - GND R4 330 C6 0.1u 0V R9 47u/16V 10K + 5VDC C4 10u/35V 0.1u GND 24VDC + 5VDC +5VP +5VDX +V R3 2K7 C3 10u/16V +5VD + 24VDC + C1 10u/35V +5VP 8 VIN +5VDX VPP + +V +5VP - VIN +5VDX 1 U1 NME2405S 1 VPP J7 +TEMP.REAG. OUT TEMP.REAG. 1 GND TEMP.REAG. 2 3 +VENT.TANG. 4 GND VENT.TANG. 5 6 7 8 +PELT. 9 +PELT. 10 -PELT. 11 -PELT. 12 R22 10K TEMP. SENSOR PELTIERS AIR BLOWER MOLEX 6X2/90° Q1 BUZ111S 1 4 4 3 3 Q2 BUZ111S DRAWN BY 2 2 U11 TLP521-1 E TP8 1 C35 47u/35V 1 Q3 TIP122 B + DZ2 15V U8 TLP521-1 PASQUALINI F. MENCHINELLI V. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER SIZE APPROVED EGND THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED 01255 A3 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05211-01 November 02, 2006 C SHEET 1/1 +5VD R4 4K7 J2 +5VD 1 2 3 AUX R5 100 MOLEX 3 D DGND U1 C5 10n DGND +5VD J1 ARM CONTROLLER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 R3 18K DATA OPTIONAL CLK TRANSIZ. 10 DGND R6 100 Vss Vdd Vss LE N.C. N.C. Vss Vss Vss Vdd Vdd BP AGD AGDI VB OSCF Ihal Boh Isin Icos Vss BP BP CLOCK TSC B N.C. Ri A Vss BP DATA N.C. N.C. Sin Cos ERR PRG PROG 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + C1 2.2u/10V AM-512 S/I C2 0.1u R1 82K R2 100 C3 N.M. C4 N.M. C6 10n E1 DGND E.G. DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION <CONTROLLATO> APPROVED SIZE <VISTO> E.M. A4 <P.d.V.> DATE ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05234-01 November 10, 2004 A SHEET 1/1 +5VD R4 N.M. J2 1 2 3 AUX +5VD R5 N.M. N.M. DGND C5 N.M. U1 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 DGND +5VD J1 ARM CONTROLLER R3 18K DATA 1 OPTIONAL 2 3 4 CLK 5 6 7 8 9 10 TRANSIZ. 10 R6 100 DGND C2 0.1u C6 10n E.G. E1 R1 82K Vss RefN Vdd Vss LE N.C. Vss Vss Vss Vdd Vdd BP RefP AGD AGDI Ihal N:C: Boh R25 P/S Vss BP BP CLOCK TSC Vni B Vdd Ri A SIN Vss BP COS Vout DATA Vgi N.C. N.C. Sin Cos ERR PRG PROG AM-512b E3 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 E2 + R2 100 C3 N.M. C1 2.2u/10V C4 N.M. DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI F. DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE MENCHINELLI V. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY CHECKED MENCHINELLI V. E.M. 01238 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER REV. SE-05234-01 February 28, 2006 A SHEET 1/1 +5VD R4 N.M. J2 1 2 3 AUX +5VD R5 N.M. N.M. DGND C5 N.M. U1 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 DGND +5VD J1 ARM CONTROLLER R3 18K DATA 1 OPTIONAL 2 3 4 CLK 5 6 7 8 9 10 TRANSIZ. 10 DGND R6 100 Vss RefN Vdd Vss LE N.C. Vss Vss Vss Vdd Vdd BP RefP AGD AGDI Ihal N:C: Boh R25 P/S Vss BP BP CLOCK TSC Vni B Vdd Ri A SIN Vss BP COS Vout DATA Vgi N.C. N.C. Sin Cos ERR PRG PROG 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 E2 + C1 2.2u/10V AM-512b C2 0.1u R1 82K R2 100 C3 10n C4 10n E3 C6 10n E1 DGND E.G. DRAWN BY PASQUALINI F. BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY DESCRIPTION CHECKED MENCHINELLI V. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY. MENCHINELLI V. E.M. ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER SIZE APPROVED 01276 A4 DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-05234-01 March 27, 2007 B SHEET 1/1 PV1 VAC1 F1 2A INPUT AC F2 VAC2 5V AL1 L L N N LAMP1 AC/DC 2A PS1 NO + JWS50-24A 24VDC + FG EARTH GND NO J1 LV3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P2 WB2 RIGHT LV2 LV4 2 1 2 J2 A3 662.0788B PROBE 2 FISHER 3 AMP 8X2 L VAC1 C1 VAC2 10n M2 24V 1n C4 C3 1n 10n VP1 1 2 C2 EARTH GND 1n A L2 VACUUM PUMP 220VAC C5 + C6 - EARTH GND 1 N M1 24V P3 MOLEX 2 L3 1n EARTH GND 2 P4 MOLEX 2 L1 2 1 0= NO LIQUID J3 2 1 J4 + 1 J2 VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER 15-04541-01 AMP 4X2 LEFT INTERNAL WASTE 2 A INTERNAL WASTE 1 J5 A1 - WB1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P1 P5 2 3 2 LV1 1 P1 1 0= WASTE FULL J1 FISHER 3 A2 662.0788A PROBE 1 4 3 2 1 P1 MOLEX 2X2 1 3 2 EARTH GND L4 L N DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-662.0788 September 06, 2001 SHEET 1/1 2 3 P1 FISHER 3 DL1 RED 1 TO VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM 2 EXTERNAL WASTE FULL LV1 1 1= EXTERNAL WASTE FULL DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE WASTE PROBE-1 A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-662.0788A September 06, 2001 SHEET 1/1 2 3 P1 FISHER 3 DL1 RED 1 TO VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM 2 EXTERNAL WASTE FULL LV1 1 1= EXTERNAL WASTE FULL DGND DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE WASTE PROBE - 2 A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-662.0788B September 06, 2001 SHEET 1/1 PV1 VAC1 F1 4A INPUT AC F2 VAC2 5V AL1 L L N N LAMP1 AC/DC 4A PS1 NO + JWS50-24A 24VDC + FG EARTH GND NO J1 LV3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P2 WB2 RIGHT LV2 LV4 2 1 2 J2 A3 662.0788B PROBE 2 FISHER 3 AMP 8X2 L VAC1 C1 VAC2 10n M2 24V 1n C4 C3 1n 10n VP1 1 2 C2 EARTH GND 1n A L2 VACUUM PUMP 110VAC C5 + C6 - EARTH GND 1 N M1 24V P3 MOLEX 2 L3 1n EARTH GND 2 P4 MOLEX 2 L1 2 1 0= NO LIQUID J3 2 1 J4 + 1 J2 VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER 15-04541-01 AMP 4X2 LEFT INTERNAL WASTE 2 A INTERNAL WASTE 1 J5 A1 - WB1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P1 P5 2 3 2 LV1 1 P1 1 0= WASTE FULL J1 FISHER 3 A2 662.0788A PROBE 1 4 3 2 1 P1 MOLEX 2X2 1 3 2 EARTH GND L4 L N DRAWN BY PASQUALINI CHECKED DESCRIPTION APPROVED SIZE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM A4 E.M. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV. SE-662.0788E September 06, 2001 SHEET 1/1